Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
Maintenance Manual
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual Sep 2009
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (ii) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Amendment Record
Each page of this publication bears the date of initial issue. Subsequent amendments to this
publication will bear the amendment number and its date of issue.
Amendments should be incorporated in strict numerical order so that the technical
integrity and accuracy of the publication are retained.
Incorporation of amendments should be recorded on the Amendment Record below.
01 27
02 28
03 29
04 30
05 31
06 32
07 33
08 34
09 35
10 36
11 37
12 38
13 39
14 40
15 41
16 42
17 43
18 44
19 45
20 46
21 47
22 48
23 49
24 50
25 51
26 52
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (iii) Sep 2009
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (iv) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Copyright
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language by any means or in
any form, without the express prior written permission of Linx Printing Technologies Ltd.
Neither whole nor part of the product described in this manual may be adapted or
reproduced in any material form without the express prior written permission of Linx
Printing Technologies Ltd.
Contravention of copyright may also reduce the ability of Linx Printing Technologies Ltd to
provide effective support for its equipment.
This First edition published 2009
© Linx Printing Technologies Ltd 2009
LINX is a registered trademark of Linx Printing Technologies Ltd.
Manual Content
The content of this manual is provided for information only. Nothing in the content of this
manual represents, or should be construed as, any contractual or other commitment on the
part of Linx Printing Technologies Ltd.
Linx products are subject to continual development and improvement, and updates to the
content of this manual will be made accordingly in the form of amendments.
Linx reserves the right to make changes without notice to both this publication and to the
products described herein.
All possible care has been taken in the preparation of this manual, and information of a
technical nature and particulars of the product and its use are given by Linx in good faith.
However, Linx makes no guarantees regarding the accuracy or completeness of this
publication.
Safety Recommendation
Before attempting to use either the printer or its accessories, the information contained in
the ‘Safety’ chapter should be read. It is essential that safe operating procedures are
followed at all times, and that the equipment is maintained according to the directions
contained herein and as recommended by Linx or its authorized Distributors. It is strongly
recommended that maintenance tasks described in this manual are performed only by Linx
maintenance technicians or Linx-trained personnel.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (v) Sep 2009
About This Manual
The purpose of this manual is to provide maintenance technicians with sufficient
information to safely and effectively carry out maintenance tasks on the Linx 7300
Continuous Ink Jet Printer.
The information contained in this manual is applicable to Version 4.1 System Software or
later, unless otherwise stated.
Linx will be pleased to receive any correspondence relating to this manual and the
information contained herein; please write to us at the address below.
For further information or help with Linx products, please contact:
Linx Printing Technologies Ltd
Burrel Road
St Ives
Cambridgeshire
PE27 3LA
UK
Tel: + 44 (0) 1480 302100
Fax: + 44 (0) 1480 302116
E-mail: sales@linx.co.uk
or visit our website at www.linxglobal.com
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (vi) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Contents
Amendment Record .......................................................................................... iii
Copyright ............................................................................................................ v
Manual Content .................................................................................................. v
Safety Recommendation .................................................................................... v
About This Manual ............................................................................................ vi
Contents ........................................................................................................... vii
List of Figures ............................................................................................ xv
Document Conventions .................................................................................. xxii
Text Conventions ...................................................................................... xxii
Other Conventions .................................................................................. xxiii
Additional Publications .................................................................................. xxiii
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (viii) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.7.7 Low Voltage Power Supply Unit (LVPSU) ................................... 3—63
3.7.8 EHT Power Supply Unit (EHTPSU) ............................................ 3—64
3.7.9 Ink System Pump ........................................................................ 3—65
3.7.10 Ink System Valves and Cableform Assembly ............................ 3—65
3.7.11 Cooling Fan ............................................................................... 3—66
3.7.12 Printhead Positive Air Pump ...................................................... 3—66
3.8 Electronics and Software ..................................................................... 3—67
3.8.1 Overview ..................................................................................... 3—67
3.8.2 Circuit Diagrams .......................................................................... 3—67
3.8.3 IPM PCB ..................................................................................... 3—67
3.8.4 Display PCB ................................................................................ 3—76
3.8.5 Auxiliary PCBs ............................................................................. 3—76
3.8.6 Software ...................................................................................... 3—77
3.9 External Signals ................................................................................... 3—77
3.9.1 Primary Trigger ............................................................................ 3—77
3.9.2 Secondary Trigger ....................................................................... 3—79
3.9.3 Shaft Encoders ........................................................................... 3—80
3.9.4 Alarm Output ............................................................................... 3—82
3.9.5 Dual Alarm .................................................................................. 3—84
The following examples are a common arrangement: ......................... 3—84
3.9.6 Multi-Stage Alarm ........................................................................ 3—84
3.9.7 Serial Interface ............................................................................ 3—85
3.9.8 Parallel I/O Interface ................................................................... 3—86
3.9.9 Ethernet Interface ....................................................................... 3—88
3.9.10 USB Facility ............................................................................... 3—88
3.9.11 D-Type Connector Assembly ..................................................... 3—89
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (ix) Sep 2009
5.3 Maintenance Page ................................................................................. 5—5
5.3.1 Jet Functions ................................................................................. 5—5
5.3.2 Monitor Jet .................................................................................... 5—8
5.3.3 Maintenance Times ..................................................................... 5—15
5.3.4 Charge Calibration ...................................................................... 5—17
5.3.5 Jet Sequences ............................................................................ 5—19
5.3.6 Valves .......................................................................................... 5—23
5.3.7 Test Message .............................................................................. 5—24
5.3.8 System Flush .............................................................................. 5—25
5.3.9 Print and Consumables History ................................................... 5—26
5.4 Maintenance Instructions ..................................................................... 5—29
5.4.1 Introduction ................................................................................. 5—29
5.4.2 Maintenance Terminology ........................................................... 5—29
5.4.3 Antistatic Precautions .................................................................. 5—30
5.4.4 Recommended Procedures ........................................................ 5—30
5.4.5 7300 CE Approval Checklist ........................................................ 5—31
5.4.6 Scheduled Maintenance Checklist .............................................. 5—32
5.4.7 Maintenance Instruction Documents ........................................... 5—32
Scheduled Maintenance ............................................................. 5—33
Printhead Cleaning for Pigmented Inks ...................................... 5—43
Draining the Ink System .............................................................. 5—47
Spectrum Ink Tank Removal ....................................................... 5—53
Ink Tank Dip Tube Replacement ................................................. 5—57
3-Way Fluid Connector Filter Replacement ................................ 5—61
Main Ink Filter Replacement ....................................................... 5—65
Main Ink Filter Purging ................................................................ 5—69
Charge Amplifier Calibration ....................................................... 5—71
Printhead Valves Tests ................................................................ 5—75
Ink System Feed Valve Test ........................................................ 5—79
Purge and Gutter Valves Tests .................................................... 5—81
Solvent Flush Valve Tests ........................................................... 5—87
Solvent Add Valve Tests .............................................................. 5—91
Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning ............................................ 5—95
Modulation Range Checks ........................................................ 5—105
Blocked Gutter Clearance ......................................................... 5—109
System Flush ............................................................................ 5—115
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration) ......................... 5—127
Calibrated Nozzle Replacement (Offset Calibration) ................ 5—139
Printer Installation ..................................................................... 5—145
24 Volts Alarm Beacon Installation (Printer Mounted) ............... 5—147
Mains (VFC) External Alarm Conversion .................................. 5—151
Positive Air Pump Installation .................................................... 5—157
Printhead Feed Valve Replacement ......................................... 5—161
Printhead Feed Valve Filter Replacement ................................. 5—165
Correct Installation of Mk7 Printheads ...................................... 5—169
Changing the Orientation of Mk7 Right-Angled Printheads ...... 5—175
Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit Installation ........................... 5—179
Parallel I/O Interface Installation ............................................... 5—185
Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Conversion ........................................ 5—189
Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Conversion ........................................ 5—193
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (x) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Dual Alarm Installation .............................................................. 5—197
Ethernet Interface Installation ................................................... 5—201
Combined Ethernet & Parallel I/O Interfaces Installation .......... 5—205
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures ................................ 5—209
MidiEC Printhead Cleaning ....................................................... 5—223
Dynamic Flow Control Module Replacement ............................ 5—229
Printhead Replacement (Printer with DFC) ............................... 5—233
Pressure Transducer Calibration .............................................. 5—237
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (xi) Sep 2009
6.6.14 “3.13 Cover Override Link Fitted” ............................................ 6—16
6.6.15 “3.14 Power Off Override Active” ............................................ 6—17
6.6.16 “3.15 Safety Override Active” .................................................. 6—17
6.6.17 “3.16 Gutter Override Active” .................................................. 6—17
6.6.18 “3.17 Gate Array Test Mode Active” ........................................ 6—18
6.6.19 “3.18 Low Pressure” ................................................................ 6—18
6.6.20 “3.19 Valid UNIC Chip Not Found” .......................................... 6—18
6.6.21 “3.20 No Time Of Flight” .......................................................... 6—18
6.6.22 “3.21 Ink Low Prevented Mix” ................................................. 6—19
6.6.23 “3.22 Fault Prevented Mix” ...................................................... 6—19
6.6.24 “3.23 Power Off Occurred During Mixing” ............................... 6—19
6.6.25 “3.24 Restart In Progress” ....................................................... 6—19
6.6.26 “3.25 Ink Unmixed For 4 Weeks” ............................................ 6—19
6.6.27 “3.26 User Data Corrupt–Please contact your local Linx Service
Centre” ................................................................................................. 6—19
6.6.28 “3.27 Mix Disabled” ................................................................. 6—19
6.6.29 “3.28 Printhead requires cleaning at shutdown” ...................... 6—19
6.6.30 “3.29 Over Speed (No Remote Data)” ..................................... 6—20
6.6.31 “3.30 Remote Error” ................................................................ 6—20
6.6.32 “3.31 Restarted Print Delay” .................................................... 6—20
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (xii) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FC209 2.09 Misaligned Ink Jet ............................................................. 7—27
FC211 2.11 Pressure Limit Reached ................................................... 7—28
FC212 2.12 Viscosity ........................................................................... 7—29
FC213 2.13 Hardware Safety Trip ........................................................ 7—30
FC999 Final Test .................................................................................. 7—31
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (xiii) Sep 2009
A.7 Troubleshooting .................................................................................. A—16
A.7.1 First Steps .................................................................................. A—16
FC001 Troubleshooting Start .............................................................. A—17
A.8 Training Course Guides ...................................................................... A—18
A.8.1 Course One: Printer Operation (Level C & Level A) .................. A—18
A.9 Illustrated Parts List ............................................................................ A—18
A.9.1 Introduction ................................................................................ A—18
A.10 On-Farm Egg Coding ........................................................................ A—19
A.10.1 Introduction .............................................................................. A—19
A.10.2 Configuration Code .................................................................. A—19
A.10.3 Warm-up Delay ........................................................................ A—19
A.10.4 Maintenance Times ................................................................. A—19
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (xiv) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
List of Figures
Figure Page
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (xv) Sep 2009
Figure 3-47. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Ultima A Printhead) ................................. 3—59
Figure 3-48. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Midi A Printhead) ..................................... 3—59
Figure 3-49. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (MidiEC Printhead) ................................... 3—59
Figure 3-50. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Mini Printhead) ........................................ 3—60
Figure 3-51. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Micro Printhead) ..................................... 3—60
Figure 3-52. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Ultima plus Printhead) ............................. 3—61
Figure 3-53. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Midi plus Printhead) ................................ 3—61
Figure 3-54. LVPSU Input Details .............................................................................................. 3—63
Figure 3-55. LVPSU Output Details ........................................................................................... 3—63
Figure 3-56. EHTPSU Input/Output
ut/Output Details ...............................................................................
............................................................... 3—64
Figure 3-57. Valve Cableformorm Details ........................................................................................
........................................................................ 3—65
Figure 3-58. IPM PCB Link k Default Positions ............................................................
............................................................................ 3—74
Figure 3-59. IPM PCB Test st Points and Links Locations .............................................................
............................................. 3—75
Figure 3-60. Fault Conditions
ions and Actions .................................................................................
................................................................. 3—76
Figure 3-61. Primary Trigger—NPN
er—NPN Configuration .....................................................................
..................................................... 3—78
Figure 3-62. Primary Trigger—PNP
er—PNP Configuration .....................................................................
..................................................... 3—78
Figure 3-63. Secondary Trigger—NPN
rigger—NPN Configuration ................................................................
................................................ 3—79
Figure 3-64. Secondary Trigger—PNP
rigger—PNP Configuration ................................................................
................................................ 3—79
Figure 3-65. 5 V Single-Ended
nded Shaft Encoder Connections ......................................................
...................................... 3—81
Figure 3-66. 24 V Single-Ended .................................................... 3—81
Ended Shaft Encoder Connections ....................................
Figure 3-67. 5 V Quadratureure Shaft Encoder Connections ..........................................................
.......................................... 3—81
Figure 3-68. 24 V Quadratureture Shaft Encoder Connections ........................................................
........................................ 3—82
Figure 3-69. 24 Volts External
rnal Alarm Pin Connections ...............................................................
............................................... 3—82
Figure 3-70. Mains External al Alarm (Volt-Free) Pin Connections ................................................
................................ 3—83
Figure 3-71. RS232 Interfaceace Cable Pin Connections ...............................................................
............................................... 3—85
Figure 3-72. RS422 Interface Cable Pin Connections ............................................................... 3—86
Figure 3-73. Parallel I/O PCB Links ........................................................................................... 3—87
Figure 3-74. Parallel I/O Interface Pin Connections ................................................................... 3—88
Figure 3-75. Correct Assembly of the IP67 D-Type Connector .................................................. 3—89
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (xvi) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
CHAPTER 5: MAINTENANCE ......................................................................... 5—1
Figure 5-1. Soft Keys and Related Options .................................................................................. 5—1
Figure 5-2. Total Maintenance Options ........................................................................................ 5—2
Figure 5-3. Maintenance Options Availability Table ...................................................................... 5—3
Figure 5-3. Maintenance Options Availability Table (continued) ................................................... 5—4
Figure 5-4. Maintenance Page ..................................................................................................... 5—5
Figure 5-5. Jet Functions Page .................................................................................................... 5—5
Figure 5-6. Monitor Jet Page ....................................................................................................... 5—8
Figure 5-7. Edit Pressure Page ................................................................................................... 5—9
Figure 5-8. Edit Modulation Page .............................................................................................. 5—11
Figure 5-9. TOF Mode Page ...................................................................................................... 5—13
Figure 5-10. Maintenance
aintenance Times Page ...................................................................................... 5—15
Figure 5-11. Scheduled
heduled Maintenance Intervals .......................................................................... 5—16
Figure 5-12. Charge
harge Calibration Page ....................................................................................... 5—17
Figure 5-13. Jett Sequences Page ............................................................................................. 5—19
Figure 5-14. Valves
lves Page .......................................................................................................... 5—23
Figure 5-15. Test
st Message Page ............................................................................................... 5—24
Figure 5-16. Test
st Message—Save As Page .............................................................................. 5—24
Figure 5-17. System
ystem Flush—First Preparation Page .................................................................. 5—25
Figure 5-18. System
stem Flush—Options Page ................................................................................ 5—26
Figure 5-19. Print
rint and Consumables History Page .................................................................... 5—26
5.4 Maintenance
ance Instructions ....................................................................... 5
5—29
Scheduled Maintenance
intenance .......................................................................................................... 5—33
Figure 1. Removing the 7300 (IP65 version) Air Filter ............................................................... 5—37
Figure 2. Removing the 7300 Air Filter ....................................................................................... 5—38
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (xvii) Sep 2009
Ink System Feed Valve Test .................................................................................................... 5—79
Figure 1. Entering a Set Pressure of 4.49 bar on the Edit Pressure Page ................................. 5—79
Figure 2. Printhead Feed Valve Open on the Valves Page ........................................................ 5—80
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (xviii) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Figure 6. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Ultima plus Printheads, and Allowed
Ink Conversions ....................................................................................................................... 5—132
Figure 7. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Midi Printheads, and Allowed Ink
Conversions ............................................................................................................................ 5—133
Figure 8. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Midi plus Printheads, and Allowed
Ink Conversions ....................................................................................................................... 5—134
Figure 9. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Ultima A Printheads, and Allowed
Ink Conversions ....................................................................................................................... 5—135
Figure 10. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Midi A Printheads, and Allowed
Ink Conversions ....................................................................................................................... 5—135
Figure 11. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300FG Printers with Mk7 MidiEC Printheads, and
Allowed Ink Conversions ......................................................................................................... 5—136
Figure 12. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Mini Printheads, and Allowed Ink
Conversions ............................................................................................................................ 5—137
Figure 13. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Micro Printheads, and Allowed Ink
Conversions ............................................................................................................................ 5—137
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (xix) Sep 2009
Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit Installation .................................................................... 5—179
Figure 1. Location of the Auto Power On/Off Connector PL20 on the IPM PCB ...................... 5—180
Figure 2. Printer Rear View Showing the Auto Power On/Off Cableform Connections ............ 5—180
Figure 3. Printer Front View Showing the Auto Power On/Off Cableform Connections ............ 5—181
Figure 4. Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit ............................................................................. 5—182
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (xx) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
CHAPTER 7: TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................. 7—1
Figure 7-1. Simple Flow Chart Example ...................................................................................... 7—1
Figure 7-2. How to Use a Flow Chart ........................................................................................... 7—2
Figure 7-3. Flow Chart Record Sheet .......................................................................................... 7—4
Figure 7-4. List of Troubleshooting Flow Charts .......................................................................... 7—5
Figure 7-5. FC001 Troubleshooting Start ..................................................................................... 7—6
Figure 7-6. FC002 Jet .................................................................................................................. 7—7
Figure 7-7. FC003 Modulation ..................................................................................................... 7—8
Figure 7-8. FC004 Charge ........................................................................................................... 7—9
Figure 7-9. FC005 Phase .......................................................................................................... 7—10
Figure 7-10. FC006 Low Pressure ............................................................................................. 7—11
Figure 7-11. FC007 Ink Quality .................................................................................................. 7—12
Figure 7-12. FC008 Low Viscosity Ink ....................................................................................... 7—13
Figure 7-13. FC009 High Viscosity Ink ....................................................................................... 7—14
Figure 7-14. FC010 EHT Deflection ........................................................................................... 7—15
Figure 7-15. FC011 Print ........................................................................................................... 7—16
Figure 7-16. FC012 Print Quality ............................................................................................... 7—17
Figure 7-17. FC200 2.00 Printhead Over Temperature .............................................................. 7—18
Figure 7-18. FC201 2.01 EHT Trip ............................................................................................. 7—19
Figure 7-19. FC202 2.02 Phase Failure ..................................................................................... 7—20
Figure 7-20. FC203 2.03 Time Of Flight Failure ......................................................................... 7—21
Figure 7-21. FC204 2.04 300V Power Supply ............................................................................ 7—22
Figure 7-22. FC205 2.05 Ink Tank Empty .................................................................................. 7—23
Figure 7-23. FC206 2.06 Solvent Tank Empty ........................................................................... 7—24
Figure 7-24. FC207 2.07 Internal Spillage ................................................................................. 7—25
Figure 7-25. FC208 2.08 Printer Over Temperature ................................................................... 7—26
Figure 7-26. FC209 2.09 Misaligned Ink Jet .............................................................................. 7—27
Figure 7-27. FC211 2.11 Pressure Limit Reach Reached d .....................................................................
................. 7—28
Figure 7-28. FC212 2.12 Viscosit
Viscosity .............................................................................................
................... ..................... 7—29
Figure 7-29. FC213 2.13 Hardwa
Hardware e Safety Trip .........................................................................
..................... 7—30
Figure 7-30. FC999 Final Test ...................................................................................................
......................... ..................... 7—31
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (xxi) Sep 2009
Document Conventions
Text Conventions
The following text conventions are used throughout this maintenance manual for
identification and emphasis.
Display Elements
Bold text is used to identify the following:
• Page names, options and items. For example, the Print Monitor page; the Service page;
the Monitor Jet option on the Service page; the Modulation item on the Monitor Jet
page.
• Operator input in procedures. For example,
“In the Enter password for required level text box, type: ADMIN”
Cross-References
Where a cross-reference is made to another chapter, section or subsection within this
manual (an internal cross-reference), the reference is shown as follows:
…refer to ‘Password Access’ in Chapter 4: ‘System Options’…
Alternatively, where a cross-reference is made to a specific page element, a route reference
is used, for example:
…refer to Chapter 5: Maintenance Page > Charge Calibration > Calibration
Mode…
This method is also used to show the location of an item in the menu structure of the
printer, for example:
…select the Jet Test – Start option (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance > Jet
Functions > Jet Test – Start)…
Refer to the ‘Contents’ and ‘Index’ pages to locate the references quickly.
Where a cross-reference is made to another publication (an external cross-reference), the
reference is shown in italics, as follows:
…refer to the Linx Remote Communications Interface Reference Manual…
Printer Models
There are two 7300 printers—the 7300 and the 7300 (IP65 version). Where a particular
model is referred to, it is shown in italics (as in the previous sentence). Information
common to both printer models is referenced generically as 7300, that is, in plain text.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (xxii) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Other Conventions
The following types of annotation are used in this manual to identify and to draw the
reader’s attention to particular types of information.
Notes
Notes are used to provide additional information that may apply in special cases, such as
memory limitations, printer configuration, or details that apply to specific versions of
system software.
Additional Publications
Additional information about the Linx 7300 Ink Jet Printer is provided in the following
publications. These publications are available from Linx or from your Linx Distributor, or
can be downloaded from ExtraLinx:
1. Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide (part number FA69085).
This document provides instructions on the basic operator functions of the printer, and
how to carry out routine maintenance.
2. How To … documents.
These documents provide details of how to use the more complex functions of the
printer.
3. Printer Care Card, English (part number FA68022).
The card contains basic routine maintenance and safety information, and is designed to
be printed and positioned near the printer.
4. Linx Remote Communications Interface Reference Manual (available on CD only—part
number FA76014).
This manual describes the RS232 communications protocol for Linx printers. It also
includes information on printer setup and hardware connections.
5. For information about spare parts, refer to ExtraLinx or the Linx 7300 Ink Jet Printer
Service Information CD.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual (xxiii) Sep 2009
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 (xxiv) Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
CHAPTER 1: SAFETY
1.1 Introduction
1.2.1 Warnings
A Warning advises the reader of a hazard that can cause loss of life, injury or illness. The
statement is printed in bold capital letters and includes a warning symbol that identifies
the type of hazard.
1.2.2 Cautions
A Caution advises the reader of actions that can damage equipment or the environment,
but are not a direct danger to personnel. The statement is printed in bold lower-case letters
and does not include a symbol.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 1—1 Sep 2009
1.2.3 Warning Symbols
The following subsections describe the different types of warning symbols.
Eye Protection
The mandatory Eye Protection warning symbol is an indication that safety glasses must be
worn when any work is done that includes inks or solvents. The safety glasses must be of a
type according to European and international safety standards.
Hand Protection
The Irritant Warning symbol is an indication that a substance can cause irritation to the
eyes and the respiratory system if the correct safety precautions are not taken.
The Lethal Voltage warning symbol is an indication that there is a risk of electric shock
from possible lethal voltages if the correct safety precautions are not taken.
Fire Hazard
The Highly Flammable warning symbol is an indication that there is a risk of fire from a
highly flammable type of material if the correct safety precautions are not taken.
The Hot Surface Warning symbol is an indication that there is a risk of skin burns from
contact with a hot surface if the correct safety precautions are not taken.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 1—2 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
General Hazard
The General warning symbol is shown with a Warning statement that does not have a
special symbol to indicate the hazard. The Warning advises the reader of other activities
that can be harmful or lethal.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 1—3 Sep 2009
Solvents and inks can be harmful. When inks and solvents are used, the following
necessary precautions must be taken:
• Before work is started on the printer, read the applicable ink and solvent Material
Safety Data Sheets. If you do not fully understand the information, or are not sure,
contact Linx for instruction.
If the Material Safety Data Sheets have not been supplied or are not available, contact
Linx for copies. Always refer to the Material Safety Data Sheets before inks and
solvents are used.
• Do not smoke or use open flames near the printer, or ink and solvent storage areas and
containers.
• Make sure that the printing area has good ventilation when the printer is in operation,
when work is done on the printer, and when inks and solvents are used.
• Wear safety glasses when inks and solvents are used, or when the printer is examined
or repaired. The safety glasses must be of a type according to the applicable European
and international safety standards. The Eye Protection Warning symbol is shown in
this manual, where applicable, to indicate the mandatory requirement to wear safety
glasses.
• Wear solvent-resistant gloves when inks and solvents are used, when the printer is
examined or repaired, or at any time that hand contact with inks or solvents is possible.
The Hand Protection Warning symbol is shown in this manual, where applicable, to
indicate the mandatory requirement to wear safety gloves.
Barrier creams can help to protect areas of bare skin, but they do not give the same
level of protection as safety gloves. Barrier creams must not be applied after exposure
to ink or solvent has occurred.
• Never look into the end of the printhead or point the printhead at any person while the
printer is turned on.
• Do not overfill the ink and solvent tanks of the printer. Refer to the Linx 7300 Quick
Start Guide for information on how to correctly refill the ink system.
• Remove all ink and solvent spillage immediately from the interior and exterior of the
printer, and from the area around the printer. Use the correct solvent type for the
related ink type to remove ink spillage.
• Remove any increased ink deposits from the interior of the printer with the correct
solvent type for the related ink type.
• Store all inks and solvents in their original containers, which must be tightly closed.
Store the containers in a cabinet with good air circulation or in a recommended
flameproof storage container. Inks and solvents must be kept away from any source of
heat or ignition.
• All waste ink and solvent must be discarded correctly, according to local regulations
and must not be allowed to enter the water drainage system.
WARNING: HEAVY EQUIPMENT HAZARD. THE WEIGHT OF THE 7300 CIJ PRINTER IS
APPROXIMATELY 25.0 KG WHEN THE INK AND SOLVENT TANKS ARE FULL.
CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN THE PRINTER IS MOVED.
THERE IS A RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY IF THE CORRECT GUIDELINES FOR THE SAFE
MANUAL HANDLING OF HEAVY OBJECTS ARE NOT FOLLOWED.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 1—4 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
1.6 First Aid
Ideally, all maintenance personnel should be trained in First Aid and know the possible
effects from the use of flammable and toxic materials.
All maintenance personnel must have access to the ink and solvent Material Safety Data
Sheets, which describe the hazards and the actions to be taken if First Aid is necessary.
Maintenance personnel must make sure that the First Aid information is easily available if
ink and solvent ingestion, inhalation, or contact with the eyes or skin occurs.
1.6.1 Procedures
The following paragraphs contain First Aid procedures for inks and solvents from the
Material Safety Data Sheets. For complete and up to date information, always refer to the
Material Safety Data Sheet for the related ink or solvent.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 1—5 Sep 2009
1.7 Test Printing
Printing drops hold a charge, which is not discharged until the drops contact the substrate.
If test printing is performed into a container, a charge can build in the collected ink. This
charge can eventually, suddenly discharge to earth and cause the ink to ignite.
To prevent this risk of fire, it is extremely important to make sure that the ink is earthed so
that the charge does not occur. If a metal container is used, connect the container to an
earth point. If a non-metallic container is used (for example, glass or plastic), put one end
of a length of wire directly into the ink, and connect the other end to an earth point (see
Figure 1-1). The knurled securing screw for the printhead cover tube can be used as an
earth point.
IMPORTANT: To
o make sure that the printer operates correctly, this safety procedure is
the only time that the cover tube securing screw is to be used as an earth
point.
68001
MIDI
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 1—6 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
CHAPTER 2: GENERAL AND
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION
2.1 Introduction
The Linx 7300 Continuous Ink Jet (CIJ) Printer is a fast, reliable, non-contact printer capable
of applying sell-by dates, batch codes, logos and other variable information to a wide range
of substrates on the production line. The following table shows the different printer types
and their names, and the printheads available with each:
v4.0 73048
Pigmented ink Food grade ink
Printer type Non-pigmented ink printers printer printer
Printer name 7300 7300 (IP65 version) 7300 Spectrum 7300 Food Grade
Printheads: Ultima plus (75 µm) Ultima plus (75 µm) Ultima plus (75 µm) MidiEC (62 µm)
Midi plus (75 µm) Midi plus (75 µm) Midi plus (75 µm)
Lines of print 2 3 4 2 3 4
Midi plus ● ● ● – – –
MidiEC ● ● – ● ● –
Mini ● – – ● – –
Micro ● ● ● ● ● ●
2.2.2 Environmental
Operating temperature: +5 °C to +45 °C ambient (all printers except 7300 Food Grade)
0 °C to +40 °C ambient (7300 Food Grade)
Humidity range: Maximum of 90% relative humidity, non–condensing
Acoustic emission: Less than 70 dBA
Protection rating (dust & water): 7300 and 7300 Food Grade protected to IP55
7300 (IP65 version) protected to IP65
7300 Spectrum protected to IP65
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 2—1 Sep 2009
2.2.3 Power Requirements
Voltage: Single phase, 100 V (3 A) to 230 V (1 A) AC, 50/60 Hz
Power rating: 200 W
This equipment is a Class 1 earthed appliance as defined by EN 60950. Electrical
connections at the rear of the cabinet comply with the extra low voltage safety
requirements as defined by EN 60950.
2.2.4 Cabinet
Construction
7300, 7300 (IP65 version), 7300 Spectrum and 7300 Food Grade
Base tray unit: Stainless steel
Top cover: Stainless steel
Dimensions
7300, 7300 (IP65 version), 7300 Spectrum and 7300 Food Grade
External height: 240 mm (including filler caps)
External width: 490 mm
External depth: 600 mm
Weight
Excluding ink, solvent, accessories and packaging.
7300: 19.6 kg
7300 (IP65 version): 20.1 kg
7300 Spectrum: 20.2 kg
7300 Food Grade: 19.7 kg
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 2—2 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
2.2.6 EHT Power Supply Unit
Inputs: +24 V DC ±5%, 1.2 A (power input)
0 V to +10 V DC (EHT output level control)
Outputs: 0 V to +10 kV DC ±5%, 10 µA
+300 V DC ±5%, 10 mA to 46 mA max.
Construction
7300 Spectrum
Ink system enclosure: Stainless steel
Ink tank: Stainless steel
Solvent tank: Natural colour polyethylene
Environmental
Protection rating: Protected to a minimum of IP65 with respect to the
electrical compartment of the printer cabinet when the
printer top cover is fitted
Electrical Connections
Construction: • Double insulated
• In accordance with the requirements for equipment
operating in Zone 2
Pressure
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 2—3 Sep 2009
Capacity
7300 Spectrum
Ink tank: 1400 ml approximately
Solvent tank: 1600 ml maximum; 1440 ml usable
7300 Spectrum
Ink tank sense low: Warning reported at less than 450 ml
Solvent tank sense low: Warning reported at approximately 740 ml, leaving 690 ml
of usable solvent
Performance
Solvent consumption: Please contact Linx for information on solvent
consumption, as this changes with the ink type, the printer
configuration, and the environment in which the printer
operates
Inks
7300 Spectrum
Ink capability: Black Pigmented ink 1009
Yellow Pigmented ink 1039
White Pigmented ink 1059
Brilliant White ink 1305 and 1306
High-Opacity Grey ink 1310 and 1311
Opaque Blue ink 1043
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 2—4 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
2.2.8 Printhead
Types
Ultima plus: Mk7 (75 µm nozzle jewel diameter)
Midi plus: Mk7 (75 µm nozzle jewel diameter)
Ultima and Ultima A: Mk7 (62 µm nozzle jewel diameter)
Midi and Midi A: Mk7 (62 µm nozzle jewel diameter)
MidiEC: Mk7 (62 µm nozzle jewel diameter)
Mini: Mk7 (50 µm nozzle jewel diameter)
Micro: Mk7 (40 µm nozzle jewel diameter)
Construction
Printhead: Thermoplastic polyester body
Cover tube: Stainless steel
Conduit adaptor: Stainless steel
Dimensions
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 2—5 Sep 2009
Midi plus (75 µm)
Lines of print: Up to four lines of 7 High characters
No. of message types (rasters): 7
Maximum speed: 2.10 m/s—one line of 5 High characters using message
type 5 Linear Quality
Minimum character height: 2.1 mm nominal at default EHT using message type
5 Linear Quality
Maximum character height: 13.8 mm nominal at default EHT using message type
34 Linear Quality
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 2—6 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Mini (50 µm)
Lines of print: Up to two lines of 7 High characters
No. of message types (rasters): 48
Maximum speed: 6.83 m/s—one line of 5 High characters using message
types:
4T 1×5 WIDE 6.83m/s
8T 1×5 WIDE 6.83m/s
Minimum character height: 1.43 mm nominal at default EHT using message types:
8T 1×5 Quality 1.82m/s
4T 1×5 Quality 2.27m/s
4T 1×5 Speed 2.73m/s
8T 1×5 Speed 2.73m/s
4T 1×5 Speed 4.55m/s
Maximum character height: 6.70 mm nominal at default EHT using message types:
12T 2×7 WIDE 1.95m/s
12T 2×7 WIDE 2.27m/s
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 2—7 Sep 2009
2.2.11 Regulatory Approvals
Safety
Approved in accordance with TÜV/GS requirements.
Environmental
RoHS Directive
2002/95/EC Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in
electrical and electronic equipment.
Enclosure Protection
EN 60529:1991 Specification for degrees of protection provided by
enclosures (IP code).
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 2—8 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
2.3 Abbreviations and Glossary
AC alternating current
ADC analogue to digital converter
CPU central processing unit
DAC digital to analogue converter
DC direct current
DFC dynamic flow control
DPP deflector and phase plate
DVM digital voltmeter
EHT extra high tension (voltage)
EHTPSU extra high tension power supply unit
EMC electromagnetic compatibility
EPROM erasable programmable read-only memory
FC fault code
Flash memory A high density, non-volatile, read/write memory IC, which holds
the system software program
IC integrated circuit
IP ingress protection
IPM integrated processor module
IPM PCB integrated processor module printed circuit board
LCD liquid crystal display
LK link
LVPSU low voltage power supply unit
MEK methyl ethyl ketone
Mk Mark (followed by a number indicating a particular design, model,
version, as in Mk7 Printhead)
N/A not available or not applicable
NiMH nickel metal hydride
NMI non-maskable interrupt
NVR non-volatile RAM
p.s.i. pounds per square inch (lb/in2); (imperial unit of pressure)
PCB printed circuit board
Pixel The smallest size of spot on the screen that makes up the displayed
message
PL plug (connector with male pins/contacts)
PLC programmable logic controller
PLCC plastic leadless chip carrier
PLD programmable logic device
Print Go An internal logic signal that initiates print, normally preceded by a
print trigger
Print registration The horizontal position of a printed message on a substrate
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 2—9 Sep 2009
Print trigger A logic signal generated by a product sensor, which initiates
printing of a single message
PSU power supply unit
r.f. radio frequency
RAM random-access memory
raster A variable line of drops printed at 90 degrees to the direction of
production line travel, which create characters that are made up of
one or more rasters
RCI remote communications interface
RoHS restriction of hazardous substances
S/W software
SK socket (connector with female pins/contacts)
SRAM static random-access memory; a low density, volatile,
reprogrammable memory
SRRA (printhead) short reach right angle
Substrate surface (product) on which printing is done
t.b.a. to be announced
TFT thin-film transistor
TOF time of flight
TP test point
UNIC nique number identification chip
unique
USB universal serial bus
VFC volt-free contact (relay)
VGA video graphics array
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 2 — 10 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
CHAPTER 3: TECHNICAL
DESCRIPTION
3.1 Introduction
This chapter provides a technical description of the function of the various sub-systems,
modules and components that constitute the Linx 7300 Ink Jet Printer. The following topics
are covered in this chapter:
3.2 Cabinet
3.3 User Interface
3.4 Printhead Components
3.5 Printhead Theory of Operation
3.6 Ink System
3.7 Electrical Components
3.8 Electronics and Software
3.9 External Signals
NOTE: This chapter provides technical information about the 7300, 7300 (IP65 version)
and the 7300 Spectrum printers. Where the 7300 Food Grade printer is different
from the standard 7300 printer described in this chapter, the alternative
information is provided in Appendix A.
3.2 Cabinet
3.2.1 Introduction
The purpose of the cabinet is to house and support the modules that constitute the printer,
and to protect them from contamination. The printer cabinet is designed to meet an Ingress
Protection (IP) rating in respect of water and dust ingress. There are two printer models:
the 7300 which is sealed to IP55 and the 7300 (IP65 version).
The cabinet is a two-piece structure consisting of a top cover and a base tray unit.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3—1 Sep 2009
3.2.3 Base Unit
The base unit houses the following main components:
• Ink system enclosure.
• Electronics system (IPM PCB and optional Auxiliary PCBs).
• Mains power supply and power on switches.
• Mains filter and fuses.
• Low voltage power supply unit (LVPSU).
• EHT power supply unit (EHTPSU).
• Cooling fan and air filter.
• Optional printhead positive air pump.
The back plate of the base unit allows entry of the printhead conduit and the non-operator-
removable mains power supply cable. The mains power supply cable enters the rear of the
printer below the mains supply switch. External connectors for product sensors, shaft
encoders, RS232, and the alarm output are also provided on the back plate. A USB
connector is provided on the front face of the base unit. All the connectors are IP67 rated
except the alarm connector, which is IP68 rated.
The cabinet also provides fixing points on the rear face for the alarm beacon.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3—2 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Locations of External Alarm
Auxiliary PCBs 73053 Output Connector
FA69084–1
Enclosure (located below Mains Power Supply Switch
Unit—fuses x2 accessed under the Mains
Pressure Transducer Power Cable Connector Cover)
Ink System
Valves x5
IPM PCB
3—3
Mains Power Supply
Switch Unit
(switch located
USB Connector LVPSU
on rear panel)
(with sealing cap)
Ink System
Top Cover Pump/Motor Assy
Securing Latch
Sep 2009
Figure 3-1. 7300 (IP65 version) Printer Base Unit and Main Components
3.3 User Interface
The user interface consists of a keyboard and a display, with associated controls and
indicators.
Display
The display is positioned above the keyboard and is a 256-colour LCD screen with cold
cathode back-lighting and automatic contrast control.
There are six soft keys associated with the display, and four navigating arrow keys to the
right of the display. A [start] key and a [stop] key are also provided to the left of the
display.
Messages
Before printing can take place, a message or messages must be created. A message is a
structure describing the text or pattern to be printed. Each message consists of one or more
fields, which can be of a number of types. For example, a text field is simply fixed text that
does not change from one print to the next; a time field displays the actual time (or the time
offset by a specific amount) and changes accordingly from one print to the next. Refer to
the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide for details about creating and editing messages.
Warning
The software controlled red Warning LED illuminates when there is one or more active
System Warnings on the printer. These warnings can be viewed (and cleared) via the Event
Log option (Print Monitor > Menu > Event Log). When the last remaining warning is
cleared, the LED is not illuminated.
Ready
The software controlled green Ready LED illuminates when the printer is ready to print,
that is, when the jet is running, a message is loaded, and the [start] key is pressed.
Power
The green Power LED remains illuminated while the printer is powered up. It is not under
software control.
The following illustration shows the 7300 standard European user interface.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3—4 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Figure 3-2. 7300 European User Interface
"
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3—5 Sep 2009
3.4 Printhead Components
This section identifies the main components of the printhead and describes their basic
functions together with various other aspects of the printhead. The illustration below
shows the location of the main printhead components.
68153
Printhead Conduit
(with strain relief)
to control unit
and ink system
Cover Tube
Securing Screw
Nozzle
Charge Electrode
Gutter
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3—6 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.4.1 Gun Chamber and Nozzle Assembly
The printhead operation requires ink to be supplied under pressure from the ink system to
the ink gun chamber and then out of the nozzle.
The gun chamber is located underneath the printhead component mounting board, directly
below the nozzle assembly. On the Micro and Mini printheads it is mounted above the
component mounting board. Inside the chamber, the ink is pulsed (modulated) by the
effect of a piezoelectric crystal causing the ink jet to break up into drops.
The modulated jet is forced from the nozzle assembly through a precisely machined hole in
a small jewel (located in the nozzle cap) of either 40 µm, 50 µm, 62 µm or 75 µm, depending
on the type of printhead.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3—7 Sep 2009
3.4.6 Printhead Cover Sensor
This sensor is a Hall-effect switch that is used to detect the presence of the printhead cover
tube, and is situated within the printhead body. A small magnet inside the cover tube
activates the Hall-effect switch when the cover tube is fitted to the printhead. Activation of
the Hall-effect switch enables the print process by switching on the deflector plate EHT
circuit. When the cover tube magnet is moved away from the Hall-effect switch by
approximately 3 mm (which is insufficient to allow access to the potentially dangerous
deflector plates), the switch is deactivated. This disables the EHT circuit and printing is
suspended. Printing is resumed a few seconds after the printhead cover tube is refitted.
Over Temperature
Firstly, it acts as a safety sensor so that if a local printhead temperature in excess of 60 °C is
detected, the printer is immediately shut down in a controlled way. In addition, the Print
Failure message “2.00 Printhead Over Temperature” is displayed to warn of the
printhead’s ‘over temperature’ condition.
Ink Density
Secondly, the temperature monitored by the sensor is used to compensate for variations in
ink density at the extremes of the printer’s operating temperature range.
Under normal operating conditions the Set Pressure is varied as the ink viscosity changes,
to maintain a constant TOF. For example, as the ink viscosity increases due to solvent
evaporation, the Set Pressure is increased to maintain a constant TOF (at the Reference
TOF) with the thicker ink. If the Set Pressure reaches the predetermined Solvent Add
Pressure, solvent is added to the ink to decrease the viscosity and thus maintain the Actual
TOF at Reference TOF. Refer to ‘Solvent Addition’ in the section, ‘Ink System’ later in this
chapter.
Whilst the pressure required to achieve the correct TOF is viscosity dependent, it is also
affected by temperature and, more importantly, by ink density. For example, at lower
temperatures when the ink is more dense, it is necessary to drive the jet at a greater
pressure to maintain the correct TOF. Therefore, the printhead temperature is monitored
and the Set Pressure is adjusted accordingly to compensate for the greater ink density.
The Solvent Add Pressure is offset by an amount determined by the printhead
temperature. This prevents the printer from adding solvent too early to thin the ink at low
temperatures, when the ink is at a higher density but is at the ideal viscosity.
The above principle applies, but in reverse, when there is a high printhead temperature
and the ink density is low.
This pressure compensation explains why the Solvent Add Pressure may be seen to change
at extreme operating temperatures on the Monitor Jet page (Print Monitor > Menu >
Maintenance > Monitor Jet).
See also: ‘Viscosity Control’ in the section ‘Printhead Theory of Operation’ later in this
chapter.
‘Solvent Addition’ in the section ‘Ink System’ later in this chapter.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3—8 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.4.8 Printhead Feed and Purge Valves
During the time that the printer is switched off, small amounts of residual ink-stained
solvent can form into ‘slugs’ in the pipes between the printhead nozzle and the Ink System
Feed and Purge valves.
Printhead Feed and Purge valves are incorporated in the Mk7 printhead, which prevent the
slugs from reaching the gun. During the normal shutdown sequence solvent is flushed
through the system to clear the printhead gun, and the feed and purge lines of ink. The
solvent is fed directly to the Printhead Feed valve and out to the gun chamber. Towards the
end of the shutdown sequence the gun–to–Printhead Feed valve pipe is cleared of solvent.
The Printhead Feed valve is then closed and the gun–to–Printhead Purge valve pipe is
cleared of solvent.
At the end of the shutdown sequence the Printhead Feed and Purge valves are in the closed
position, effectively sealing off the ink system from the printhead nozzle. Therefore, any
slugs of ink-stained solvent that may form in the feed and purge lines are contained,
keeping the nozzle clean in preparation for the next startup.
Feed Valve
The Printhead Feed valve is a 24-volt, electrically-operated, solenoid valve. It is fitted with
an integral 35 µm filter on Ultima plus and Midi plus printheads, and a 15 µm filter on
Ultima, Midi, Mini, and Micro printheads.
NOTE: All specified filter sizes are nominal ratings.
Purge Valve
The Printhead Purge valve is a ball-and-spring type of non-return valve (NRV), which is
designed to open at a positive pressure difference of approximately 0.14 bar (2.04 p.s.i.).
68053
Assembly Filter
screw
O-ring gasket
Locating
lug
Locating
recess
Figure 3-4. 3-Way Fluid Connector Containing the In-line Feed Filter
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3—9 Sep 2009
3.4.10 Standard Gutter Restrictor
During normal running conditions, air is drawn into the gutter with the ink that is
returning to the ink tank. This volume of air flowing with the ink in the gutter return line
causes the solvent in the ink to evaporate, which in turn causes an increase in solvent
consumption.
A restrictor is fitted in the printhead gutter return line to control the airflow. This reduces
solvent consumption and, consequently, the volume of vented solvent fumes.
The gutter restrictor is currently fitted as standard inside the gutter return line of the Mk7
Ultima plus, Midi plus,
plus Ultima, Midi, Mini, and Micro printheads (2-metre conduits only),
and as such is part of the printhead assembly. The restrictor is held in place with a clip, and
is located on the printhead side of the 3-way fluid connector, within the printer cabinet.
48007
FLOW
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 10 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.4.13 Dynamic Flow Control
The Dynamic Flow Control (DFC) option is a factory-fit module that reduces solvent
consumption by up to 40% at 20 °C.
The solvent reduction is achieved by a controlled restriction of the airflow down the
printhead gutter of approximately 40%. A 7300 printer that has the DFC option fitted is
known as a Linx 7300 Solver printer. The correct Configuration Code must be entered into
the printer to enable the DFC software control.
When the DFC option is used, the Print and Consumables Data page shows the extended
hours per solvent bottle.
The DFC module is a 80 mm x 60 mm x 30 mm box with two barbs for pipe connections, a
flying lead, and a twin-colour LED (red and green). The module is installed in the ink
system enclosure and replaces the function of the standard gutter restrictor in the
printhead gutter line (see ‘Standard Gutter Restrictor’ earlier in this section).
The DFC option is only compatible with 2-metre printhead conduits and Mk7 Ultima,
Midi, Midi SRRA, Mini, and Micro printheads (not Ultima plus or Midi plus printheads),
and so is not compatible with 7300 Spectrum printers. It is also not approved for inks 1405,
2030, 2035 and 2250.
The DFC module operates in two states:
• Active (green LED illuminated)—the gutter has controlled airflow restriction.
• Inactive (red LED illuminated)— the gutter has unrestricted airflow.
NOTE: The green and red LEDs are a single component.
The module is ‘active’ between Reference Pressure and Solvent Add Pressure +1 bit, and
‘inactive’ outside this pressure range.
The module is switched to ‘inactive’ before a ‘Solvent Add’ and then reactivated, providing
that the Set Pressure is between Reference Pressure and Solvent Add Pressure + 1 bit.
The module is switched to ‘inactive’ during the ‘Jet Starting’ and ‘Jet Stopping’ states, but is
switched to ‘active’ in the ‘Idle’ state to prevent drying out of the solenoid valve.
Refer to the ‘Dynamic Flow Control Module Replacement’ maintenance instruction in
Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’ for the replacement procedure.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 11 Sep 2009
3.5 Printhead Theory of Operation
3.5.1 Summary
The following is a short summary of the basic theory of operation of the ink jet printhead.
This summary is followed by a full description of each part of the process.
A character is created on the substrate from ink drops discharged from the printhead. The
structure of the character depends on drops being printed or discarded. The drops are
discharged from the printhead in lines called rasters, and each raster has a preset number of
drops that controls the potential height of a character. The characters are created from
rasters printed one after the other as the substrate moves past the printhead.
Inside the printhead, electrically-conductive ink is fed under pressure through an
accurately-cut hole in an industrial jewel in the printhead nozzle cap to create the ink jet.
Before the jet leaves the nozzle, the ink is pulsed (modulated) to generate a continuous jet
of modulated ink. This modulated jet passes along the length of the printhead and between
the charge electrode plates where the jet divides into separate ink drops. The jet continues to a
gutter, which collects the non-printing drops and returns these drops under vacuum to the
ink tank.
Ink drops that are to be printed receive an electrostatic charge. This process occurs between
the charge electrode plates, which is at the point in the jet flight path where the jet naturally
separates into drops. The electrostatic charge causes a flow of electrons onto each drop as it
is created. The printing drop now has a negative electric charge.
This electrically charged drop moves with the main jet of drops until it enters the area
between two deflector plates. The electrostatic field generated between the plates applies a
force to the drop, which deflects the drop from its original straight path and draws it
towards the positive potential plate. The drop is deflected by an amount that is
proportional to the charge on the drop and the potential across the two deflector plates.
To make sure that the printing drops are correctly charged, a regular test of the charging
function is performed, which measures the drop charge at the phase sensor.
A measurement of jet speed is also performed. Both the phase sensor and the Time Of Flight
sensor are used to measure the time taken for drops to move the known distance between
the two sensors. This time period provides an accurate evaluation of jet speed, which is
used by the printer to adjust the pressure at which the ink is ejected from the nozzle. Jet
speed is also used with the pressure to monitor ink viscosity at the printhead.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 12 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
The Ultima plus and Ultima printheads are for 2-line printing (or reduced height 3-line
printing), or a single line of up to 25 High characters. The Midi plus and Midi printheads
are for printing up to four lines, or a single line of up to 34 High characters. The Mini
printhead is for 2-line printing, or a single line of up to 16 High characters. The Micro
printhead is for printing up to four lines, or a single line of up to 32 High characters.
Refer to the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide for further information about the different message
types (rasters) that are available for each printhead and printer configuration combination,
and for related speed and quality data.
3.5.3 Modulation
The jet of ink from the nozzle is broken into drops of equal size and spacing by a process
called modulation.
A jet of fluid naturally breaks into approximately equal size drops because of the effects of
aerodynamic drag and noise. The jet break-up (drop break-off) can be accurately controlled
by the introduction of a disturbance or excitation into the fluid. This excitation is done in
the Linx printheads by the oscillation of a piezoelectric crystal that is in contact with the
ink.
Gun chamber
Modulation signal
Charge electrode
NOTE: charge electrode shown
rotated through 90 degrees
for ease of representation
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 13 Sep 2009
The frequency of the sine wave (modulation frequency) applied to the piezoelectric crystal
controls the rate of drop production. This drop production rate is a fixed value for each
type of printhead:
• Ultima plus and Midi plus: 64 kHz
• Ultima and Midi: 80 kHz
• Mini: 96 kHz
• Micro: 120 kHz
The amplitude of the sine wave (modulation voltage) applied to the piezoelectric crystal
controls exactly where the ink jet forms into drops, and depends on:
• The type of printhead.
• The different characteristics of each separate printhead.
• The type of ink that is used.
This modulation voltage is a value calibrated at Linx between 0 and 255 volts AC, and is
unique to every printhead. The value is referred to as the Reference Modulation and is part of
the printhead code, and is also printed on each printhead conduit label.
As described earlier, the modulation amplitude controls the point at which the ink jet
separates into drops. This point changes and depends on the viscosity of the ink—if the ink
is thicker, the drop break-off occurs at a later point than for thinner ink. The correct point
of drop break-off is within the charge electrode plates where printing drops are required to
be charged.
6246
Printhead nozzle
Drop break-off
begins to occur Charge electrode
Strobe LED
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 14 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.5.4 Drop Charge
To build a pattern, each drop has to be directed to an exact position on the substrate. To get
this accuracy, each drop is charged and deflected separately by a defined amount.
Each drop to be printed receives an electric charge, so that the drop can be deflected by the
electrostatic field between the deflector plates. The amount that the drop is charged is
controlled by the planned position of the drop on the substrate. The further the drop has to
be deflected, the greater the electric charge on it.
To charge a drop, a positive voltage of between 0 volts and +255 volts is applied to the
charge electrode for the time (1/modulation frequency) required to create one complete
drop. The drop now has a negative charge. This charge is created by capacitive coupling,
by which a flow of electrons is induced from the nozzle (which is at earth potential),
through the electrically conductive ink onto the ink drop as it takes shape. When the drop
separates from the ink jet, the charging voltage is removed from the charge electrode and
the drop holds the given charge.
The charge timing is such that the exact point of drop break-off occurs at the end of the
charge pulse. Timing the end of the charge pulse to occur at the exact drop break-off point
is very important. Accurate timing makes sure that the drop has been given the full charge,
which increases the accuracy of the printed position of the drop on the substrate.
If the following drop is to be printed, the voltage on the charge electrode is set to the
applicable level for the time period of the drop production. If the next drop is not for
printing (and is, therefore, passed straight to the gutter), a small correction voltage of 12.5%
of the previous charge voltage is applied. This action is called historic correction, which is
described later in this section (refer to ‘Historic Correction’).
Strobe LED
A red light-emitting diode (LED) is fitted at the bottom of the charge electrode slot, so that
the light is behind the jet break-up point when looked at from the front of the printhead.
The LED is pulsed at the same frequency as the modulation signal. The stroboscopic effect
of the light causes the ink jet to appear stationary in the charge electrode slot when looked
at with a magnifying eyeglass. This feature allows the jet break-up to be examined, which
can be useful for fault diagnosis purposes. When the ink jet break-up is examined with an
eyeglass of x10 or x20 magnification, the example shown in Figure 3-7 is seen.
The LED electrical supply is enabled when the printhead cover tube is removed, and so can
also be used as an indication that the Hall-effect switch circuit is operating correctly.
However, for safety reasons, make sure that the deflector plates and the charge electrode
have been made safe before these components are touched or work is done on the printhead.
Refer to ‘Printhead Cover Sensor’ earlier in this chapter for more information. Refer also to
the descriptions of the Safety Override link LK19 and the Cover Override link LK21 in the
section, ‘Electronics and Software’ later in this chapter.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 15 Sep 2009
3.5.6 Drop Deflection
When drops have been charged to the correct level, the drops continue along the flight path
and pass between the deflector (EHT) plates. These plates have a fixed high voltage
applied across them of +8 kV maximum, which creates an electrostatic field. The drops that
have a negative charged (printing drops) are deflected in this field towards the positive
plate. The drops are deflected by an amount that is proportional to the field strength and
the amount of charge on the each drop.
The printing drops then exit through the slot in the printhead cover tube and are applied to
the substrate in rasters to create the characters. The combination of the speed of the drops
through the field and the charge given to the drops is accurately measured to make sure
that each drop is put in the correct position on the substrate.
Non-printing drops are given zero charge, which causes zero deflection, so the drops
continue along a straight flight path and enter the gutter. A vacuum on the gutter draws
the ink drops back through the system to the ink tank to be used again.
IMPORTANT: The deflector plates and mountings must always remain clean and without
ink deposits, otherwise a decrease in print quality can occur. The mounting
for the 0 volts deflector plate is black in colour, and so ink deposits are not
always easily seen. The +8 kV deflector plate is made from stainless steel
and the mounting is made from white plastic.
6248
Gutter Gutter
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 16 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.5.8 Phasing
The deflection of each ink drop is controlled by the voltage that is applied to the charge
electrode immediately before the drop separates from the main ink jet. For the correct
drop-charge to occur, the voltage on the charge electrode must be there at the exact time
that the drop separates from the main ink jet. The method that makes sure that
synchronization between the charge and the jet break-up time is called phase control.
The charging circuit is a capacitance-resistance network and these circuits have a CR time
constant to charge completely. Therefore, if a voltage is applied to the charge electrode, it
can take 2 µs to 3 µs before the charge reaches the final level. The Micro printhead, for
example, creates drops every 8 µs, so the production of incorrectly charged drops is
possible unless there is synchronization of the process.
To perform phase control, a series of half-width charge pulses (called a phase packet) is
generated at a low voltage, which is not high enough to deflect the charged drops from of
the gutter. Normally, a phase packet is eight drops charged by 10 volts. The half-width
pulses are moved in 1/16 cycle steps (phase positions) relative to the modulation signal,
and any charge result is detected by the phase sensor.
A half-width pulse only induces charge onto drops for eight out of the 16 steps in a cycle.
Therefore, it is a simple process to move the position by one step until an edge between
charge and no charge is detected. This position sets the timing that allows full-width
printing pulses to be placed, which then gives correct printing. An illustration of the
phasing process is shown in Figure 3-9.
21006
Jet break-up
Instant of drop break-off
Modulation signal
Step 1
Step 2
(moved right by one phase position)
Step 3
(moved right by one phase position)
Phase found
Charging pulses
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 17 Sep 2009
3.5.9 Time Of Flight (TOF)
During printer operation, solvent evaporates from the ink. This causes the ink to become
thicker, that is, the viscosity of the ink increases. If this were not controlled, a reduction in
jet speed would occur. This in turn would lead to a shift in the position of the printed drops
on the substrate due to the drops spending a longer time between the deflector plates. To
prevent this happening, and to maintain consistent print quality, the control function of the
printer monitors jet speed and alters the pressure to compensate for any variations.
This monitoring of the jet speed is known as Time of Flight (TOF) and is achieved initially
in the same way as the phase operation. That is, a number of TOF drops are charged by
applying 10 volts to the charge electrode. This packet of drops travels past the phase sensor
(situated in the DPP) where it induces a current in the sensor, which starts a counter. The
count increments until the same packet of TOF drops passes the TOF sensor (also situated
in the DPP). As the TOF packet passes the TOF sensor it induces a current, known as the
TOF signal, in the sensor, which stops the counter. The counter value is the Actual TOF.
This Actual TOF value is compared with a Reference TOF, an evaluation of jet speed is
made, and the system pressure is increased or decreased as necessary to maintain a
constant jet speed, as follows:
• If Actual TOF is equal to Reference TOF (±0.3%), system pressure is left unchanged.
• If Actual TOF is greater than Reference TOF (+0.3%), system pressure is increased.
• If Actual TOF is less than Reference TOF (–0.3%), system pressure is decreased.
In practice the process of obtaining the phase and TOF signals is identical. The difference
between the phase and TOF operations is in how the software handles the received signal.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 18 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.5.11 Viscosity Control
As previously stated, the viscosity of the ink changes during printer operation. The viscosity
of the ink at the printhead is determined by the control system from the Set Pressure required
to maintain the actual TOF at the Reference TOF value. The Set Pressure is varied in line with
viscosity changes to maintain a constant TOF. When the viscosity reaches a predetermined
level, solvent is added to the ink tank from the solvent tank. This predetermined level is
when the Set Pressure exceeds a value known as the Solvent Add Pressure. Solvent Add
Pressure is derived from a Reference Pressure, which is a calibrated value unique to each
printhead (and which forms part of the printhead code). The Reference Pressure is also
dependent on printhead temperature.
See also: ‘Printhead Temperature Sensor’ earlier in this chapter.
For each of the printhead types, the Solvent Add Pressure is derived as follows:
Solvent Add Pressure = Reference Pressure + 0.07 bar (1.02 p.s.i.).
Solvent is added to the ink when all of the following five conditions apply:
• Pressure check is OK (that is, the pressure generation circuits functioned correctly at jet
startup and there is no System Warning “3.18 Low Pressure”).
• Set Pressure is greater than Solvent Add Pressure.
• Actual TOF is within ±0.3% of Reference TOF.
• Warm-up time has expired (that is, the jet has been running for 45 minutes).
• Solvent level is OK (that is, the printer solvent level is above the minimum required and
there is no System Warning “3.04 Solvent Low”).
When solvent is added to the ink, the viscosity of the ink is lowered. Within 20 minutes (the
Viscosity Settle Time) this thinner ink arrives at the printhead, causing the Set Pressure to
decrease as the thinner ink flows from the nozzle. If, after 20 minutes, the Set Pressure value
is still above the Solvent Add Pressure value, more solvent is added to the ink tank.
To ensure that too much solvent is not inadvertently added to the ink, the printer allows only
8 (MEK and Pigmented inks), 12 (Mixed Base inks) or 25 (Ethanol inks) consecutive solvent
additions, where the Set Pressure has not fallen below the Solvent Add Pressure. If after these
solvent additions more solvent is still required, the printer will fail with Print Failure “2.12
Viscosity”.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 19 Sep 2009
During startup, a series of actions occurs automatically:
• The electronic circuitry is checked.
• The Ink System Feed valve, and the Printhead Feed and Purge valves are opened to
allow the ink to circulate through the printhead.
• The Purge valve is closed, causing the ink jet to be established.
• Pressure is increased to normal operating pressure and the ink jet is pulsed by the
modulation process to cause drop break-off.
• The TOF is adjusted to be close to the reference TOF, that is, drop velocity is corrected.
Only when these systems are operating correctly will the printer go to the ‘Printing’
state.
• The phasing and modulation are checked automatically for optimum positioning.
• On receiving a signal from the ‘print go’ sensor (for example, a photocell), the printer
prints the message previously entered, which is automatically updated for items such
as dates and sequential numbers.
All these actions should operate automatically and it should not, under normal operating
conditions, be necessary to remove the printhead cover tube and perform any maintenance
during startup or shutdown. However, under certain conditions it may be necessary to
remove the printhead cover tube and clean the printhead manually with solvent at regular
intervals.
IMPORTANT: It is essential that the correct solvent is used when cleaning the
printhead, that is, MEK solvent for MEK based inks; Ethanol solvent for
Ethanol based inks; 3XXX for Mixed Base inks.
Summary tables of the startup and shutdown sequences are contained in the ‘Ink System’
section later in this chapter.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 20 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.5.15 Printhead/Nozzle Replacement
Whenever a printhead is replaced, the code for the new printhead and the Printhead Type
must be entered on the Printhead Code page (Print Monitor > Menu > Setup > Installation
> Printhead > Printhead Code). In addition, whenever a printhead or a nozzle is replaced,
the new offset values, for all ink types except 3103, must be used from the supplied
Reference Pressure and Reference Modulation Offset Table. For the calibration procedure, refer
to Chapter 5: Maintenance > Maintenance Instructions > ‘Calibrated Nozzle Replacement
(Offset Calibration)’ maintenance instruction.
Prior to removing the printhead for replacement, the printer must be allowed to complete a
full normal shutdown. This removes any residual ink in the nozzle, and feed, purge and
gutter lines.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 21 Sep 2009
3.6 Ink System
3.6.1 General Description
NOTE: All specified filter sizes are nominal ratings.
The Ink System is contained in a stainless steel enclosure, which is integral to the base unit of
the cabinet. The cabinet top cover has two openings through which the ink and solvent tanks
are filled, via internal filler tubes. The filler tubes are sealed by removable protective caps.
Both the filler tubes and protective caps are colour coded—black for ink and white for
solvent. Adhesive ink and solvent type identification labels are supplied with the printer for
attaching to the protective caps.
The ink system comprises the following main components (refer to ‘Figure 3-10. Static Ink
System—Standard 7300 Printer’ and ‘Figure 3-11. Static Ink System—7300 Spectrum
Printer’):
• Ink tank
• Ink pick-up tube incorporating a 40 µm stainless steel in-line filter (7300 standard printer
only; the 7300 Spectrum does not have an ink pick-up filter)
• Pump and motor assembly
• 10 µm (nominal) polypropylene disposable main ink filter
• Small ink manifold assembly, which includes the pressure transducer and venturi
• Damper
• Solvent tank
• Solvent pick-up tube incorporating a 20 µm stainless steel in-line filter
• Five solenoid-operated valves (the 7300 Spectrum printer has an additional Ink Mixing
valve)
• Interconnecting pipes
NOTE: The symbol ‘µm’ stands for micrometre, which is the SI unit of length and formerly
known as the micron.
Standard 7300 printers have polyethylene ink and solvent tanks with nominal capacities of
1440 ml. The 7300 Spectrum printer has a stainless steel, conically-shaped ink tank with a
nominal capacity of 1400 ml. Both tanks are fitted with fluid level sensors (float switches) to
detect when the level of ink or solvent falls below a predetermined point. If either sensor
detects a low fluid level, a System Warning message is displayed (“3.03 Ink Low” or “3.04
Solvent Low”).
If, during a print run, the ink low condition is allowed to continue, the system reports the
Print Failure “2.05 Ink Tank Empty” after 8 hours for Ultima, Midi, Mini, and Micro
printheads, and 6 hours for Ultima plus and Midi plus printheads. If, during a print run, the
solvent low condition is allowed to continue, the system reports the Print Failure “2.06
Solvent Tank Empty” after 12 hours (for all printheads). This is to prevent the ink or solvent
from running out completely.
The ink system pump used in standard 7300 printers has an integral pressure relief valve
(PRV). The 7300 Spectrum has an external PRV connected across the pump inlet and outlet
ports. Control of the pump/motor assembly is achieved by a 0 to +5 volts (depending on the
requested pressure) drive signal supplied by the IPM PCB.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 22 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Ink is fed to and from the printhead through the feed, purge, and gutter lines, via a 3-way
fluid connector, which connects the printhead to the ink system. This connector is located
within the ink system enclosure and incorporates a 35 µm filter on Ultima plus and Midi
plus printheads, and a 15 µm filter on Ultima, Midi, Mini, and Micro printheads. The
tubing to and from the printhead is colour-coded: red stripe for the feed line, blue stripe for
the purge line, and no stripe for the gutter line.
The disposable ink pick-up tube and filter (all ink types), main ink filter (all ink types), and
3-way fluid connector filter (pigmented inks only) are replaced at every Scheduled
Maintenance. The damper is replaced annually. All these items must be replaced in
accordance with the ‘Scheduled Maintenance’ procedure provided in Chapter 5:
‘Maintenance’.
The venturi in the manifold provides suction to draw unused ink from the printhead gutter
back to the ink tank via the Gutter valve, and to draw solvent from the solvent tank as
required.
During solvent addition and solvent flushing, the solvent is drawn from the tank via the
solvent pick-up tube, which incorporates a 20 µm in-line filter. It is then fed through the
Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) valve and the venturi to the ink tank, or through the Solvent
Flush valve and the venturi manifold to the printhead.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 23 Sep 2009
Gun Printhead Printhead Feed Valve and Filter Assembly
Chamber Purge Valve (35 µm filter—Ultima plus and Midi plus 75 µm printheads;
15 µm filter—Ultima and Midi 62 µm, Mini 50 µm and Micro 40 µm printheads)
Purge Line
Sep 2009
Gutter Restrictor
Printhead OFF Feed Line
(2-metre printhead conduits only—Ultima plus and Midi plus 75 µm,
Gutter Line Ultima and Midi 62 µm, Mini 50 µm, and Micro µm printheads)
7 25 1 21 68146
19 20
Venturi
24
B C A 8
Pressure
3 — 24
Transducer
9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13
Feed Purge Gutter Solvent Solvent
Valve Valve Valve Add Flush
Valve Valve
Vent
Pump
22 20 µm
Vent
40 µm In-Line Filter
In-Line Filter fitted in
fitted in Solvent
This drawing provides details for all Ink Pick-up Tube Pick-up Tube
Mk7 printheads regardless of which INK SOLVENT
model of printer they can be fitted to.
Purge Line
Gutter Restrictor
Printhead OFF Feed Line (2-metre Ultima plus and
Pipe Size
FA69084–1
Midi plus 75 µm
Gutter Line printheads only) Adaptor
68579
3-Way Fluid Connector
and 35 µm In-Line Feed Filter Assembly
10 µm Main Ink Damper
Filter
7 25 1
21
B C A 8
Pressure
Transducer
9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 26 27
Feed Purge Gutter Solvent Solvent Ink
Valve Valve Valve Add Flush Mixing
3 — 25
Valve Valve Valve
Pump
22
Vent Vent
20 µm
Ink Return Ink Pick-up In-Line Filter
Tube Tube fitted in
INK SOLVENT Solvent
Pick-up Tube
Pressure
Relief
Valve
Sep 2009
Figure 3-11. Static Ink System—7300 Spectrum Printer
3.6.2 Venturi Manifold Assembly
The venturi manifold assembly is the central part of the ink system. Its purpose is to
monitor the ink pressure, and to manage the ink and solvent distribution in the system.
Three components are used to achieve this—the manifold block, the pressure transducer,
and the vacuum venturi—each forming part of the complete manifold assembly.
The manifold block and the pressure transducer are fitted through the front wall of the ink
system enclosure to the right of the ink system valves. The Spectrum printer has the
manifold block and the pressure transducer fitted through the right side wall of the ink
system enclosure. This arrangement allows the electrical and fluid connections to be
isolated from each other. The fluid connections of the manifold are on the inside of the
enclosure, and the electrical connections of the pressure transducer are on the outside.
The main component is the small manifold block, manufactured from white acetal, in
which interconnecting internal bores are drilled. These bores enter and exit the manifold
block at ports to which are connected the pressure transducer, vacuum venturi, and
interconnecting ink and solvent pipes.
The following two illustrations show the venturi manifold assembly and the ink system
valves.
Venturi
Manifold Block
Pressure
Solvent Flush Transducer
Valve (5)
Gutter
49165
Valve (3) Solvent Add
Valve (4)
Feed
Valve (1) Purge
Valve (2)
Venturi
Vi
ole Festo Fitting
t
Blu
e
Gree
Yell n
ow
Re
d
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 26 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Festo Fitting
Venturi
Venturi
Manifold Block
Solvent Flush
Valve (5) Ink Mixing
Valve (6)
68592
Gutter
Valve (3) Solvent Add
Valve (4)
Feed
Valve (1) Purge Pressure
Valve (2) Transducer
Bl
ac
Vi k
ole
t
Blu
e
Gree
Yell n
ow
Re
d
Pressure Transducer
The actual pressure of the ink in the system is monitored by the pressure transducer, which
is fitted to a small manifold that contains the venturi.
Vacuum Venturi
Ink flowing through the venturi creates a vacuum, which is tapped off and used for various
purposes. During normal operation, the vacuum draws ink back into the system from the
printhead gutter. It is also used to draw solvent into the system for ink viscosity control,
and for flushing the printhead and ink lines. Finally, the vacuum is used to purge the ink
lines, and to clear blockages and obstructions in the printhead. Refer to ‘Startup and
Shutdown Sequences’, and ‘Other Operating Sequences’ later in this section.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 27 Sep 2009
Venturi Vacuum Suction
A true venturi has a tapered mixing chamber, which creates a vacuum to provide suction.
The method used by Linx follows this principle, but uses the turbulence caused by a high
pressure ink flow passing through a small bore directly into a larger bore. The turbulence
creates a vacuum around the ink flow, and this vacuum is tapped off through a bore drilled
at right angles to the ink flow. The following illustration is a sectional view of the venturi.
48004
Large bore
drilling Area of low pressure
around the ink flow
due to turbulence
Venturi housing
3.6.3 Valves
There are five solenoid-operated valves in the standard 7300 ink system enclosure, and six
solenoid-operated valves in the 7300 Spectrum ink system enclosure. These valves are used
to control the flow of ink and solvent through the system. The valves are sealed and cannot
be disassembled. The valve types and designations are as follows:
• 2-way Feed valve
• 3-way Purge valve
• 3-way Gutter valve
• 3-way Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) valve
• 3-way Solvent Flush valve
• 3-way Ink Mixing valve (7300 Spectrum only)
The valves are mounted through the front wall of the ink system enclosure, allowing the
electrical and fluid connections to be isolated from each other. The fluid connections are on
the inside of the enclosure and the electrical connections are on the outside.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 28 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.6.4 Ink System Connections
The pipe connections to the venturi manifold are made using Festo fittings or barb fittings.
The barbs are sealed by interference fit to the manifold and cannot be removed, and are
therefore not replaceable items.
The following two illustrations show the venturi manifold, its components, and the ink
system valves, and provide details of the ink system pipe connections.
22
21
20 19
VENTURI
MANIFOLD
18 17 16 15 14
1 25
7 8
C
A B
6 5 4 3 2
13 12 11 10 9
PORT 1 (VENTURI) TO DAMPER INLET (BLEED CAP END) 460 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 2 NOT USED —
PORT 3 (PURGE VALVE) TO 3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (PURGE) 360 mm BLUE STRIPE PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 4 (GUTTER VALVE) TO PORT 8 (VENTURI) 170 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 5 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) TO PORT 6 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) 160 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 9 (FEED VALVE) TO PORT A (VENTURI MANIFOLD) 260 mm RED PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 10 (PURGE VALVE) TO INK TANK 360 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 12 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) TO PORT 7 (VENTURI) 160 mm YELLOW PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 13 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) TO PORT B (VENTURI MANIFOLD) 160 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 15 (PURGE VALVE) TO PORT 11 (GUTTER VALVE) 160 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 16 (GUTTER VALVE) TO 3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (GUTTER) 360 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 17 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) TO 19 (Y-PIECE) 90 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 18 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) TO 20 (Y-PIECE) 90 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 21 (Y-PIECE) TO 22 (SOLVENT TANK PICK-UP TUBE) 260 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 24 (VENTURI) TO INK TANK (INK RETURN LINE) 330 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PORT C (VENTURI MANIFOLD) TO 3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (FEED) 360 mm RED STRIPE PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
DAMPER OUTLET TO PORT 14 (FEED VALVE) 360 mm RED PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
MAIN INK FILTER OUTLET TO PORT 25 (PRESSURE TRANSDUCER) 185 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
INK PICK-UP TUBE TO PUMP INLET 260 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PUMP OUTLET TO MAIN INK FILTER INLET 120 mm/230 mm* NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
INK TANK TO SOLVENT TANK (VENT) 330 mm NATURAL PIPE (3/16 in. OD)
SOLVENT TANK TO INK TRAY (VENT) 330 mm NATURAL PIPE (3/16 in. OD)
* The length of the Main Ink Filter inlet pipe is dependent on the type of motor that is fitted to the Pump/Motor Assembly—
older '380' model or new 'I-Drive' model. Refer to the 'Main Ink Filter Replacement' maintenance instruction.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 29 Sep 2009
22
VENTURI
MANIFOLD
21
A 25
8
24
20 19
23 18 17 16 15 14
C 7 1
26 6 5 4 3 2
27 13 12 11 10 9
PORT 1 (VENTURI) TO DAMPER INLET (BLEED CAP END) 460 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 2 NOT USED —
PORT 3 (PURGE VALVE) TO 3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (PURGE) 360 mm BLUE STRIPE PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 4 (GUTTER VALVE) TO PORT 8 (VENTURI) 240 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 5 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) TO PORT 6 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) 160 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 9 (FEED VALVE) TO PORT A (VENTURI MANIFOLD) 260 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 10 (PURGE VALVE) TO INK TANK 360 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 12 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) TO PORT 7 (VENTURI) 220 mm YELLOW PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 13 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) TO PORT B (VENTURI MANIFOLD) 160 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 15 (PURGE VALVE) TO PORT 11 (GUTTER VALVE) 160 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 16 (GUTTER VALVE) TO 3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (GUTTER) 360 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 17 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) TO 19 (Y-PIECE) 90 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 18 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) TO 20 (Y-PIECE) 90 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 21 (Y-PIECE) TO 22 (SOLVENT TANK PICK-UP TUBE) 260 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 23 (MIXING VALVE) TO PIPE SIZE ADAPTOR 100 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 24 (VENTURI) TO INK TANK (INK RETURN LINE) 110 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
MAIN INK FILTER OUTLET TO PORT 25 (PRESSURE TRANSDUCER) 220 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PORT C (VENTURI MANIFOLD) TO 3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (FEED) 360 mm RED STRIPE PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
DAMPER OUTLET TO PORT 14 (FEED VALVE) 360 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PIPE SIZE ADAPTOR TO MAIN INK FILTER INLET 75 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
INK PICK-UP TUBE TO T-PIECE 55 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
T-PIECE TO PUMP INLET 250 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PUMP OUTLET TO 4-WAY CONNECTOR 100 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
4-WAY CONNECTOR TO PORT 26 (MIXING VALVE) 100 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PORT 27 (MIXING VALVE) TO INK TANK BOTTOM INLET 8 COILS NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
4-WAY CONNECTOR TO INK TANK BOTTOM INLET 1.7 m COILED NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
4-WAY CONNECTOR TO PRV INLET 90 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PRV OUTLET TO T-PIECE 42 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
INK TANK TO SOLVENT TANK (VENT) 330 mm NATURAL PIPE (3/16 in. OD)
SOLVENT TANK TO INK TRAY (VENT) 330 mm NATURAL PIPE (3/16 in. OD)
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 30 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.6.5 Ink and Solvent Flows
The following ink and solvent flow descriptions should be read in conjunction with the
relevant ink and solvent flow diagrams on the following pages.
When the jet is running under normal operating conditions, there are two ink flow circuits
in operation: a primary circuit and a secondary circuit.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 31 Sep 2009
Purge Line
Sep 2009
OFF Feed Line PIPE FLUID KEY
Printhead
Gutter Line Ink
Ink with Air Bubbles
68147
Venturi
Pressure
Transducer
3 — 32
Feed Purge Gutter Solvent Solvent
Valve Valve Valve Add Flush
Valve Valve
Vent
Pump
Vent
INK SOLVENT
FA69084–1
Gutter Line
68580
Pressure
Transducer
Feed Purge Gutter Solvent Solvent Ink
Valve Valve Valve Add Flush Mixing
3 — 33
Valve Valve Valve
Pump
Vent Vent
INK SOLVENT
Pressure
Relief
Valve
Sep 2009
Figure 3-18. Primary Circuit—7300 Spectrum Printer
Purge Line
Sep 2009
ON Feed Line PIPE FLUID KEY
Printhead
Gutter Line Ink
Ink with Air Bubbles
Discoloured Solvent
10 µm Main Ink Damper
Filter
68148
Venturi
Pressure
Transducer
3 — 34
Feed Purge Gutter Solvent Solvent
Valve Valve Valve Add Flush
Valve Valve
Vent
Pump
Vent
INK SOLVENT
FA69084–1
Gutter Line
68581
Pressure
Transducer
Feed Purge Gutter Solvent Solvent Ink
Valve Valve Valve Add Flush Mixing
3 — 35
Valve Valve Valve
Pump
Vent Vent
INK SOLVENT
Pressure
Relief
Valve
Sep 2009
Figure 3-20. Secondary Circuit (Normal Running after a Start Purge)—7300 Spectrum Printer
Solvent Addition—All 7300 Printers (Figures 3-21 and 3-22)
Solvent is automatically added to the ink if the viscosity of the ink becomes too high. This
is indicated by the Set Pressure exceeding the predetermined Solvent Add Pressure (P1).
When this Solvent Add Pressure is exceeded, a solvent addition occurs only if all the
following criteria are met:
• Pressure check is OK (that is, the pressure generation circuits functioned correctly at jet
startup and there is no System Warning “3.18 Low Pressure”).
• Set Pressure is greater than Solvent Add Pressure.
• Actual TOF is within ±0.3% of Reference TOF.
• Warm-up time has expired (that is, the jet has been running for 45 minutes).
• Solvent level is OK (that is, the printer solvent level is above the minimum required
and there is no System Warning “3.04 Solvent Low”).
NOTE: No solvent is added if there is a System Warning “3.18 Low Pressure”, since this
means that there is a loss of pressure in the system, and therefore a higher
pressure is required to attain the correct TOF, even though the ink viscosity is
probably acceptable.
When a solvent addition is performed, the ink flow is as previously described in ‘Ink and
Solvent Flows‘, that is, ink flow in both the primary and secondary ink circuits.
To add solvent, the Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) valve is switched on. Vacuum from the
venturi now acts on the Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) valve, as well as the normally
switched off Gutter valve. The vacuum draws solvent from the tank, through the switched
on Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) valve—via the switched off Solvent Flush valve—to the
venturi, where it is mixed with the ink in the primary circuit returning to the ink tank. The
resultant lower viscosity solvent and ink mixture in the ink tank is then fed to the
printhead.
The Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) valve is switched on for a predetermined time, which is
calculated to allow a fixed quantity of solvent to be added in a single ‘solvent add’
operation. This Solvent Add Time is dependent on the ink and printhead type. Refer to the
‘Ink Type Dependent Parameters’ tables at the end of this ‘Ink System’ section.
After solvent is added, further solvent additions are inhibited for a predetermined period
of 20 minutes (the Viscosity Settle Time). This time allows the solvent to mix in the ink
tank, and for the effects of the solvent addition to be seen at the printhead.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 36 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Purge Line
ON Feed Line PIPE FLUID KEY
Printhead
FA69084–1
Gutter Line Ink
Ink with Air Bubbles
Solvent
10 µm Main Ink Damper
Filter
68149
Pressure
Transducer
3 — 37
Feed Purge Gutter Solvent Solvent
Valve Valve Valve Add Flush
Valve Valve
Vent
Pump
Vent
INK SOLVENT
Sep 2009
Figure 3-21. Solvent Addition—Standard 7300 Printer
PIPE FLUID KEY
Sep 2009
Printhead ON Feed Line
Solvent
Gutter Line
68582
Venturi
Pressure
Transducer
Feed Purge Gutter Solvent Solvent Ink
Valve Valve Valve Add Flush Mixing
3 — 38
Valve Valve Valve
Pump
Vent Vent
INK SOLVENT
Pressure
Relief
Valve
Pump Jog-Start
Immediately before the start of the ink mixing part of the sequence, a ‘pump jog-start’
routine is done, where the pump is switched on and off continuously for a calculated time
(in seconds). This helps to stop the pigmented ink’s tendency to prevent the pump gears
from rotating during pump starting.
Ink Mixing
During the ink mixing sequence, ink is drawn from the tank and circulated through the
pump to the energized Ink Mixing valve. From the valve it is fed back in through the base
of the ink tank, where it mixes with the main body of ink. This continuous circulation of the
ink during the sequence thoroughly mixes the ink in the tank, keeping the ink pigment in
suspension, in preparation for printing.
NOTE: If the ink level becomes low during the ink mixing sequence, the sequence is aborted.
Damper Purge
Ink is drawn from the tank and routed via the Ink Mixing valve to the damper to purge it.
When the ink mixing sequence has completed, the jet can be started. In addition to the
mixing sequence, when the printer is switched on (that is, the pump is running), a
secondary action of the primary ink circuit is to continuously return ink from the pump to
the bottom inlet of the tank. This circulation of the ink helps to keep the pigment in
suspension.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 39 Sep 2009
PIPE FLUID KEY
Purge Line
Ink
Sep 2009
Printhead OFF Feed Line
Gutter Line
68583
Venturi
Pressure
Transducer
Feed Purge Gutter Solvent Solvent Ink
Valve Valve Valve Add Flush Mixing
3 — 40
Valve Valve Valve
Pump
Vent Vent
INK SOLVENT
Pressure
Relief
Valve
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 41 Sep 2009
A pressure conversion table is provided below, for quick reference, which shows
conversions in steps of 5 pressure bits. Conversion factors are also given at the bottom of
the table if intermediate pressure calculations are required.
68046
PRESSURE CONVERSION TABLE
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 42 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
The various pressures and timings are printhead dependent. The following table lists the
pressures for the corresponding printhead types.
v2.1 68015
PRESSURES – bar (p.s.i.)
Condition Pressure Ultima Ultima plus Midi Midi plus Mini Micro
Default Reference * P0 3.24 (46.92) 2.55 (36.97) 3.24 (46.92) 2.52 (36.46) 3.20 (46.41) 3.15 (45.65)
Solvent Add Offset ** – 0.07 (1.02) 0.07 (1.02) 0.07 (1.02) 0.07 (1.02) 0.07 (1.02) 0.07 (1.02)
Solvent Add P1 – – – – – –
Test *** P3 4.14 (59.90) 4.14 (59.90) 4.14 (59.90) 4.14 (59.90) 4.14 (59.90) 4.14 (59.90)
Maximum Running P4 4.49 (65.00) 4.49 (65.00) 4.49 (65.00) 4.49 (65.00) 4.49 (65.00) 4.49 (65.00)
Solvent Jet P5 1.76 (25.49) 1.58 (22.95) 1.76 (25.49) 1.58 (22.95) 3.17 (45.90) 3.17 (45.90)
1st Solvent Add Offset 1 ** – 0.12 (1.78) 0.12 (1.78) 0.12 (1.78) 0.12 (1.78) 0.12 (1.78) 0.12 (1.78)
st
1 Solvent Add Offset 2 ** – 0.19 (2.80) 0.19 (2.80) 0.19 (2.80) 0.19 (2.80) 0.19 (2.80) 0.19 (2.80)
st
1 Solvent Add Offset 3 ** – 0.26 (3.82) 0.26 (3.82) 0.26 (3.82) 0.26 (3.82) 0.26 (3.82) 0.26 (3.82)
* The Default Reference Pressure (P0) is the normal running default pressure for the printhead type,
but this will actually be the Reference Pressure for each individual printhead, as specified in the
printhead code.
** The Solvent Add Offset is added to the Reference Pressure to produce the Solvent Add
Pressure (P1). The 1st Solvent Add Offset 1, 2 or 3 is added to the Solvent Add Pressure (P1) to
produce the 1st Solvent Add Pressure (P7, P8 or P9 respectively). This is where the printer adds
solvent at startup, if required.
*** The Test Pressure is used during the Pressure and Filter check, before a normal jet start.
Figure 3-26. Printhead Dependent Parameters Table
See also: ‘Ink Type Dependent Parameters’ tables at the end of this ‘Ink System’ section.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 43 Sep 2009
Normal Start Sequence
When the printer is first switched on and a message is selected for printing, all the valves
are switched off initially.
v2.1 68014
NORMAL START (2 m and 4 m conduits)
Action Description
tion Ultima Ultima Midi Midi Mini Micro
plus plus
Valves F PF P G T L (all off)
Pressure Maximu ning (P4)
Maximum Running 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar
Wait Pressure response 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear feed line 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Add small quantity of solvent 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Balance pressure in purge line 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Start jet 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Purge gun 15 s 15 s 15 s 15 s 15 s 15 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Pressure Default Reference Pressure (P0) 3.24 bar 2.55 bar 3.24 bar 2.52 bar 3.20 bar 3.15 bar
Wait Wait for TOF
v2.1 68025
JET TEST – START (2 m and 4 m conduits)
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 44 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Restart Sequence
There were modifications to the Restart sequence that were introduced in an earlier version
of System Software to include an extra flushing (‘soak’) period. These additional operations
are shown in italics in the summary table.
Before the jet starts, all the normal static checks are made, such as pressure/filter check, ink
and solvent levels, and time to the next Service. As the jet starts, the dynamic functional
checks and adjustments are carried out: ink in gutter check, pressure check, phasing and
TOF adjustments. The printer enters the Jet Running state only after all these functions
have been successfully completed. However, if any of the checks or adjustments are
invalid, the printer attempts a further three starts (four in total) using the Restart sequence.
If an invalid condition still exists, the printer provides an audible and on-screen warning,
or fails with a Print Failure message.
v2.1 68079
RESTART (2 m conduit; 4 m conduit figures in brackets)
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 45 Sep 2009
Normal Shutdown Sequence
The type of Normal Shutdown sequence depends on the length of the printhead conduit.
Valve sequence summary tables are shown for both the 2-metre and 4-metre printhead
conduit lengths. There were modifications to the 2-metre and 4-metre shutdown sequences
that were introduced in an earlier version of System Software to include an extra flushing
(‘soak’) period. These additional operations are shown in italics in the two summary tables.
Initially, the Feed valves are in the ‘on’ state and the jet is running under normal operating
conditions, that is, ink flow in both the primary and secondary circuits.
v2.1 68016
NORMAL SHUTDOWN (2 m conduit)
Pressure Solvent Jet Pressure (P5) 1.76 bar 1.58 bar 1.76 bar 1.58 bar 3.17 bar 3.17 bar
Wait Pressure response 2s 2s 2s 2s 2s 2s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Start solv. jet & clean gutter pipe 14 s 14 s 14 s 14 s 14 s 14 s
Pressure Maximum Running (P4) 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Stop solvent jet 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Depressurize feed line 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear feed line and gutter line 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear gun and purge line 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s
Valves F PF P G T L (all off)
Wait Clear gutter line 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s
Pressure Set to zero 0.00 bar 0.00 bar 0.00 bar 0.00 bar 0.00 bar 0.00 bar
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 46 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
v2.1 68151
NORMAL SHUTDOWN (4 m conduit)
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear feed line/stop gutter vacuum 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Vacuum to purge line 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait 2nd solvent to gun & purge line 10 s 5s 10 s 5s 10 s 10 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Pressure Solvent Jet Pressure (P5) 0.88 bar 0.88 bar 0.88 bar 0.88 bar 3.17 bar 0.88 bar
Wait Pressure response 2s 2s 2s 2s 2s 2s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Constant 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Start solvent jet 40 s 30 s 40 s 30 s 40 s 40 s
Pressure Maximum Running (P4) 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar 4.49 bar
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Stop solvent jet 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Depressurize feed line 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear gun and feed line 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Clear gun and purge line 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s 30 s
Valves F PF P G T L (all off)
Wait Clear gutter line 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s
Pressure Set to zero 0.00 bar 0.00 bar 0.00 bar 0.00 bar 0.00 bar 0.00 bar
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 47 Sep 2009
Purge Line
Sep 2009
OFF Feed Line PIPE FLUID KEY
Printhead
Gutter Line Ink
68150
Venturi
Pressure
sequence has been successfully completed.
Transducer
3 — 48
Feed Purge Gutter Solvent Solvent
Valve Valve Valve Add Flush
Valve Valve
Vent
Pump
Vent
INK SOLVENT
The following two diagrams show the state of the ink system after a Normal Shutdown
FA69084–1
Gutter Line
68584
Pressure
Transducer
Feed Purge Gutter Solvent Solvent Ink
Valve Valve Valve Add Flush Mixing
3 — 49
Valve Valve Valve
Pump
Vent Vent
INK SOLVENT
Pressure
Relief
Valve
Sep 2009
Figure 3-33. Ink System after a Successful Normal Shutdown—7300 Spectrum Printer
Jet Test – Stop Sequence
Jet Test – Stop is a jet-stop facility for use by maintenance technicians only.
The Jet Test – Stop facility is initiated by pressing the [stop] key while pressing and holding
the [ctrl] key. Alternatively, select the Jet Test – Stop option on the Jet Functions page (Print
Monitor > Menu > Maintenance > Jet Functions > Jet Test – Stop). The printer immediately
aborts any other jet sequence and performs this one. This is the quickest method of
stopping the jet and should only be used for fault diagnosis purposes.
NOTE: Auto Power Down is disabled if a Jet Test – Stop occurs. When the jet has shut
down after a Jet Test – Stop, Auto Power Down remains disabled until the power
is switched off and then switched on again, or a jet start is performed.
Initially, the Feed valves are in the ‘on’ state and the jet is running under normal operating
conditions, that is, ink flow in both the primary and secondary circuits.
v2.1 68026
JET TEST – STOP (2 m and 4 m conduits)
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 50 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.6.7 Other Operating Sequences
Purge Dry Cycle Sequence
This is one of the valve drying sequences used in the System Flush procedure.
v2.1 68080
PURGE DRY CYCLE (2 m and 4 m conduits)
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 51 Sep 2009
Nozzle Clear Sequence
This sequence can be used when there is a suspected blocked or obstructed nozzle. The
Nozzle Clear sequence is initiated by selecting the Nozzle Clear option on the Jet
Sequences page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance > Jet Sequences > Nozzle Clear).
Alternatively, the sequence can be quickly accessed by selecting the Nozzle Clear option on
the Menu page (Print Monitor > Menu > Nozzle Clear). The jet must be stopped before the
option can be selected. Refer to the ‘Nozzle Clear Sequence’ part of the ‘Jet Alignment and
Nozzle Cleaning’ maintenance instruction in Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’ for details about
how to perform this procedure.
At the start of the sequence all the valves are in the ‘off’ state and the pump is running,
with ink flowing in the primary circuit only. The system sets the pressure to the Maximum
Running value (P4) and, after a 5-second delay for the pressure to stabilize, the Gutter
valve is switched on for 15 seconds. This transfers the vacuum from the gutter to the
nozzle, via the Gutter valve and the Purge valve (off), and draws ink from the nozzle
chamber back along the purge line (through the Printhead Purge valve) to the tank. This
action attempts to clear the blocked nozzle by also sucking air in through the nozzle
aperture. Finally, the Gutter valve is switched off and the pump is stopped, reducing the
pressure to zero.
NOTE: It is recommended that a maximum of eight Nozzle Clear sequences are
performed in an attempt to clear an obstruction or blockage, with an attempt
made to start the jet after each sequence.
For more details, refer to ‘Maintenance Page’ in Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’.
v2.1 68082
NOZZLE CLEAR (2 m and 4 m conduits)
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 52 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Flush Cycle Sequence
This is the main flush sequence used in the System Flush procedure.
v2.1 68083A
FLUSH CYCLE (2 m and 4 m conduits)
Wait Constant 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Constant 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s
Valves F PF P G T L (allll off)
Wait Constant 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Constant 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s
Valves F PF P G T L (all off)
Wait Constant 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Constant 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s
Valves F PF P G T L (all off)
Wait Constant 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Constant 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s
Valves F PF P G T L (all off)
Wait Constant 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Constant 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s
Valves F PF P G T L (all off)
Wait Constant 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Constant 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s
Valves F PF P G T L (allll off)
(continued)
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 53 Sep 2009
v2.1 68083B
FLUSH CYCLE (2 m and 4 m conduits)
Wait Constant 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Constant 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s 10 s
Valves F PF P G T L (all off)
Wait Constant 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Constant 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s
Valves F PF P G T L (all off)
Valves F PF P G T L
Wait Constant 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s
Valves F PF P G T L (all off)
Wait Constant 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Pressure Set to zero 0.00 bar 0.00 bar 0.00 bar 0.00 bar 0.00 bar 0.00 bar
Wait Pressure response 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 54 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Gutter Dry Cycle Sequence
This is one of the valve drying sequences used in the System Flush procedure.
v2.1 68085
GUTTER DRY CYCLE (2 m and 4 m conduits)
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 55 Sep 2009
Nozzle Flush Sequence
The Nozzle Flush sequence can be used as an alternative to, or in conjunction with, the
Nozzle Clear sequence when there is a suspected blocked or obstructed nozzle.
Unlike the Nozzle Clear sequence, where solvent is drawn in through the nozzle, the
Nozzle Flush sequence automatically fills the nozzle with solvent and then forces a jet of
solvent out of the nozzle and into the gutter to flush away any deposits.
IMPORTANT: The Nozzle Flush sequence attempts to establish a solvent jet, and if this
occurs the solvent is returned to the ink tank. Excessive use of the Nozzle
Flush sequence will, consequently, greatly reduce the viscosity of the ink
and cause the printer to fail. Therefore, the Nozzle Flush sequence must
not be used more than three times to clear a particular nozzle blockage.
The Nozzle Flush sequence is initiated by selecting the Nozzle Flush option on the Jet
Sequences page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance > Jet Sequences > Nozzle Flush).
Alternatively, the sequence can be quickly accessed by selecting the Nozzle Flush option on
the Menu page (Print Monitor > Menu > Nozzle Flush). The jet must be stopped before the
option can be selected.
For more details, refer to ‘Maintenance Page’ in Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’.
At the start of the sequence all the valves are in the ‘off’ state and the pump is running,
with ink flowing in the primary circuit only.
v2.1 68089
NOZZLE FLUSH (2 m and 4 m conduits)
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 56 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Ink Mixing Sequence—7300 Spectrum Printer Only
After the printer is switched on, and before printing can take place, the pigmented ink is
mixed in the tank by the action of the Ink Mixing sequence. The duration of the sequence
varies between 5 and 15 minutes and is dependent on the time since the last ink mix.
At the start of the sequence all the valves are in the ‘off’ state, which begins with a 60-
second delay that allows the maintenance technician time to disable the mixing sequence, if
required.
Immediately before the start of the ink mixing part of the sequence, a ‘pump jog-start’
routine is done, where the pump is switched on and off continuously for a calculated time
(in seconds). This helps to stop the pigmented ink’s tendency to prevent the pump gears
from rotating during pump starting.
During the ink mixing sequence, ink is drawn from the tank and circulated through the
pump to the energized Ink Mixing valve. From the valve it is fed back in through the base
of the ink tank, where it mixes with the main body of ink. This continuous circulation of the
ink during the sequence thoroughly mixes the ink in the tank, keeping the ink pigment in
suspension, in preparation for printing.
Following this, ink is drawn from the tank through the pump to the main ink filter, and
then through the damper and energized Ink System Feed valve to purge the damper.
Finally, the Solvent Flush and Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) valves are energized, which
allows the ink to be briefly drawn back from the printhead along the feed line.
v2.1 68601
INK MIXING—6800
IXING—6800 SPECTRUM PRINTER ONLY (2 m and 4 m conduits)
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 57 Sep 2009
INK TYPE DEPENDENT PARAMETERS (ULTIMA PRINTHEAD)
Parameters Ink Data
Ink type 3103 1010 1014 1016 1018 1065 1070 1075 1121 1240 1243 1247 1270 1405 2030 2035 2250 3123 3124 3160 3240
Solvent type 3501 1505 1505 1506 1505 1565 1560 1575 1590 1512 1512 1517 1540 1705 2500 2500 2750 3501 3501 3560 3710
Sep 2009
Nominal Reference Pressure PREF
184 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(bits)
Reference Pressure Offset* (bits) Adjusted manually according to published offset data table
Normal Solvent Add Pressure Offset
+4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4
from PREF (bits)
Maximum number of consecutive
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 24 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Solvent Adds
Reference Modulation Offset
Adjusted manually according to published offset data table
(VM + offset) (V)
Reference TOF (µs) 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766 766
Normal Solvent Add Time tSA (s) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Warm Up tSA if PSET > PSA (s) 10 10 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
Scheduled Maintenance interval (hr) 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
Scheduled Maintenance interval (mth) 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Modulation Tracking Slope (V/bit) 2.5 2.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.5 2.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0
* Relative to 3103 ink.
3 — 58
INK TYPE DEPENDENT PARAMETERS (MIDI PRINTHEAD)
Parameters Ink Data
Ink type 3103 1010 1014 1016 1018 1065 1070 1075 1121 1240 1243 1247 1270 1405 2030 2035 2250 3123 3124 3160 3240
Solvent type 3501 1505 1505 1506 1505 1565 1560 1560 1590 1512 1512 1517 1540 1705 2500 2500 2750 3501 3501 3560 3710
Nominal Reference Pressure PREF
184 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 185 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(bits)
Reference Pressure Offset* (bits) Adjusted manually according to published offset data table
Normal Solvent Add Pressure Offset
+4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4
from PREF (bits)
Maximum number of consecutive
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 24 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Solvent Adds
Reference Modulation Offset
Adjusted manually according to published offset data table
(VM + offset) (V)
Reference TOF (µs) 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262 1262
Normal Solvent Add Time tSA (s) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Warm Up tSA if PSET > PSA (s) 10 10 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
Scheduled Maintenance interval (hr) 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
Scheduled Maintenance interval (mth) 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Modulation Tracking Slope (V/bit) 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0
* Relative to 3103 ink.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 59 Sep 2009
INK TYPE DEPENDENT PARAMETERS (MINI PRINTHEAD)
Parameters Ink Data
Ink type 1056 1240 1405
Solvent type 1555 1512 1705
Nominal Reference Pressure PREF 178 178
188
(bits) fixed fixed
Normal Solvent Add Pressure Offset
+4 +4 +4
from PREF (bits)
Maximum number of consecutive
12 12 24
Solvent Adds
75 75
Reference Modulation VM (V) 50
fixed fixed
Reference TOF (µs) 565 565 565
Normal Solvent Add Time tSA (s) 10 10 10
Warm Up tSA if PSET > PSA (s) 10 10 10
Scheduled Maintenance interval (hr) 2000 2000 2000
Scheduled Maintenance interval (mth) 12 12 12
Modulation Tracking Slope (V/bit) 0 1.5 1.7
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 60 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
INK TYPE DEPENDENT PARAMETERS (ULTIMA plus PRINTHEAD)
Parameters Ink Data
Ink type 3103 1009 1010 1014 1016 1018 1033 1035 1039 1043 1055 1056 1059 1065 1070 1121 1240 1243 1247 1270 1280 1290 1306 1311 1370 1405 2030 2035 2250 3123 3124 3160 3240
Solvent type 3501 1505 1505 1505 1506 1505 1505 1535 1505 1505 1555 1555 1505 1565 1560 1590 1512 1512 1517 1540 1540 1540 1605 1605 1670 1705 2500 2500 2750 3501 3501 3561 3710
Nominal Reference Pressure PREF
147 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
FA69084–1
(bits)
Reference Pressure Offset* (bits) Adjusted manually according to published offset data table
Normal Solvent Add Pressure Offset
+4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4
from PREF (bits)
Maximum number of consecutive
12 24 12 12 12 12 24 12 24 24 12 12 24 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 24 24 12 24 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Solvent Adds
Reference Modulation Offset
Adjusted manually according to published offset data table
(VM + offset) (V)
Reference TOF (µs) 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330 1330
Normal Solvent Add Time tSA (s) 10 5 10 10 10 10 5 10 5 5 10 10 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Figure 3-52. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Ultima plus Printhead)
3 — 61
INK TYPE DEPENDENT PARAMETERS (MIDI plus PRINTHEAD)
Parameters Ink Data
Ink type 3103 1009 1010 1014 1016 1018 1033 1035 1039 1043 1055 1056 1059 1065 1070 1121 1240 1243 1247 1270 1280 1290 1306 1311 1370 1405 2030 2035 2250 3123 3124 3160 3240
Solvent type 3501 1505 1505 1505 1506 1505 1505 1535 1505 1505 1555 1555 1505 1565 1560 1590 1512 1512 1517 1540 1540 1540 1605 1605 1670 1705 2500 2500 2750 3501 3501 3560 3710
Nominal Reference Pressure PREF
143 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
(bits)
Reference Pressure Offset* (bits) Adjusted manually according to published offset data table
Normal Solvent Add Pressure Offset
+4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4 +4
from PREF (bits)
Maximum number of consecutive
12 24 12 12 12 12 24 12 24 24 12 12 24 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 24 24 12 24 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Solvent Adds
Reference Modulation Offset
Adjusted manually according to published offset data table
(VM + offset) (V)
Reference TOF (µs) 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950 1950
Normal Solvent Add Time tSA (s) 10 5 10 10 10 10 5 10 5 5 10 10 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Warm Up tSA if PSET > PSA (s) 10 5 10 10 10 10 5 10 5 5 10 10 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Scheduled Maintenance interval (hr) 2000 1400 2000 2000 2000 2000 1400 2000 1400 1400 2000 2000 1400 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1400 1400 1400 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
Scheduled Maintenance interval (mth) 12 6 12 12 12 12 6 12 6 6 12 12 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Modulation Tracking Slope (V/bit) 1.0 2.2 2.5 1.7 1.5 1.2 3.0 2.0 3.0 2.4 1.6 1.6 1.5 2.0 1.6 1.6 2.5 2.5 3.8 2.0 2.0 1.6 1.5 1.5 2.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.5
* Relative to 3103 ink.
Sep 2009
Figure 3-53. Ink Type Dependent Parameters Table (Midi plus Printhead)
3.7 Electrical Components
3.7.1 Overview
The 7300 printer has the following main electrical components:
• Mains Power Cable
• Mains Power Supply Switch
• Power On Switch
• Mains Filter
• Mains Input Fuses
• Low Voltage Power Supply Unit (LVPSU)
• EHT Power Supply Unit (EHTPSU)
• Ink System Pump
• Ink System Valves and Cableform Assembly
• Cooling Fan
• Printhead Positive Air Pump (optional)
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 62 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.7.4 Power On Switch
This switch is mounted on the front right of the base unit.
It is a 2-pole, momentary-action ‘on’ switch, which, when pressed and released, connects mains
power to the LVPSU and thereby switches on the printer. Although it switches mains power
within the printer, it is not classified as a mains isolating switch, but is a mains voltage-rated
control device. To power down the printer, either the Auto Power Down feature must be
enabled, or the mains power supply switch on the rear of the printer must be manually set to
the ‘off’ position.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 63 Sep 2009
3.7.8 EHT Power Supply Unit (EHTPSU)
The EHT Power Supply Unit is located at the front of the base unit on its own mounting
plate, which is attached to the front of the base unit and the air filter housing.
The unit generates the high voltages required for the printhead positive deflector plate, and
the modulation and charge generation circuits. It is powered by +24 volts DC from the
LVPSU via the IPM PCB.
A variable EHT output of 0 volts to +10 kV at 10 µA is provided, which is used to create
the +8 kV (maximum for all Mk7 printheads) electrostatic field between the printhead
deflector plates. The level of this output is determined by the EHT Program Input, which is
an analogue voltage of between 0 volts and 10 volts DC, with 10 volts equating to 10 kV.
The value required to generate 8 kV ±1.7% is entered into the printer (refer to ‘Charge
Calibration’ in Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’.)
The EHT default value for the particular message type (raster) being used is displayed (in
volts) on the Print Settings page (Print Monitor > Print Settings).
The EHT output is routed from the unit to the printhead via a red cable to a white Highvol-
style connector.
A further output of +300 volts, at a maximum current of 46 mA, supplies the charge and
the modulation amplifiers on the IPM PCB. On detection of output over-current between
52 mA and 58 mA, the output voltage falls to 0 volts.
Apart from the EHT output, all other voltages and signals are routed to and from the unit
via a 12-way Molex Mini-Fit Junior connector PL7.
The following table provides details of the inputs and outputs.
68005
Input Output 12-way Molex pin number
+24 V Power 6
EHT Program Input (0–10 V) 3
/EHT Enable 4
/300 V Enable 9
0V 5, 12
Chassis 11
+300 V 1
/EHT Over Current 10
Not connected 2, 7, 8
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 64 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.7.9 Ink System Pump
This unit is a pump and brushless DC motor assembly mounted through an aperture in the
front wall of the ink system enclosure.
Its purpose is to pump ink round the ink system at different pressures as required by the
ink system control circuits. These pressure values depend on the different functions
performed by the printer during startup, normal running, nozzle clearing, and shutdown.
The motor is powered by +24 volts DC, and pressure control is achieved by a 0 volts to
5 volts DC drive signal supplied by the IPM PCB control circuits, via PL3.
Magnetic coupling from the motor to the pump ensures separation of the ink from the
electrical drive parts. The gears are made from polyetheretherketone (PEEK), which
provides reduced wear and long life. However, in the 7300 Spectrum printer a more robust
pump is used, which has gears made from more wear-resistant materials to combat the
abrasive nature of some pigmented inks.
The pump used in standard 7300 printers has an integral pressure relief valve (PRV),
whereas the 7300 Spectrum has an external PRV connected across the pump inlet and
outlet ports.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 65 Sep 2009
3.7.11 Cooling Fan
The cooling fan is mounted on the top left side of the air filter housing. It is a 24 volts DC
device powered directly from the LVPSU and operates all the time that the printer is
switched on. Air is drawn in by the fan through the base of the cabinet, through the air
filter, around the inside of the cabinet and out through the vent holes in the sides.
The 7300 uses a fan that has a rating of 2.4 watts. In the 7300 (IP65 version) the fan is a more
powerful 6 watts unit because of the much thicker air filter used.
The cabinet air temperature is monitored by a thermistor set at a limit of 58 °C. If this
temperature is exceeded (for example, because of a fan failure or a blocked air filter), the
printer fails and the Print Failure message “2.08 Printer Over Temperature” is displayed.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 66 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.8 Electronics and Software
3.8.1 Overview
The main electronics system in the 7300 printer is contained on one printed circuit board
(PCB), known as the Integrated Processor Module (IPM) PCB, which is mounted vertically
on the left side of the cabinet. The Keyboard and Display Assembly in the printer top cover
contains the Display PCB.
There are also options of additional Auxiliary PCBs, which are vertically mounted towards
the rear of the base unit, to the left of the IPM PCB.
The functions of the circuit boards are briefly described as follows:
IPM PCB: Contains the main Central Processing Unit, which controls printer
operation. It also contains the Unique Number Identification Chip
(UNIC) and amplifiers for processing the printhead control
signals. The PCB also processes the inputs from the keyboard and
provides control of the display.
Display PCB: Simply provides connections from the IPM PCB for the display.
USB PCB: Controls the transfer of message data to and from a USB memory
stick connected to the printer. The PCB also controls the facility to
copy or back up the configuration of a printer and to restore a
configuration to any printer.
Auxiliary PCBs x 2: Optional boards for additional special functions, such as
Parallel I/O, and for future software options.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 67 Sep 2009
Test Points
TP1 (B8/B9) HEAD TEMP. Analogue voltage of 0 volts to 11 volts DC relating to the
temperature sensed at the printhead by an embedded thermistor.
Hardware detects when the temperature exceeds +60 °C ±3 °C, at which
time Print Failure “2.00 Printhead Over Temperature” is reported.
TP2 (B9) 300V. EHTPSU output of 300 volts DC.
TP3 (B9) EHT The EHTPSU requires calibrating to give a specific output of 8 kV by
EHT.
entering a calibration figure into the printer. An analogue voltage of
between 0 volts and 10 volts DC can be measured at this test point, with
10 volts equating to 10 kV.
TP4 (C7) –10VREF. This is the output of the –10 volts DC reference.
TP5 (C7) 5VREF. This is the output of the +5 volts DC reference.
TP6 (C9) GUTSENSE. The gutter sense circuit detects the presence of ink flow in
the gutter during a normal jet start sequence and under normal jet running
conditions (it is switched off during a Jet Test – Start sequence). If ink flow
is not detected in the gutter for any reason (for example, a misaligned jet),
the software shuts down the jet. The voltage measured at this test point
should be +5 volts DC if there is no ink jet detected, and less than +4 volts
DC if the jet is present in the gutter. These voltages may vary with time.
TP7 (C9) 10VREF. This is the output of the +10 volts DC reference.
TP9 (C8) VPOWERS. The energizing voltage rail for the valves can be checked at
this test point. It is either the energizing voltage of +24 volts DC, or the
valve hold-on voltage of +12 volts DC.
TP10 (C9) PUMP. Variable pump control voltage between 0 volts and +5.6 volts DC.
TP11 (C7) READPRESS. This is the amplified output of the pressure transducer and
is a voltage representation of the pressure in the ink system of between
0 volts and +5 volts DC. During normal operation, with link LK6 fitted, the
voltages measured at TP11 and TP12 are almost identical. The Actual
Pressure (Read Pressure) and Set Pressure values observed on the Monitor
Jet page (Maintenance page) are almost never the same due to tolerances
in the electronics.
TP12 (C6) SETPRESS. This is the Set Pressure value and has a range of 0 volts to
+5 volts DC. It represents the pressure set by the electronics to maintain
the required ink flow. During normal operation, with link LK6 fitted, the
voltages measured at TP11 and TP12 are almost identical.
TP13 (B3) 0V. Zero volts test point.
TP14 (C3) 0V. Zero volts test point.
TP16 (A2) SEC–DET. Secondary trigger input. This is the opto-isolated secondary
trigger signal, and is a 0 volts to 5 volts digital CMOS signal.
TP17 (A8) 0V. Zero volts test point.
TP18 (C9) 0V. Zero volts test point.
TP19 (C7) 0V. Zero volts test point.
TP20 (C7) 12V. A convenient point to test for the presence of the supply on the
+12 volts rail from the LVPSU.
TP21 (C7) –16V. A convenient point to test for the presence of the supply on the
–16 volts rail from the LVPSU.
TP22 (C7) 5V. A convenient point to test for the presence of the supply on the
+5.1 volts rail from the LVPSU.
TP23 (C7) 24V. A convenient point to test for the presence of the supply on the
+24 volts rail from the LVPSU.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 68 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
TP24 (A8) PHASE A. Amplified analogue signal from the phase detector in the range
of approximately +11 volts to –15 volts. There should be less than 1 volt
peak-to-peak noise during quiescent (non-printing) conditions. When
printing, this signal looks erratic as the amplifier is driven firmly into
saturation by the presence of charged printing drops.
TP26 (B8) PHASE D. This is the peak value of the TOF digital signal of
approximately 5 volts.
TP27 (A2) PRI–DET. Next object input. This is the opto-isolated primary trigger
signal. It is a 0 volts to 5 volts digital signal, with the falling or rising edge
indicating the presence of the object.
TP28 (A2) MAINSE. Single-ended shaft encoder input. This is the opto-isolated shaft
encoder input, and is a 0 volts to 5 volts digital signal.
TP29 (C10) CHARGE. Charge amplifier output that is applied to the charge electrode.
The typical output range is 0 volts to +255 volts DC.
TP30 (B9) CHG–LOW. Low voltage charge signal, before amplification, of between
0 volts and –8 volts.
TP31 (A9) MOD–LOW. Low voltage modulation signal, before amplification, of
between 0 volts and –8 volts. A sine wave should be observed with a
frequency dependent on the type of printhead fitted: 64 kHz (Ultima plus
and Midi plus 75 µm); 80 kHz (Ultima and Midi 62 µm); 96 kHz
(Mini 50 µm); 120 kHz (Micro 40 µm).
TP32 (A10) MOD Modulation amplifier output. A sine wave of between 0 volts and
MOD.
255 volts AC should be observed with a frequency dependent on the type
of printhead fitted: 64 kHz (Ultima plus and Midi plus 75 µm); 80 kHz
(Ultima and Midi 62 µm); 96 kHz (Mini 50 µm); 120 kHz (Micro 40 µm).
The signal should be AC coupled with the peaks of the sine wave going
positive and negative with respect to 0 volts.
TP46 (A2) QUADSE Quadrature shaft encoder input. This is the opto-isolated
QUADSE.
quadrature shaft encoder signal, and is a 0 volts to 5 volts digital signal.
TP49 (A8) VBAT The state of the NiMH battery can be monitored at this test point,
VBAT.
and should be a maximum of 2.9 V DC and a minimum of 2.2 V DC.
TP50 (C3) 3.3V. A regulated supply voltage of 3.3 volts for the CPU, Gate Array, and
Memory circuits taken from the LVPSU +5.1 volts supply.
TP52 (A3/B3) 2.5V. A regulated supply voltage of 2.5 volts for the CPU, Gate Array, and
Memory circuits taken from the LVPSU +5.1 volts supply.
TP54 (C7) PRESST–. Pressure transducer output. A differential of 0 volts to 33 mV,
where 33 mV equates to 255 pressure bits. Measurement must be taken
between this test point and TP55.
TP55 (C7) PRESST+. Pressure transducer output. A differential of 0 volts to 33 mV,
where 33 mV equates to 255 pressure bits. Measurement must be taken
between this test point and TP54.
TP56 (C6) AIR TEMP. Analogue voltage of 0 volts to 5 volts DC, relating to the air
temperature sensed inside the printer enclosure by a thermistor located
close to the charge amplifier on the IPM PCB. The voltage rises with
increasing temperature but is non-linear. Hardware detects when the
temperature exceeds +58 °C ±2 °C, at which point Print Failure “2.08
Printer Over Temperature” is reported.
TP60 (B8) 0V. Zero volts test point.
TP61 (A2) 0V. Zero volts test point.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 69 Sep 2009
Links
LK4 (A7/A8) BAT. (Battery). Connects the NiMH battery to the message store so that
data is retained when the printer is switched off. The NiMH battery is also
trickle charged when this link is fitted. Removing this link deletes all
messages, datasets, downloaded fonts, logos and passwords from the NVR
(SRAM). In addition, various other parameters in flash memory are reset
to their default values, for example: Printhead Code, Ref Modulation,
Conduit Length, Ink Type, Head Height—these will all need to be re-
entered. It is recommended that the Linx Sync software is used to back up
the data prior to removing this link.
LK5 (B4) MONITOR. This link can be fitted to boot the software from a temporarily
fitted EPROM (IC62).
LK6 (C7) OPEN LOOP. Removal of this link breaks the feedback loop that controls
the pump and pressure circuits. By removing the link it is possible to
energize the pump even though there may be a fault in the pressure
transducer circuit or ink system. Because of the non-linearities in the
control loop, the scaling factors for the Set Pressure commands on the
Monitor Jet page (Maintenance page) do not apply when the link is
removed. The Actual Pressure (Read Pressure) command is unaffected.
This link should normally be fitted.
LK7 (A5/B5) S/W LINKS. Links LK7A, LK7B, LK7C, LK7D, LK7E, LK7F, LK7G, and
LK7H are software-readable links and as such should not be moved or
interfered with. More specifically, when link LK7B is fitted, the 7300
Spectrum ink options are enabled.
LK8 (B9) VC. Connects the 300 volts DC stabilized supply to the charge amplifier.
Selective removal of either LK8 or LK25 can be useful to isolate a fault if a
“2.04 300V Power Supply” fault is reported.
LK9 (B1/C1) 5V/24V. Selects the appropriate line driver for a single-ended shaft
encoder: either position A (pins 1 and 2) for 5 volts DC, or position B (pins
2 and 3) for 24 volts DC. For an open-collector device the position of link
LK9 is irrelevant.
LK11 (A1) ROLLBACK. When a quadrature shaft encoder is used, this link selects
between secondary sensor input and rollback output for direction sensing
of the production line. Position A (pins 1 and 2) selects secondary sensor
input, and position B (pins 2 and 3) selects rollback.
LK12 (B1) 5V/24V. Selects the appropriate line driver for a quadrature shaft encoder:
either position A (pins 1 and 2) for 5 volts DC, or position B (pins 2 and 3)
for 24 volts DC. For an open-collector device the position of link LK12 is
irrelevant.
LK19 (B4) SAFETY O/R.. (Safety Override). Software-readable link.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 70 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
When this link is fitted, the printhead Over Temperature sense and the
EHT Trip sense signals do not disable the 300 V, ink system pump, Feed
valves and EHT. However, the EHT Trip sense will disable the EHT
internally on the EHTPSU regardless of LK19 being fitted. The link may be
fitted with caution to aid fault diagnosis. See also System Warning “3.15
Safety Override Active”.
LK20 (B4/B5) POWER OFF O/R. (Power Off Override). Software-readable link. When
this link is fitted the auto power down mains on/off switch cannot be
switched off by the software. See also System Warning “3.14 Power Off
Override Active”.
LK21 (B4) COVER OFF O/R. (Cover Override). Software-readable link.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 71 Sep 2009
LK26 (B4/B5) BIST. (Built In Self-Test). Software-readable link. When fitted it places the
gate array (IC41) in self-test mode, which generates a staircase waveform
with historic correction.
LK27 (B4/B5) GUTTER O/R. (Gutter Sense Override). The gutter sense circuit detects the
presence of ink flow in the gutter during a normal jet start sequence and
under normal jet running conditions (it is switched off during a Jet Test –
Start sequence). If ink flow is not detected in the gutter for any reason (for
example, a misaligned jet), the software shuts down the jet. Absence of ink
in the gutter is detected within approximately 10 seconds. With link LK27
fitted, the software starts and maintains the jet regardless of the gutter
detection status. See also System Warning “3.16 Gutter Override Active”.
LK29 (C6) SPECTRUM. The ink system pump control characteristics are different in
the 7300 Spectrum printer from those in the standard 7300 printer. This
link determines the response time of the pump feedback loop, and its
position depends on which type of printer is being operated. It is fitted in
position A (pins 1 and 2) for a standard 7300 printer, and in position B
(pins 2 and 3) for the 7300 Spectrum printer. This link is to be used in
conjunction with link LK30.
LK30 (C6) SPECTRUM. The ink system pump control characteristics are different in
the 7300 Spectrum printer from those in the standard 7300 printer. This
link determines the response time of the pump feedback loop, and its
position depends on which type of printer is being operated. It is fitted in
position A (pins 1 and 2) for a standard 7300 printer, and in position B
(pins 2 and 3) for the 7300 Spectrum printer. This link is to be used in
conjunction with link LK29.
LK31 (C3) BUZZER. This link, when removed, inhibits the internal warning buzzer,
BUZZER
and may be removed when fault finding to relieve personal irritation! It
should normally be fitted.
LK32 (B1) NPN/PNP (PRI). Selects the circuitry to accept either an NPN or a PNP
type of primary trigger. Position A (pins 1 and 2) for NPN; position B (pins
2 and 3) for PNP. This link is used in conjunction with links LK33 and
LK34.
LK33 (B1) NPN/PNP (PRI). Selects the circuitry to accept either an NPN or a PNP
type of primary trigger. Position A (pins 1 and 2) for NPN; position B (pins
2 and 3) for PNP. This link is used in conjunction with links LK32 and
LK34.
LK34 (B1) NPN/PNP (PRI). Selects the circuitry to accept either an NPN or a PNP
type of primary trigger. Position A (pins 1 and 2) for NPN; position B (pins
2 and 3) for PNP. This link is used in conjunction with links LK32 and
LK33.
LK35 (B1/B2) PRI–DBM When this link is fitted in position B (between pins 2 and 3),
PRI–DBM.
and LK36 is fitted in position A (between pins 1 and 2), MEDIUM
debounce of 1 ms is set on the primary trigger input. The default position
for this link and link LK36 is position A (between pins 1 and 2), which both
together give FAST or ‘normal’ debounce of 55 µs. (See the subsection
‘Primary Trigger’ in ‘External Signals’ later in this chapter.)
LK36 (B1/B2) PRI–DBS. When this link is fitted in position B (between pins 2 and 3), and
LK35 is fitted in position A (between pins 1 and 2), SLOW debounce of up
to 25 ms is set on the primary trigger input, which filters out multiple
primary trigger edges to give one genuine pulse. This is particularly useful
when a relay contact is used as a trigger source. The default position for
this link and link LK35 is position A (between pins 1 and 2), which both
together give FAST or ‘normal’ debounce of 55 µs. (See the subsection
‘Primary Trigger’ in ‘External Signals’ later in this chapter.)
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 72 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
LK37 (A1) NPN/PNP (SEC). Selects the circuitry to accept either an NPN or a PNP
type of secondary trigger. Position A (pins 1 and 2) for NPN; position B
(pins 2 and 3) for PNP. This link is used in conjunction with links LK38
and LK39.
LK38 (A1) NPN/PNP (SEC). Selects the circuitry to accept either an NPN or a PNP
type of secondary trigger. Position A (pins 1 and 2) for NPN; position B
(pins 2 and 3) for PNP. This link is used in conjunction with links LK37
and LK39.
LK39 (A1) NPN/PNP (SEC). Selects the circuitry to accept either an NPN or a PNP
type of secondary trigger. Position A (pins 1 and 2) for NPN; position B
(pins 2 and 3) for PNP. This link is used in conjunction with links LK37
and LK38.
LK40 (B1/B2) SEC–DBM. When this link is fitted in position B (between pins 2 and 3),
and LK41 is fitted in position A (between pins 1 and 2), MEDIUM
debounce of 1 ms is set on the secondary trigger input. The default position
for this link and link LK41 is position A (between pins 1 and 2), which both
together give FAST or ‘normal’ debounce of 55 µs. (See the subsection
‘Secondary Trigger’ in ‘External Signals’ later in this chapter.)
LK41 (A1/A2) SEC–DBS. When this link is fitted in position B (between pins 2 and 3), and
LK40 is fitted in position A (between pins 1 and 2), SLOW debounce of up
to 25 ms is set on the secondary trigger input, which filters out multiple
secondary trigger edges to give one genuine pulse. This is particularly
useful when a relay contact is used as a trigger source. The default position
for this link and link LK40 is position A (between pins 1 and 2), which both
together give FAST or ‘normal’ debounce of 55 µs. (See the subsection
‘Secondary Trigger’ in ‘External Signals’ later in this chapter.)
LK42 (A1) ISOL NON–ISOL. Selects between an isolated or a non-isolated secondary
trigger input. The link can be fitted in the ISOL position when triggering
from a device that has its own power supply (for example, a PLC) that
needs to be isolated from the printer, or when the printer is being operated
in particularly electrically noisy environments. Position A (pins 1 and 2)
for non-isolated; position B (pins 2 and 3) for isolated.
LK44 (A2/A3) USB PWR. Selects either internal or external power for USB
communication. Position A (pins 1 and 2) for external power; position B
(pins 2 and 3) for internal power.
LK46 (A1) RS422. This is a bank of 18 pins that select RS422 for the SCC3 port. All
must be fitted for selection. This link is to be used in conjunction with link
LK24 RS232.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 73 Sep 2009
The following table gives the IPM PCB links, their functions and default positions. Also,
representations of some links are provided (where applicable) that show their default
positions and orientations as seen on the IPM PCB. This is to help the maintenance
technician ensure that links are fitted to the correct pins for the required functions.
68848
Link Function Default Position and Orientation
C
B
LK23 SMRXD2 Position B—RS232 A
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 74 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FA69084–1
69393
Sep 2009
Safety Functions
Detection and safety lock-out hardware guards against hazardous situations arising as a
result of fault conditions, according to the following table.
68002
Fault condition Action
Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch
EHT off 300 V off Ink Feed P’head Feed Pump off
valve off valve off
EHT Over Current ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Printhead Over Temp. ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Printhead Cover Off ✔ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 76 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.8.6 Software
Downloading Software
The 7300 System Software program is stored in Flash memory (IC58 and IC59) on the IPM
PCB.
The software is downloaded to the printer from a desktop or laptop PC via the serial
communications link. This comms link is used to communicate between the PC and the
printer, and internally between the IPM PCB and the Display PCB. Connection between the
PC and the printer is achieved via the RS232 interface cable connected to the printer rear
panel RS232 INTERFACE connector.
The procedure for downloading the 7300 System Software is described in the ‘Linx Sync
(Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures’ maintenance instruction in Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 77 Sep 2009
Typical configurations for NPN and PNP photocells used as primary triggers are shown in
the following two simplified illustrations.
69083
SK1/SK2
6900 PRINTER
NPN PHOTOCELL 1 24VF
LK33
PRIMARY
3 2 1
TRIGGER 6
3 x 560R
75k
Internal
LK32 LK34 signal to
24V IC73 printer
3 2 1 3 2 1 logic
2 0VF
69084
SK1/SK2
6900 PRINTER
PNP PHOTOCELL 1 24VF
LK33
PRIMARY
3 2 1
TRIGGER 6
3 x 560R
75k
Internal
LK32 LK34 signal to
24V IC73 printer
3 2 1 3 2 1 logic
2 0VF
Debounce
The software determines from which edge of the input signal (leading or trailing edge) the
‘next object’ triggers are being generated. SLOW debounce of approximately 25 ms can be
set on the primary trigger input by fitting link LK35 in position A (between pins 1 and 2),
and link LK36 in position B (between pins 2 and 3), which filters out multiple primary
trigger edges to give one genuine pulse. This is particularly useful when a relay contact is
used as a trigger source.
When link LK35 is fitted in position B (between pins 2 and 3), and link LK36 in position A
(between pins 1 and 2), MEDIUM debounce of approximately 1 ms is set on the primary
trigger input. The default position for links LK35 and LK36 is position A (between pins 1
and 2), which both together give FAST or ‘normal’ debounce of approximately 50 µs.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 78 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.9.2 Secondary Trigger
Trigger Device Types
The secondary trigger input can be from a photocell, a contact switch, a relay contact, a
signal from a PLC, or many other sources. The secondary trigger would normally be used
to increment or reset sequential numbers or messages, or to change from printing one
message to another. The secondary trigger can also perform the same function as the
primary trigger.
The input is connected to either SK1 or SK2 on the IPM PCB. These two connectors are
located through the printer rear panel, and identified as PRIMARY TRIGGER/SHAFT
ENCODER and SECONDARY TRIGGER/SHAFT ENCODER, respectively. The two
connectors are wired in parallel so either may be used for a secondary trigger device. The
hardware input circuit is separate from, but identical to, that of the primary trigger.
Signal conditions for the secondary trigger are a sink/source (NPN/PNP) current of
greater than 20 mA per printer input, and a signal duration of greater than 100 µs.
The secondary trigger source should be an open-collector device, of either NPN or PNP
type, capable of using a 24 volts supply only, or it can be a volt-free relay contact. The
choice of trigger device type is determined by fitting the three links LK37, LK38 and LK39
in one of two positions—position A (between pins 1 and 2) for NPN, or position B (between
pins 2 and 3) for PNP.
Typical configurations for NPN and PNP photocells used as secondary triggers are shown
in the following two simplified illustrations. Note that, for clarity, the isolated secondary
input is not shown.
69085
SK1/SK2
6900 PRINTER
NPN PHOTOCELL 1 24VF
LK38
3 2 1
SECONDARY
TRIGGER 4
3 x 560R
75k
Internal
24V
LK37 LK39 signal to
IC74 printer
3 2 1 3 2 1 logic
2 0VF
LK38
3 2 1
SECONDARY
TRIGGER 4
3 x 560R
75k
Internal
24V
LK37 LK39 signal to
IC74 printer
3 2 1 3 2 1 logic
2 0VF
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 79 Sep 2009
Isolated/Non-Isolated Secondary Trigger Input
There is a choice of an isolated or non-isolated secondary trigger input. Link LK42 can be
fitted in the ISOL position (between pins 2 and 3) in the following circumstances:
• When triggering from a device that has its own power supply (for example, a PLC) and
it is preferred that this is not connected to the printer.
• When the printer is being operated in an environment where there is a high level of
electrical noise.
If an isolated secondary trigger input is used, links LK37, LK38, and LK39 must be fitted in
the NPN configuration. Also, the PRIMARY TRIGGER/SHAFT ENCODER connector must
have the positive trigger connected to pin 5, and the negative trigger connected to pin 4.
Fitting link LK42 between pins 1 and 2 selects the non-isolated secondary trigger input.
Debounce
The software determines from which edge of the input signal (leading or trailing edge) the
secondary triggers are being generated. SLOW debounce of approximately 25 ms can be set
on the secondary trigger input by fitting link LK40 in position A (between pins 1 and 2), and
link LK41 in position B (between pins 2 and 3), which filters out multiple secondary trigger
edges to give one genuine pulse. This is particularly useful when a relay contact is used as
a trigger source.
When link LK40 is fitted in position B (between pins 2 and 3), and link LK41 in position A
(between pins 1 and 2), MEDIUM debounce of approximately 1 ms is set on the secondary
trigger input. The default position for links LK40 and LK41 is position A (between pins 1
and 2), which both together give FAST or ‘normal’ debounce of approximately 50 µs.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 80 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
The following two simplified illustrations show the input connections for a 5-volt and a 24-
volt single-ended shaft encoder, respectively.
69087
5 V SINGLE-ENDED SK1/SK2 6900 PRINTER
SHAFT ENCODER 3 5VF
24VF
1
SE INPUT 8
4 x 910R 470R
NOTE: 2
LK9
Connections and
3 1
LK9 shown for a
5 V Shaft Encoder 1
ANODE
IC11A 7
OUTPUT
2
CATHODE
CA
2 0VF
SE INPUT 8
4 x 910R 470R
NOTE: 2
LK9
Connections and
3 1
LK9 shown for a
24 V Shaft Encoder 1
ANODE
IC11A 7
OUTPUT
2
CA
CATHODE
2 0VF
NOTE: 2
LK12
Connections and
3 1
LK12 shown for a
5 V Shaft Encoder 4
ANODE
IC11B 6
OUTPUT
3
CATHODE
2 0VF
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 81 Sep 2009
69090
24 V QUADRATURE SK1/SK2 6900 PRINTER
SHAFT ENCODER 3 5VF
1 24VF
QSE INPUT 9
4 x 910R 470R
NOTE: 2
LK12
Connections and
3 1
LK12 shown for a
24 V Shaft Encoder 4
ANODE
IC11B 6
OUTPUT
3
CATHODE
2 0VF
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 82 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Mains (VFC) External Alarm
For a mains-powered external alarm, the alarm switching signal is used to operate a volt-
free contact (VFC) relay (RLA1) on the IPM PCB.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 83 Sep 2009
VFC Relay Operation (Printing Only)
In the following description of the VFC relay contact operation, it is accepted that the
‘Printing’ event is set to ‘Constant’ on the Alarm Setup page.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 84 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
The operator can configure the printer conditions that illuminate each beacon.
Two types of Multi-Stage Alarm accessory are available to replace the standard 24 V
external alarm output or the VFC Alarm Conversion:
• A 24 V Multi-Stage Alarm type.
• A VFC Multi-Stage Alarm type.
For more information on alarms, see the section ‘Alarm Output’ earlier in this chapter.
Refer to the section ‘Maintenance Instructions’ in Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’ for fitting
instructions.
Cable Connections
Connection for the RS232 and RS422 interfaces is by the RS232 INTERFACE connector on
the rear panel of the printer, which is a 9-way, D-type connector with numeric pin-out
designations. Pin connections for the RS232 and RS422 interface cables are shown in the
following two illustrations.
COMPUTER 68047 PRINTER
"RS232 INTERFACE"
1 1 not connected
RxD RxD
2 2
TxD TxD
3 3
4 4 not connected
Gnd Gnd 5
5
6 6 not connected
7 7 not connected
8 8 not connected
9 9 not connected
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 85 Sep 2009
COMPUTER 69158 PRINTER
"RS232 INTERFACE"
Tx+ Rx+
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 86 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Sinking or Sourcing the Supply Voltage
Regardless of the supply voltage setting, the inputs must be able to ‘sink’ or ‘source’
greater than 10 mA, and the outputs can ‘sink’ or ‘source’ up to 160 mA.
Linx recommends to sink instead of source both the inputs and the outputs, as this is easier
and safer for the printer.
LK4 LK5
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 87 Sep 2009
Pin Connections
Pin connections for the PIO Interface are shown in the following table.
69322
PARALLEL I/O PIN CONNECTIONS
Pin no. Function Pin no. Function
1 0 V (for inputs) 14 Input 2
2 Input 1 15 Not connected
3 Not connected 16 Input 8
4 Input 7 17 Input 6
5 Input 5 18 Input 4
6 Input 3 19 Latch input
7 +24 V supply (for inputs) 20 Latch output
8 0V 21 0 V (for outputs)
9 Output 8 22 Output 7
10 Output 6 23 Output 5
11 Output 4 24 Output 3
12 Output 2 25 Output 1
13 +24 V supply (for outputs) — —
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 88 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
3.9.11 D-Type Connector Assembly
Correct assembly of the D-type connectors used for trigger devices, shaft encoder, Serial
Interface, and Parallel Interface connections to the printer, is shown in the following
illustration.
Cable screen to be terminated by removing the
outer sheath and folding the braid back on itself
by approximately 10 mm. Braid to be secured
6321 by the cable clamp over the exposed braid.
6
7
5 8
9 (see NOTE 1)
4
10 2 1
3
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 3 — 89 Sep 2009
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 3 — 90 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
CHAPTER 4: SYSTEM OPTIONS
4.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the system options that are available in the Linx 7300 printer. The
information shown in this chapter refers to printers with Version 4.1 System Software
installed, unless otherwise stated.
Refer to the 7300 How To ... documents for more information about how to edit messages
and how to use other functions that are available from the 7300 user interface.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 4—1 Sep 2009
4.2.1 How to Select and Change Options
Six soft keys to the left of the display are related to the available options shown on the left
side of the displayed page. Press the soft key that is related to the required option to select it.
For example, to select the Menu option on the Print Monitor page, press the fifth soft key.
The Menu page is then displayed with a further list of options on the right of the page.
73062
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 4—2 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
4.2.2 Total System Options
When the Menu key is pressed, the system options are displayed on the Menu page. The
complete list of system options that are available with the Level E password is shown in the
following screen.
73063
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 4—3 Sep 2009
To get access to the complete list of system options (and therefore all of the Maintenance
functions), perform the following steps:
If the system is set to Level D (Service 1) or lower level.
1. On the Print Monitor page, press the Menu key.
2. On the Menu page, select the Change User Level option.
3. On the Change User Level page, enter the Level E password.
4. Press the OK key.
NOTE: All passwords are case sensitive. The default passwords are in upper case letters
and must be entered as such. If “ABC” is entered, it will be accepted, but “abc” or
“Abc” will be rejected. Passwords created by the operator can be a mixture of
upper and lower case letters.
69155
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 4—4 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
4.2.4 Option Availability
The jet has three states: ‘Idle’, ‘Jet Running’, and ‘Printing’ (printing or ready to receive a
‘print go’ signal). Some options on the Menu pages are influenced by these states, which
can change the availability of some options and also the ability to select an option or
change its parameters.
Menu pages and their options are only displayed if they are valid for the password used
and the current jet state. For example, the Conduit Length option (Print Monitor > Menu >
Setup > Installation > Printhead) is only displayed when the two Service level passwords
are used. The Conduit Length option can be selected or changed only at Level E, and only
when the jet is in the ‘Idle’ (jet off) state. At Level D or when the jet is in the ‘Jet Running’ or
‘Printing’ states, the Conduit Length option is displayed but is dimmed and cannot be
selected or changed.
The following table shows when each page and the options the page contains are available,
related to the jet state and the level of password used. The symbols used in the table to
show when the pages and options are available are as follows:
• Pages and options that are displayed and can be selected or changed are identified with
a solid circle.
• Pages and options that are displayed, but cannot be selected or changed are identified
with an empty circle.
• Pages and options that are not available because of the jet state or password level, and
therefore are not displayed, are identified with a grey box.
NOTE: The Line Setup option on the Print Monitor page (shown in the following table) is
described first in this chapter.
73064A
LEVEL D LEVEL E
1st level page 2nd level page 3rd level page 4th level page Idle Jet Print- Idle Jet Print-
Runn- ing Runn- ing
ing ing
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 4—5 Sep 2009
73064B
LEVEL D LEVEL E
st nd rd th
1 level page 2 level page 3 level page 4 level page Idle Jet Print- Idle Jet Print-
Runn- ing Runn- ing
ing ing
Setup Installation — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Date & Time — ● ● | ● ● |
Current Time ● ● | ● ● |
Current Date ● ● | ● ● |
Hijri Date | | | | | |
Nudge Hijri Date ● ● | ● ● |
Printhead — ● | | ● | |
Printhead Type | | | ● | |
Conduit Length | | | ● | |
Printhead Height ● ● ● ● ● ●
Cover Override ● ● ● ● ● ●
Printhead Code ● | | ● | |
Mod Slope | | | ● | |
ID — ● | | ● | |
UNIC Code | | | | | |
Printer Conf Code ● | | ● | |
Printer Serial No. | | | ● ● ●
Ink/Solvent — ● | | ● | |
Ink/Solvent Type | | | ● | |
Next Mix | | | ● | |
Last Mix | | | | | |
Mix Time | | | | | |
Disable Mix | | | ● | |
Locale — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Language ● ● ● ● ● ●
Use Language Defaults ● ● ● ● ● ●
Units ● ● ● ● ● ●
Calendar ● ● | ● ● |
Keyboard ● ● ● ● ● ●
Secondary Keyboard ● ● ● ● ● ●
Photocells — ● ● ●
Pri. Photocell Deadtime ● ● |
Sec. Photocell Deadtime ● ● |
USB Refer to the Linx 7300 How To … documents ● ● ● ● ● ●
Change User Level — — — ● ● ● ● ● ●
Nozzle Flush Refer to the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide ● | | ● | |
Nozzle Clear Refer to the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide ● | | ● | |
System Information Refer to the Linx 7300 How To … documents ● ● ● ● ● ●
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 4—6 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
4.3 Line Setup Page
There are four options on the Line Setup page:
• Trigger
69154
• Speed
• Alarm
• Power Down
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 4—7 Sep 2009
The power-down options and conditions are displayed when the Power Down option is
selected on the Line Setup page.
69157
Delayed on Idle
If there has been no activity during the power-down delay time, AND the jet is in the ‘Idle’
state, the printer will automatically power down.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 4—8 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Delayed on Jet Running
If there has been no activity during the power-down delay time, AND the jet is in the ‘Jet
Running’ state, a normal jet shutdown is performed followed by automatic power-down.
Delayed on Printing
If there has been no activity during the power-down delay time, AND the jet is in the
‘Printing’ state, printing is stopped and a normal jet shutdown is performed followed by
automatic power-down.
Delay
The power-down delay is the time, in minutes, during which there must be no activity
before the power-down sequence can begin. If any activity occurs during the power-down
delay time, the delay period is restarted. To change the delay time, highlight the Delay
option and press the Select key. The Up or Down arrow keys are used to increase or
decrease the time, and the OK key is pressed to accept the change. The default setting for
the Delay option is 60 minutes, the minimum setting is 1 minute, and the maximum setting
is 36000 minutes (600 hours).
When the power-down delay time has expired and the jet has shut down, a 5-second delay
occurs before power-down. This additional delay allows the printer data to be saved. After
this period, an information message is displayed that shows a countdown from 10 seconds.
Any activity during this period cancels the whole process and the printer remains turned
on.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 4—9 Sep 2009
4.4.1 Event Log
The Event Log (Print Monitor > Menu > Event Log) contains information about the current
state of the printer. The information includes all current events and an event history.
Functions are also available for event filtering, and for configuring how and when each
event is logged. The total number of times an event has occurred is also provided.
Current Events
69093
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 4 — 10 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
All logged events, up to a maximum of 1000, are displayed in the lower part of the page
with a timestamp for each one. All the events in the list appear in date and time order, with
the most recent displayed at the top of the list.
The convention for the timestamp is ‘year-month-day hours:minutes:seconds’. For example, 06-
07-13 15:16:51 means that the event occurred on the 13th of July 2006 at 16 minutes and 51
seconds past 3 o’clock in the afternoon.
When the list is full (1000 events), the next event to occur is added to the top of the list and
the oldest event at the bottom of the list is deleted, and so on for all subsequent events.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 4 — 11 Sep 2009
Event Filtering
When the Event Filtering key is pressed on the Event History page, the Event Filtering
page is displayed.
69096
Hide/Show Faults
If the Show Faults key is pressed, all Print Failures that have occurred since the last Clear
Event History option was used are displayed.
Hide/Show Warnings
If the Show Warnings key is pressed, all System Warnings that have occurred since the last
Clear Event History option was used are displayed.
Hide/Show Information
If the Show Information key is pressed, all Information Events that have occurred since the
last Clear Event History option was used are displayed.
There are four Information Events, which are designated as follows:
• 4.00 Jet Test Start
• 4.01 Jet Test Stop
• 4.02 Normal Start
• 4.03 Normal Stop
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 4 — 12 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Clear Event History
When the Clear Event History key is pressed on the Event History page, the Clear Event
History page is displayed.
69097
Event Setup
How each event is reported and logged is configured on the Event Setup page.
69098
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 4 — 13 Sep 2009
Always Log
When this key is pressed, every new occurrence of the selected event is always reported
and logged. The condition for the event is displayed in the second box from the top of the
page.
69099
Log At Intervals
This function applies a default time interval, after an event has occurred, during which
new occurrences of the same event are not reported or logged. When the time interval has
elapsed, the next new occurrence of the same event is then reported and logged.
The default setting for all events is ‘Log At Intervals’.
When the Log At Intervals key is pressed, the selected event is logged at intervals of 20
seconds (the default interval). The condition for the event is displayed in the second box
from the top of the page (see Figure 4-14).
Never Log
When this key is pressed, the selected event is never reported but is logged. This function
contradicts the label for the key and is a known software error.
The condition for the event is displayed in the second box from the top of the page.
69101
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 4 — 14 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Edit Interval
When this key is pressed, the Edit Interval page is displayed.
69100
Reset Count
Every occurrence of an event is automatically logged, regardless of the rate at which it is
reported (see the preceding ‘Log At Intervals’). The number of times the event occurs is
included in the selected event that is displayed in the top box of the Event Setup page.
When the Reset Count key is pressed, the number of times the event has occurred is reset
to 0 (zero).
4.4.2 Maintenance
For full information about the Maintenance options, refer to ‘Maintenance Page’ in Chapter
5: ‘Maintenance’.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 4 — 15 Sep 2009
4.4.3 Setup
When the Setup option is highlighted on the Menu page and the Select key is pressed, the
following page is displayed.
73066
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 4 — 16 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Date & Time
When the Date & Time option is highlighted on the Installation page and the Select key is
pressed, the following page is displayed.
69162
Current Time
This option displays the current time in the form ‘HH:MM:SS’, which can be changed if necessary.
When the Current Time option is highlighted and the Select key is pressed, a page is
displayed that allows the current time to be changed.
The current local time is entered from the keyboard, in the 24-hour format, as follows:
1. Enter two digits for the hours.
2. Enter two digits for the minutes after the first colon.
3. Enter two digits for the seconds after the second colon.
4. Press the OK key.
If a time setting is made but the change is not required, press the Cancel key instead of the
OK key. This action returns the display to the Date & Time page, and the Current Time is
not changed.
Current Date
This option displays the current, Gregorian calendar date in the form ‘YYYY-MM-DD’,
which can be changed if necessary.
When the Current Date option is highlighted and the Select key is pressed, a page is
displayed that allows the current date to be changed.
The current date is entered from the keyboard, in the numeric European format, as follows:
1. Enter four digits for the year.
2. Enter two digits for the month after the first hyphen.
3. Enter two digits for the day after the second hyphen.
4. Press the OK key.
If a date setting is made but the change is not required, press the Cancel key instead of the
OK key. This action returns the display to the Date & Time page, and the Current Date is
not changed.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 4 — 17 Sep 2009
Hijri Date
This option displays the current, Hijri calendar date in the form ‘yyyy-mm-dd’, which is for
display only and cannot be changed. The Hijri date is automatically calculated from the
Gregorian date.
Printhead
When the Printhead option is highlighted on the Installation page and the Select key is
pressed, the following page is displayed.
73068
Printhead Type
The 7300 printer can use any of the following eight printhead types: Ultima, Ultima plus,
Micro, Midi, Midi plus, Mini, Ultima A, and Midi A. The printhead type that is fitted to the
printer is selected from the list on the Printhead Type page. The default printhead type is
Ultima. If a printhead type is not selected, the printer will not start. When a printhead type
is selected, a default printhead code is displayed. See ‘Printhead Code’ later in this section
for more information.
Conduit Length
The Conduit Length page selects which of the two standard lengths of conduit is fitted to
the printhead. The correct length must be selected, which makes sure that the correct
timings for the startup and shutdown sequences are used. There are two printhead conduit
lengths, 2 metres and 4 metres. The default conduit length is 2 metres.
Printhead Height
The ink system pressure must be compensated for when the printhead is installed above or
below the height of the printer. Pressure is altered by 0.0047 bar (0.0012 p.s.i.) for every
millimetre the printhead is above or below the printer. For practical purposes, the
measurement is made vertically from the keyboard space bar to the printhead nozzle. (In
reality, the vertical distance is from the printer pressure transducer to the printhead nozzle.)
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 4 — 18 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
The vertical distance is entered on the Printhead Height page in millimetres (mm). The
maximum distance accepted by the software is +2000 millimetres to –2000 millimetres. If a
greater distance is entered, the displayed value changes from black text to red text and the
OK key is dimmed.
If the printhead is installed below the printer, the distance is entered in the format ‘–X.X’. If
the printhead is installed above the printer, it is not necessary to enter a ‘+’ prefix; the value
is entered simply as ‘X.X’. The default setting is ‘0 mm’.
If the Printhead Height setting is changed, the printhead Reference Pressure is also
automatically changed. The Solvent Add Pressure value is calculated from the Reference
Pressure. Therefore, the Monitor Jet page (Print Monitor Menu > Maintenance > Monitor
Jet) displays different Solvent Add pressures for different Printhead Height settings.
IMPORTANT: Be careful with this option, otherwise bad printer performance can occur if
incorrectly set.
Cover Override
When the Yes option is selected on the Cover Override page, the Cover Override link LK21
on the IPM PCB is enabled. The function of link LK21 is described as follows:
• If the Yes option is selected and link LK21 is fitted, the link overrides the automatic
‘printhead cover off’ function. The printer does not disable the printhead EHT and
charge voltage when the removal of the printhead cover tube has been detected.
• If the No option is selected and link LK21 is fitted, the link is ignored. The printer
automatically disables the printhead EHT and charge voltage when the removal of the
printhead cover tube has been detected.
See also: Chapter 3: Technical Description > Electronics and Software > IPM PCB > Test
Points and Links > LK21 (Cover Override).
Chapter 6: System Events > System Warnings > 3.13 Cover Override Link Fitted.
Printhead Code
All 7300 printhead conduit labels contain important calibration information. This
information must be entered on the Printhead Code page when a new printhead is fitted,
when the software is reloaded, or when the IPM PCB is replaced. These calibration
parameters are used by the printer to get the best performance. An example of a printhead
conduit label and the calibration parameters are shown in the following illustration.
69173
Vmod
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 4 — 19 Sep 2009
When a replacement printhead is fitted, the related code must be entered correctly on the
Printhead Code page. Make sure that every digit is exactly as shown on the printhead
conduit label.
The printhead code can be entered when the jet is in the ‘Idle’ (jet off) state only. When a correct
code has been entered, the code is stored in the printer memory until a new code is entered.
IMPORTANT: Be careful with this option, otherwise bad printer performance can occur if
incorrectly set. When a new printhead type and printhead code are
entered, the printhead type must be entered first. If the printhead code is
changed first, when the printhead type is changed the printhead code
reverts to the default printhead code.
Mod Slope
The Modulation Tracking Slope (measured in V/bit of pressure) is normally set as a default
that depends on the printhead type and ink type being used.
When the printhead type or ink type is changed (and the Printhead Type option in the
Printhead menu, or the Ink/Solvent Type option in the Ink/Solvent menu is changed), the
default Modulation Tracking Slope value for the new printhead and ink type combination
is used.
The Mod Slope option allows the maintenance technician to manually adjust the
Modulation Tracking Slope setting to match a different printhead and ink type
combination. This facility allows support of special printheads and inks.
The setting is variable from 0.0 V/bit to 5.0 V/bit in 0.1 increments. For example, a setting
of 1.0 is equal to an increase in modulation voltage of 1.0 V for every 1 bit of pressure
change. A setting of 5.0 is equal to an increase in modulation voltage of 5.0 V for every 1 bit
of pressure change. The setting is stored in non-volatile memory.
This option is only available with the Level E (Service 2) password and only when the jet is
in the ‘Idle’ (jet off) state.
ID
When the ID option is highlighted on the Installation page and the Select key is pressed,
the following page is displayed.
69166
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 4 — 20 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
UNIC Code
The UNIC Code option displays the 12-character serial number used to identify each
printer. The number is provided by the Unique Number Identification Chip (UNIC) on the
IPM PCB, which has the same number printed on the chip, for example, ‘000002D9899F’.
The system software detects the presence of the UNIC on power-up and displays the serial
number in the UNIC Code option. If a UNIC is not found on power-up, an error page with
the advisory message “Valid UNIC Chip not found” is displayed. (“Invalid UNIC” is also
displayed in the UNIC Code option.) The printer must then be turned off and a valid
UNIC must be fitted before the printer can continue. To turn off the printer, press either the
red [stop] key or the OK key on the error page.
If the IPM PCB is replaced, the UNIC must be removed from the old PCB and fitted to the
replacement one. If this is not done, the replacement PCB will not acknowledge any
configuration code (see below).
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 4 — 21 Sep 2009
Printer Serial Number
The printer serial number is also on the printer identification label found on the rear panel
of the chassis. This label is not always easy to access because of the installation in some
environments. This software feature allows operators and maintenance personnel to easily
find the serial number of the printer.
The serial number is not entered by Linx, but is entered by the maintenance technician who
installs the printer.
NOTE: The serial number is cleared from the memory of the printer if a new version of
system software is installed.
Ink/Solvent
When the Ink/Solvent option is highlighted on the Installation page and the Select key is
pressed, the following page is displayed.
69167
15/11/06 15:03:17
No
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 4 — 22 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Ink/Solvent Type
All the inks available for use in the 7300 printer are displayed in a list on the Ink/Solvent
Type page when the Select key is pressed. The inks are identified by their type numbers
followed by their related solvent type numbers. For example, MEK ink ‘Black Water
Removable ink 1035’ is identified as ‘1035/1535’. Inks that have a different solvent base, for
example Ethanol, are identified generically. For example, ‘Black Ethanol ink 2035’ is
identified as ‘2xxx/25xx’.
Refer to the ‘Ink Conversion Calibration’ maintenance instruction in Chapter 5:
‘Maintenance’ for a complete list of inks approved for use in the 7300 printer.
Next Mix
This option sets the time (in hours, minutes and seconds) that the next ink premix sequence
is required to be performed. For example, the Next Mix option can be set for a premix to be
performed 30 minutes before printing is planned to start each day. This time is then
displayed in the Next Mix option.
To help customers who use their printers less than every 2 weeks, a standby mode is also
available. This mode is automatically entered if the printer is continuously turned on, but it
is not used to print. The printer enters a 5-minute mixing sequence every 24 hours in this
mode, which begins at a time set by the maintenance technician.
Last Mix
The Last Mix option is for display only, and shows the time (in hours, minutes and
seconds) and the date that the last ink mix occurred (that is, jet shutdown). The time and
date is used by the software to calculate the length of the next ink premix (see Mix Time)
before printing.
NOTES:
1. The recommended maximum time that the printer is turned off for is:
• Four weeks if the ambient temperature is not more than 35 degrees Celsius.
• Two weeks if the ambient temperature is not more than 45 degrees Celsius.
2. Where possible, it is also recommended that the printer is turned on and the jet
started for 30 minutes every 2 weeks during a shutdown period.
Mix Time
The Mix Time option is for display only and shows the length (in minutes and seconds) of
the next ink premix before printing. The Last Mix time and date is used by the software to
calculate the length of the premix. This time changes between 5 and 17 minutes according
to the length of time from the last jet shutdown.
Disable Mix
A 1-minute delay is included at the start of the mix sequence to allow time for the
maintenance technician to disable the sequence at power-up.
If an ink mix is not required, when the printer is turned on the maintenance technician has
1 minute to disable the ink mix sequence. To disable the sequence, the Disable Mix option
is set to Yes on the Ink/Solvent page.
The state of the Disable Mix function is not remembered when the printer is turned off.
The mix sequence is always enabled at power-up.
When the Disable Mix option is set to No, the software considers the time that the mix
sequence was disabled to calculate when the next ink mix occurs.
When the Disable Mix option is set to Yes, the occurrence is logged in the Event Log as
System Warning “3.27 Mix Disabled”.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 4 — 23 Sep 2009
Locale
When the Locale option is highlighted on the Installation page and the Select key is
pressed, the following page is displayed.
69499
Language
The language that pages and system messages are displayed in is selected on the
Language page (English is always present and is the default language).
NOTE: When the language is changed, the new language is used immediately the
Language page is exited.
Units
There are three available units-of-measurement systems: Metric, Engineering, and
Imperial. The required units of measurement are selected from the list on the Units page.
The units of the three systems are:
• Metric units—bar, m/s and mm
• Engineering units—bits, m/s and mm
• Imperial units—p.s.i., ft/minute and inches
The default units-of-measurement system is Metric.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 4 — 24 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Calendar
The type of calendar is selected from the list on the Calendar page—Gregorian, Gregorian
(USA) or Hijri. How the date field formats are calculated depends on which type of
calendar is selected. When the type of calendar is changed, this only affects any new date
format calendars that are created. Existing date format calendars that have been created are
not affected.
If this option is set to the Gregorian calendar, the date fields are calculated on the current
printer date. If the Gregorian (USA) calendar is selected, the date fields are calculated on
the Gregorian (USA) calendar. The default calendar is Gregorian. The difference between
these two calendars is shown in the following table.
68019
Gregorian Gregorian (USA)
Non-leap Year 01 Jan = Day 001 01 Jan = Day 001
28 Feb = Day 059 28 Feb = Day 059
01 Mar = Day 060 01 Mar = Day 060
31 Dec = Day 365 31 Dec = Day 365
Leap Year 01 Jan = Day 001 01 Jan = Day 001
28 Feb = Day 059 28 Feb = Day 059
29 Feb = Day 366 29 Feb = Day 60
01 Mar = Day 060 01 Mar = Day 061
31 Dec = Day 365 31 Dec = Day 366
Keyboard
The correct keyboard for the language that messages are created in is selected on the
Keyboard page.
The printer can create and print messages in one language while the display uses a
different language for the pages and system messages. For example, to create messages in
Russian, but read the display in English, set the Keyboard option to Russian, and set the
Language option to English.
On power-down, the keyboard selection is remembered by the software.
Refer to the Linx 7300 How To ... documents for more information.
Secondary Keyboard
This option allows the operator to select a secondary keyboard layout that is different from
the primary keyboard. For example, to use the European keyboard to generate Japanese
characters, set the Keyboard option to European, and set the Secondary Keyboard option
to Japanese.
If a different secondary keyboard is selected, the [alt] + [k] keyboard shortcut can be used
to change between the selected primary and secondary keyboards.
On power-down, the secondary keyboard selection is remembered by the software.
Refer to the Linx 7300 How To ... documents for more information.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 4 — 25 Sep 2009
Photocells
When the Photocells option is highlighted on the Installation page and the Select key is
pressed, the following page is displayed.
69647
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 4 — 26 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
4.4.4 Change User Level
When the Change User Level option is highlighted on the Menu page and the Select key is
pressed, the following page is displayed.
69169
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 4 — 27 Sep 2009
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 4 — 28 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Passwords
Write the related service password against the printed service access level below. Remove
this page and keep it in a safe location.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual Sep 2009
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
CHAPTER 5: MAINTENANCE
5.1 Introduction
This chapter is divided into two parts. The first part describes the functions that are
available on the Maintenance menu. The second part contains Maintenance Instruction
procedures, which describe how to test and repair the 7300 printer, and how to install
additional features.
The information shown in this chapter refers to printers with Version 4.1 software installed,
unless otherwise stated.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5—1 Sep 2009
When the option setting has been changed, press the OK soft key to save the change. The
new setting is displayed against the option on the previous page. If a setting is made but the
change is not required, press the Cancel soft key instead of the OK soft key. This action
returns the display to the previous page and to the setting in use before the page was opened.
To return to the Print Monitor page, continue to press the Exit soft key until the page is
reached.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5—2 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
5.2.4 Option Availability
The jet has three states: 'Idle', 'Jet Running', and 'Printing' (printing or ready to receive a
‘print go’ signal). Some options on the Maintenance pages are influenced by these states,
which can change the availability of some options and also the ability to select an option or
change its parameters.
Menu pages and their options are only displayed if they are valid for the password used
and the current jet state. For example, the System Flush option (Print Monitor > Menu >
Maintenance) is only displayed when the Level E password is used. The System Flush
option can be selected only at Level E, and only when the jet is in the ‘Idle’ (jet off) state.
When the jet is in the ‘Jet Running’ or ‘Printing’ states, the System Flush option is
displayed but is dimmed and cannot be selected.
The following table shows when each page and the options the page contains are available,
related to the jet state and the level of password used. The symbols used in the table to
show when the pages and options are available are as follows:
• Pages and options that are displayed and can be selected or changed are identified with
a solid circle.
• Pages and options that are displayed, but cannot be selected or changed are identified
with an empty circle.
• Pages and options that are not available because of the jet state or password level, and
therefore are not displayed, are identified with a grey box.
73070A
LEVEL D LEVEL E
st nd rd
1 level page 2 level page 3 level page Idle Jet Print- Idle Jet Print-
Runn- ing Runn- ing
ing ing
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5—3 Sep 2009
69164B
LEVEL D LEVEL E
st nd rd
1 level page 2 level page 3 level page Idle Jet Print- Idle Jet Print-
Runn- ing Runn- ing
ing ing
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5—4 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
5.3 Maintenance Page
All of the options on the Maintenance page are described in this chapter. This is because
all of the options or submenu options require a Service level password for access.
69170
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5—5 Sep 2009
Jet Test – Start
The Jet Test – Start option starts the jet but with a shorter method than a Normal Start
sequence to help with fault diagnosis. The total jet start time is 25 seconds compared to a
Normal Start of 32.5 seconds. The differences between a Normal Start sequence and a Jet
Test – Start sequence are described below.
The sequence for a Normal Start is as follows:
1. Check the pressure.
2. Start the jet.
3. Make sure that the jet is in the gutter.
4. Set the pressure to the Reference Pressure.
5. Apply a ‘block’ charge to all the drops (“TOF Only” message is displayed).
6. Measure the Time Of Flight.
7. Adjust the pressure if the Time Of Flight is out of range.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the Time Of Flight is in range.
9. Find the phase position (“Phase/TOF” message is displayed).
10. Jet state is ‘Jet Running’.
When the Jet Test – Start function is used, the sequence is arranged as follows:
1. Check the pressure.
2. Start the jet.
3. Set the pressure to the Reference Pressure.
4. Jet state is ‘Jet Running’.
5. Try to get good jet-phase.
6. Measure the Time Of Flight.
7. Adjust the pressure if the Time Of Flight is out of range.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the Time Of Flight is in range.
It can be seen from the above Jet Test – Start sequence that the printer enters the ‘Jet
Running’ state before the phase and TOF checks are started. The Normal Start checks and
adjustments of phase and TOF are ignored, and the printer uses the printhead reference
pressure and reference modulation values to start the jet. The printer enters the ‘Jet
Running’ state, then adjusts the pressure to get the correct TOF.
When Jet Test – Start is used, Print Failure reports are disabled, except for the following:
• 2.00 Printhead Over Temperature
• 2.01 EHT Trip
• 2.04 300V Power Supply
• 2.07 Internal Spillage
After 45 minutes, the printer returns to the Normal Start mode and all Print Failures are
reported again as they occur.
If the Monitor Jet page is looked at to check the jet control values when the jet is first
started, the readings may not equal their reference values until TOF is established.
The system can only use TOF correction if all the feedback signals are present. If the
feedback signals are not present, the printer operates at the printhead reference values.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5—6 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
When Jet Test – Start is used and the fault is repaired, stop the jet and turn off the printer.
Then turn on and start the printer normally with the [start] key. These actions are necessary
because the fault can continue to be present when the jet is started with the Normal Start
sequence.
CAUTION: Pump Damage. The Jet Test – Start option starts the jet even if the ink level is low.
Do not allow the ink system pump to run in a dry condition. The pump must not be run for
longer than 30 seconds after the change in the sound of the pump indicates that cavitation
(no ink in the pump) has occurred. Damage to the pump can occur if the pump is allowed to
run continuously in a dry condition.
While the jet is starting, the following message is displayed in the top line of the Printer
Status area of the Print Monitor page:
“JET STARTING”
NOTE: If [ctrl] + [start] are pressed when the jet is in the ‘Idle’ state, a Normal jet start is
performed but print is not started. This shortcut is an additional help during
fault diagnosis.
See also: Chapter 3: Technical Description > Ink System > Startup and Shutdown
Sequences, for a summary of the valve sequences for this option.
Start Print
The Start Print option changes the jet state from ‘Jet Running’ to ‘Printing’ only, that is, the
option does not start the jet. The change of jet state only occurs if a message is currently
selected and displayed in the Current Message area of the Print Monitor page. Refer to the
7300 Quick Start Guide for descriptions of how to select and edit messages.
An advisory message is displayed if the Start Print key is pressed and no print message is
selected.
If the jet was started with the Jet Test – Start key, when the Start Print option is used the
disabled Print Failures are reported again as they occur.
Stop Print
The Stop Print option changes the jet state from ‘Printing’ to ‘Jet Running’ only, that is, the
option disables printing, but maintains the jet. The change of jet state allows some other
diagnostic options to be displayed and selected, which are not available in the ‘Printing’
state.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5—7 Sep 2009
Test Print
The Test Print option is only available in the ‘Printing’ state.
The Test Print option generates a simulation of a single ‘print trigger’ to print a single
message manually, instead of from an automatically generated signal from a trigger device.
The current message displayed in the Current Message area of the Print Monitor page is
printed. The Trigger to Printhead Distance setting (Print Monitor > Line Setup > Trigger)
and the Print Delay setting (Print Monitor > Print Settings) apply like a normal trigger
device. The Test Print function also updates sequential numbers and print counters.
If the Speed Selection option is set to Shaft Encoder (Print Monitor > Line Setup > Speed),
printing will only start when shaft encoder pulses are received, as is normally the condition
when a production line is in operation. The shaft encoder is disabled when Fixed Speed or
Dual Trigger are selected on the Speed Selection page. The printer then prints at a speed
calculated by the Trigger to Printhead Distance and Print Delay settings.
The printer operates normally for all the other functions. For example, checks for the
printhead cover not fitted, and overspeed are made, and any associated event messages are
displayed.
90 67
1262 1261
15
0
24
Pressure
The Pressure area of the Monitor Jet page displays four pressure values: Solvent Add
Pressure, Set Pressure, Reference Pressure, and Actual Pressure.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5—8 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
SOLV (Solvent Add Pressure)
The value displayed in the SOLV box is the Solvent Add Pressure, which is a pressure
value that the printer uses as a trigger to add solvent. This Solvent Add Pressure value,
which is different for every single printhead, is calculated from the printhead Reference
Pressure value (default pressure in normal operation) with an offset added.
See also: Chapter 3: Technical Description > Printhead Theory of Operation > Viscosity
Control.
Chapter 3: Technical Description > Ink System > Ink and Solvent Flows > Solvent
Addition.
Edit Pressure
When the Edit Pressure key is pressed, the Set Pressure can be changed to a different
value. The Edit Pressure page allows values in the range of 0 to 4.48 bar (0 to 65.00 p.s.i. or
0 to 255 bits) to be set.
NOTE: 1.0 bar = 14.49 p.s.i. ≈ 56 bits.
4.49 bar = 65.00 p.s.i. = 255 bits.
See also: Chapter 3: Technical Description > Ink System > Startup and Shutdown
Sequences > Pressure Conversion Table.
69175
90 67
1262 1261
15
0
24
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5—9 Sep 2009
Diagnostic uses for setting a Set Pressure value are as follows:
• To find faults caused by pressure loss.
• To clean the printhead.
• To purge the main ink filter.
• When the Jet Test – Start function is used, the pressure can be increased and decreased
to try to get TOF measurements, to see if the ink is of high or low viscosity.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 10 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Pressure in p.s.i./bar/bits
The units of measurement for the system parameters are normally selected on the Units
page (Print Monitor > Menu > Setup > Installation > Locale > Units). However, on the
Monitor Jet page there is a Pressure in… key that allows the local pressure values to be
displayed in p.s.i., bar, or bits. The label on the key changes and depends on which units
are currently used to display the pressure values. For example, when the Monitor Jet page
is first opened, the pressure values are displayed in bits and the key label is Pressure in
p.s.i. When the Pressure in p.s.i. key is pressed, the pressure values are displayed in p.s.i.
and the key label changes to Pressure in bar.
Modulation
The Modulation area of the Monitor Jet page displays the Reference Modulation, and the
Actual Modulation.
Edit Modulation
When the Edit Modulation key is pressed, the Actual Modulation can be changed to a
different value. The Edit Modulation page allows values in the range of 0 to 255 volts to be
set.
69176
90 67
1262 1261
15
0
24
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 11 Sep 2009
Automatic Tracking (Modulation)
The current Reference Modulation values are set as defaults of modulation and viscosity
slopes. During normal operation (Jet Running), the Actual Modulation is used by the
printer to control the drop break-off point of the jet. As the Set Pressure moves away from
the Reference Pressure, the modulation voltage is adjusted to follow the Set Pressure by an
offset value (in V/bit). This offset depends on the type of ink and the printhead.
For diagnostic purposes, it may be required to change the Actual Modulation voltage while
the jet is in operation. If the Actual Modulation was manually changed, the system would
automatically correct the modulation again to maintain the correct point of drop break-off.
When the Edit Modulation key is pressed on the Monitor Jet page, the automatic
modulation control (Automatic Tracking) is disabled. This action allows the Actual
Modulation to be freely adjusted as required.
If the jet is stopped then restarted while the automatic modulation control (Automatic
Tracking) is disabled, the modulation is set to the Reference Modulation.
By default, automatic modulation control is enabled during power-up, and disabled during
power-down.
When the Actual Modulation voltage is manually changed on the Edit Modulation page
and the Exit key or [enter] key is pressed, the system uses the new modulation voltage. The
printer returns to the Monitor Jet page and the new modulation voltage is displayed in the
ACT box. If the Up and Down arrow keys are used to change the value, the new
modulation voltage is applied immediately.
When the Automatic Tracking key is pressed on the Edit Modulation page (after the
Actual Modulation has been manually changed), the printer returns to the Monitor Jet
page and automatic modulation control is enabled again. The value then displayed in the
ACT box is the modulation voltage that the system uses to automatically maintain the
correct point of drop break-off.
TOF
The TOF (Time Of Flight) area of the Monitor Jet page displays the Reference TOF and the
Actual TOF. The TOF values are displayed in microseconds (µs).
Reference TOF
The value displayed in the REF box is the Reference TOF, which is the jet velocity
reference. The software uses this value with the Actual TOF value to maintain the correct
TOF. The value is for display only and cannot be changed.
Actual TOF
The value displayed in the ACT box is the Actual TOF. This value is the measured TOF
displayed as an average reading. The displayed value is related to the jet speed—the
higher the reading, the slower the jet; the lower the reading, the faster the jet.
The time taken for a special ‘packet’ of low-charged drops to pass between two datum
points (the phase and TOF sensors) is measured to get TOF values. These sensors are in the
printhead Deflector and Phase Plate (DPP). The software makes a number TOF
measurements, all of which must be within ±40% of the Reference TOF. An average of
these TOF measurements is the displayed TOF value. Three average readings, one after the
other, must be more or less than ±0.3% (or ±0.2%—see below) of the Reference TOF before
the readings can be used to control the system pressure.
The software uses the average value to increase or decrease the pressure, as necessary, to
maintain the TOF at the Reference TOF. There is a small tolerance of ±0.3% for all Mk7
printheads except the Ultima, where the tolerance is ±0.2%.
The Print Failure message “2.03 Time Of Flight Failure” is displayed if there are no valid
TOF readings for a period of 40 minutes.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 12 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
TOF Mode
The TOF Mode key selects how TOF and Phasing are performed. During normal operation
the printer changes between these two functions automatically, but with this option the
operation of these functions can be changed.
69174
90 67
1262 1261
15
0
24
TOF/Phase
When the TOF/Phase key is pressed on the TOF Mode page, TOF and Phasing
measurements are both performed at the same time. TOF/Phase is the normal mode when
the jet is in operation.
TOF Only
When the TOF Only key is pressed on the TOF Mode page, Phase measurements are not
performed. When this mode is selected, a TOF can be found for an ink jet that has bad
break-up.
The TOF Only mode is automatically used for a short period during jet startup while the
pressure is being adjusted to get the correct TOF.
Manual Phase
For diagnostic purposes, it may be required to change the phase position (drop break-off
point) while the jet is in operation (refer to ‘Phase’ later in this section).
When the Manual Phase key is pressed on the TOF Mode page, the Phase value can be
changed. The Manual Phase function allows phase positions in the range of 0 to 15 to be
set. The main use for this function is for calibration. The Manual Phase option can also be
used to find the size of the phase window so that the best phase position can be manually
set. When the Phase value is manually changed on the TOF Mode page and the Exit key or
[enter] key is pressed, the system uses the new phase position. The printer returns to the
Monitor Jet page and the new phase position is displayed in the Phase box. If the Up and
Down arrow keys are used to change the value, the new phase position is applied
immediately.
When the TOF/Phase key is pressed on the TOF Mode page and the Exit key or [enter] key
is pressed, the printer returns to the Monitor Jet page and automatic phase measurements
are performed again. The value then displayed in the Phase box is the phase position that
controls the drop break-off point of the jet.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 13 Sep 2009
Off
When the Off key is pressed on the TOF Mode page, neither TOF measurements nor
Phasing are performed. The Off setting is the normal mode when the jet is not in operation
(‘Idle’ state).
When this function is set to Off, the pressure can be manually changed, which changes the
jet speed and therefore the TOF. The TOF Mode can then be reset to TOF/Phase so that the
pressure can be monitored as control of the jet is restored. This test can confirm the correct
operation of the jet control system.
Phase
The value displayed in the Phase box reflects the drop break-off point of the jet (phase
position). The phase position makes sure that the drop break-off and the drop charge occur
at the same time. The printer checks the phase position at regular intervals during jet
startup, jet running, or printing. The period between checks changes, and depends on the
jet state.
The displayed Phase value depends on the setting of the TOF Mode option (refer to ‘TOF
Mode’ earlier in this section). When the TOF Mode is set to TOF/Phase, the value is the
phase position when the jet is in normal operation. This value is for display only and
cannot be changed.
When the TOF Mode is set to TOF Only, there are no phase position checks made and
there is no phase position displayed.
When the TOF Mode is set to Manual Phase, the phase position can be changed (refer to
‘Manual Phase’ earlier in this section).
Temp
The value displayed in the Temp box is the printhead temperature. If the temperature
inside the printhead reaches more than 60 °C, the Print Failure message “2.00 Printhead
Over Temperature” is displayed.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 14 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
5.3.3 Maintenance Times
The Maintenance Times page displays the operating times of the printer in three
categories.
69177
812:25
4:15
762:50
4:05
1237:10
2007-01-22
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 15 Sep 2009
Jet Run Time (Total)
The Jet Run Time (Total) displays the total time (from manufacturing), in hours and
minutes, that the jet has been in the ‘Jet Running’ or ‘Printing’ states. This value is for
display only and cannot be changed. The time is updated while the jet is in operation.
Maintenance Due By
The Maintenance Due By option displays the date that the next scheduled maintenance of
the printer is required.
When the Maintenance Due By date is reached, the System Warning message “3.11 Printer
Requires Scheduled Maintenance” is displayed. This warning message continues to be
displayed when the printer is next turned on, until the scheduled maintenance is done and
the maintenance intervals are reset by the maintenance technician.
When the Maintenance Due By key is pressed, the scheduled maintenance interval can be
manually set to a different date from the basic scheduled maintenance interval for the ink
type (see Maintenance Finished below). The maximum scheduled maintenance interval
that can be set in the software is 420 days from the current date. However, the maximum
scheduled maintenance interval must not be more than one year, because of the
requirement to replace the damper annually.
Maintenance Finished
The basic maximum interval for the scheduled maintenance is automatically set when the
Maintenance Finished key is pressed, and is ink-type-dependent, as shown in the
following table.
68038
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 16 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Normally, the maximum scheduled maintenance interval is 2000 hours, but some inks are
set to a maximum interval of 4000 hours or 6000 hours. The maximum scheduled
maintenance interval depends on the environmental conditions, and other factors (for
example, the risk of ink contamination and poor-quality customer maintenance). Refer to
the 7300 How To Select the Scheduled Maintenance Interval Maintenance Level document for
more information about these inks.
When the printer is commissioned, the maintenance technician sets the scheduled
maintenance interval according to the table above or the 7300 How To Select the Scheduled
Maintenance Interval Maintenance Level document. Each time the scheduled maintenance is
performed and the Maintenance Finished key is pressed, the Maintenance Due Within
interval returns to that set when the printer was commissioned.
See also: Maintenance Instructions > Scheduled Maintenance, later in this section.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 17 Sep 2009
Calibration Mode
The Calibration Mode option has three modes of operation: Off, Zero, and Calibration.
These modes are used during the Charge Amplifier Calibration.
Off
The Off setting resets the charge DAC to normal mode for printing. This setting is the
default mode.
Zero
The Zero setting allows VR3 (Zero Offset) on the IPM PCB to be adjusted to a zero datum
point before the Charge Amplifier Calibration is started.
Calibration
The Calibration setting puts the charge DAC control system in the calibration mode, so
that the charge voltage can be calibrated.
Calibration Value
NOTE: The Calibration Value option is only available when the Calibration Mode is set
to Calibration.
Values are entered on the Calibration Value page during the calibration procedure to find
the XCAL125 and XCAL255 voltage levels.
During the calibration procedure, the Apply key on the Calibration Value page is used
after each value change to update the DVM reading.
When a new value is entered on the Calibration Value page and the OK key is pressed,
the new calibration value is used by the system. The printer returns to the Charge
Calibration page and the new value is displayed in the Calibration Value option.
XCAL125/XCAL255
The final calibration values found from the Charge Amplifier Calibration procedure are
entered in these two options.
CALCHG1
The value displayed in the CALCHG1 option must be the final three digits of the printhead
code (refer to Chapter 4: System Options > Menu page > Setup > Printhead > Printhead
Code). Make sure that the digits are the same. If the digits are not the same, enter the
correct value on the CALCHG1 page.
EHTPSU1
The EHT Program Input voltage is used during manufacturing to calibrate each EHTPSU to
give an output of 8 kV ±1.7%. The calibration voltage is printed on a label attached to the
EHTPSU, and this value must be entered on the EHTPSU1 page.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 18 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
5.3.5 Jet Sequences
The Jet Sequences page provides a range of operating sequences and allows these
sequences to be selected and started individually.
69179
Start Sequence
When an operating sequence is highlighted in the Jet Sequences list and the Start Sequence
key is pressed, the selected sequence is started. A progress bar is provided at the bottom of
the Jet Sequences page that shows how much of the sequence has been completed.
NOTE: The printer must be in the ‘Idle’ state (jet off) before any of the sequences can be
started.
Stop Sequence
When a sequence is in operation, the Stop Sequence key can be pressed to stop the
sequence. The Stop Sequence option is dimmed until a sequence is started.
Jet State
The Jet State box below the Jet Sequences list displays the current jet state of the printer.
The following are all of the possible state messages:
“IDLE”
“JET STARTING”
“JET RUNNING”
“JET STOPPING”
“PRINTING”
“JET SEQUENCE”
“JET CALIBRATING”
“JET FAULT”
“MIX”
While a sequence is being performed, the displayed Jet State is “Jet Sequence”.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 19 Sep 2009
Jet Sequences
The following paragraphs describe the operating sequences that are available in the Jet
Sequences list.
Nozzle Flush
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 20 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Nozzle Clear
Filter Purge
The Filter Purge sequence is used during the printer commissioning procedure to circulate
ink through the primary ink circuit to purge the main ink filter of air. Refer to the ‘Main Ink
Filter Purging’ maintenance instruction later in this chapter for information about how to
perform this procedure.
See also: Chapter 3: Technical Description > Ink System > Other Operating Sequences, for
a summary of the valve sequences for the Filter Purge sequence.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 21 Sep 2009
Feed Dry Cycle
The Feed Dry Cycle sequence is used at Linx during printer manufacturing and final test
only and, therefore, the sequence does not have a maintenance application.
See also: Chapter 3: Technical Description > Ink System > Other Operating Sequences, for
a summary of the valve sequences for the Feed Dry Cycle sequence.
Empty Tank
The Empty Tank sequence is used during the ‘Draining the Ink System’ and the ‘System
Flush’ procedures, which are provided in the ‘Maintenance Instructions’ section later in
this chapter.
See also: Chapter 3: Technical Description > Ink System > Other Operating Sequences, for
a summary of the valve sequences for the Empty Tank sequence.
Flush Cycle
The Flush Cycle sequence is used during the ‘System Flush’ procedure, which is provided
in the ‘Maintenance Instructions’ section later in this chapter.
See also: Chapter 3: Technical Description > Ink System > Other Operating Sequences, for
a summary of the valve sequences for the Flush Cycle sequence.
Solvent Drain
The Solvent Drain sequence is used during the ‘System Flush’ procedure, which is
provided in the ‘Maintenance Instructions’ section later in this chapter.
See also: Chapter 3: Technical Description > Ink System > Other Operating Sequences, for
a summary of the valve sequences for the Solvent Drain sequence.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 22 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
5.3.6 Valves
The Valves page allows each of the ink system valves to be opened and closed manually to
help fault diagnosis. The state of each valve can also be monitored (to the right of the valve
name ) as it opens and closes during any of the operating sequences.
69180
Open/Close
When a valve is highlighted in the Valves list and the Open/Close key is pressed, the
selected valve is energized (opened). The valve remains energized until the Open/Close
key is pressed again or the Valve Reset key is pressed (see ‘Valve Reset’ later in this
section). If a valve is opened and the Exit key is pressed, the valve remains open. The
Valves page must be accessed again to close the valve.
There can be seven valves displayed in the Valves list:
• Printhead Feed
• Feed
• Purge
• Gutter
• Solvent Add
• Solvent Flush
• Mix (Spectrum printer only)
The valves can be manually operated only when the jet is in the ‘Idle’ state (jet off). When
the printer is in the ‘Jet Running’ or ‘Printing’ states, the Open/Close and Valve Reset keys
are dimmed. The Valves page then shows only the current states of the valves and they
cannot be manually operated.
The 7300 Spectrum printer has an additional Mix valve, which is used during the Mixing
sequence for white pigmented ink. This additional valve is not displayed in the Valves list
if the printer is a standard ink printer.
To help with fault diagnosis, the Set Pressure function (Monitor Jet page) can be used with
the options on the Valves page.
Valve Reset
If more than one valve has been manually opened, all the valves can be closed at the same
time when the Valve Reset key is pressed.
See also: Monitor Jet > SET (Set Pressure).
Chapter 3: Technical Description > Ink System > Startup and Shutdown
Sequences, and Other Operating Sequences.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 23 Sep 2009
5.3.7 Test Message
A test message can be created from this page for any of the message types (rasters)
installed in the printer.
69181
Create
When a message type has been highlighted in the Test Message list and the Create key is
pressed, the Save As page is displayed.
69182
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 24 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Save
A default name for the test message is provided on the Save As page. If the message is the
first to be created for a message type, the message name is “Msg1” (by default) followed by
the message type name—for example, in the form “Msg1_18_Linear_Quality”. If there are
one or more test messages of the same message type stored in the memory, the next
message to be created is given the prefix of the next number in sequence. For example, if
there are three test messages of the same message type, the next message to be created is
given the prefix of the next number—that is, “Msg4_18_Linear_Quality”.
The default message name can be changed. For example, if a special name is required to fit
the purpose of the test message.
When the name of the test message is confirmed and the Save key is pressed, the test
message is created and stored in the memory.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 25 Sep 2009
After the first four preparation pages, there is an options page that allows different
operations to be performed.
69184
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 26 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
NOTES:
1. A note must be made of the Print and Consumables History counts before the
system software is changed, the battery link LK4 is removed, or the IPM PCB is
replaced. If the system software is changed or link LK4 is removed, the printer
memory is initialized and the counters are reset to zero.
2. Linx recommends that the Linx Sync software or the USB facility is used to save
the data before the system software is changed or the battery link LK4 is
removed. When the maintenance is completed, the Linx Sync software or the
USB facility is then used to restore the data.
The information can be used for the following purposes:
• To allow more flexible commercial arrangements between the supplier and the
customer.
• To provide customers with a greater knowledge of ink and solvent use from day to
day.
• To provide maintenance technicians with information about the past performance of
the printer.
The information in the Print and Consumables History page is only a general indication.
Many variables control the rate at which ink and solvent are used. For this reason,
calculations for the next time that the ink or solvent are refilled are approximate. Refer to
the information displayed on the Print and Consumables Data page (Print Monitor >
Menu > System Information > Print and Consumables Data).
Messages
This item shows the total number of messages that have been printed from the time that the
printer was installed.
Drops
This item shows the total number of drops that have been printed from the time that the
printer was installed.
Ink Bottles
This item shows the total number of ink bottles that have been used in the printer from the
time that the printer was installed.
Solvent Bottles
This item shows the total number of solvent bottles that have been used in the printer from
the time that the printer was installed.
Recent Messages
This item shows the number of messages that have been printed from the time that the
counter was last reset to zero.
Recent Drops
This item shows the number of drops that have been printed from the time that the counter
was last reset to zero.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 27 Sep 2009
Recent Solvent Bottles
This item shows the number of solvent bottles that have been used in the printer from the
time that the counter was last reset to zero.
Reset Recent
When the Reset Recent option is highlighted and the Select key is pressed, all four of the
Recent ... counters are reset to zero. That is, the Recent Messages, Recent Drops, Recent
Ink Bottles, and Recent Solvent Bottles items.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 28 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
5.4 Maintenance Instructions
5.4.1 Introduction
The following Maintenance Instructions are provided for use by maintenance technicians
who are trained and authorized by Linx. These instructions describe how to perform a
range of maintenance tasks on the Linx 7300 Ink Jet Printer. The primary instruction is the
‘Scheduled Maintenance’ procedure, which describes the maintenance that is required at
the recommended intervals for the ink type used in the printer. The purpose of scheduled
maintenance is to prevent possible future causes of failure.
The remaining instructions describe different tasks to maintain the printer. For example,
how to drain and flush the ink system, replace parts in the ink system, test the valves, align
the jet, calibrate the IPM PCB. Some of these instructions are also referred to in the
‘Scheduled Maintenance’ instruction, and are performed during that maintenance task.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 29 Sep 2009
Fit Correctly attach one item to another item.
Refit Fit an item that was previously removed.
Replace Remove an item and fit a serviced or new item.
Connect Join or attach electrical cables, pipelines or controls.
Disconnect Separate or remove electrical cables, pipelines or controls.
Reconnect Join or attach electrical cables, pipelines or controls that were previously
disconnected.
The PCBs in Linx printers use some electrostatic-sensitive components that can be severely
damaged if these components are submitted to static discharge. Static electricity, which is
generated on a person through friction and movement, is discharged through the first route
to earth that is contacted. Damage caused by a static discharge is not always immediately
detected after the static discharge has occurred, and can cause component failure in the
future. It is very important that maintenance technicians use the following antistatic
precautions when PCBs are touched:
• Wear an antistatic wrist strap that is approved by industry and includes a resistive
component (greater than 2 MΩ) in the lead. The antistatic wrist strap must be
connected to a good electrical earth. The continuity of the antistatic wrist strap and the
electrical earth must be checked at regular intervals.
• Always hold a PCB by its edges and do not touch the components or printed circuit
tracks. After a PCB is removed from a printer or its packaging, the PCB must be put on
a static-dissipative mat.
• Always use antistatic packaging when PCBs and software components are shipped or
moved between locations. All Linx PCBs are shipped in special antistatic boxes and
these boxes must be used again for any further transportation.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 30 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
5.4.5 7300 CE Approval Checklist
CE approval for the Linx 7300 Ink Jet Printer depends on the conditions given below. If the
printer is not left in the correct condition, the CE approval for the printer may be
invalidated. All maintenance technicians must make sure that the printer meets the
following conditions after any maintenance task is completed, so that the CE approval and
general safety are maintained.
Electronics
• All IPM PCB and Display PCB securing screws must be fitted and correctly tightened.
• The fan must be connected to the LVPSU and must be operating.
• Links LK5, LK19, LK20, LK21,LK26 and LK27 must NOT be left fitted on the IPM PCB.
Ink System
• The ink spillage detector must be fitted and connected.
• Gland fittings from the printhead to the ink system enclosure, and from the ink system
enclosure to the electronics compartment, must be undamaged, correctly fitted and
tight.
• The ink and solvent filler cap/bottle O-ring and the filler tube O-ring must be present,
undamaged and correctly fitted.
• The valves and valve gaskets must be correctly fitted, and the valve caps must be
tightly connected.
• The pressure transducer connector and protective boot must be correctly fitted.
Printhead
• The bonding wire between the printhead and the chassis must be tightly connected.
• The printhead cover tube must be correctly fitted and the thumb screw tightened.
Cabinet
• EMC gaskets on the top cover must not be damaged and be correctly fitted.
• The keyboard must be correctly and tightly fitted.
• There must not be any obstruction to the ventilation of the printer—for example, no
obstruction of the air filter.
• The external alarm connector (PL5 on the rear panel) earth stud and nut must be
connected.
• The protective earth (PE) connector of the mains power cable must be tightly connected
to the earth terminal in the cabinet. All of the other earth connections within the cabinet
must be tightly connected.
• The earth bonding wire between the top cover and the chassis must be tightly
connected.
• The top cover must be correctly engaged with the hinge bracket on the rear chassis,
and the cover latch must be correctly fastened.
• The ink and solvent caps must be correctly fitted.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 31 Sep 2009
5.4.6 Scheduled Maintenance Checklist
The Scheduled Maintenance Checklist is a summary of the ‘Scheduled Maintenance’
instruction and provides useful information about the history of the printer. An example of
the form is given at the end of the ‘Scheduled Maintenance’ instruction and the form is for
use by Distributor maintenance technicians. The form must be completed by the
maintenance technician on completion of a scheduled maintenance on a printer, then filed
with the history documents of the printer.
NOTE: Linx maintenance technicians must use the authorized Service Report form on
completion of a scheduled maintenance of a printer.
If Distributors use this form, Linx recommends that the form is created as a two-page,
carbon-copy document. The top copy is the Customer Copy and the bottom copy is the
Service Copy (printer history).
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 32 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Scheduled Maintenance
Parts Required
Equipment Required
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 33 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Scheduled Maintenance
Recording
Raise and complete a Scheduled Maintenance Checklist (not applicable to Linx maintenance
technicians). An example of the document is provided at the end of this Scheduled
Maintenance instruction.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 34 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Scheduled Maintenance
Procedures
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 35 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Scheduled Maintenance
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 36 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Scheduled Maintenance
73050
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 37 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Scheduled Maintenance
73049
CAUTION: Static-Sensitive Devices. The PCBs contain static-sensitive devices. Take the
following antistatic precautions when PCBs are touched. Wear an antistatic wrist strap and
connect the lead to a good electrical earth. Always hold PCBs by their edges and do not touch
the components, printed circuit tracks or connector pins.
27 Examine the PCBs for physical damage, signs of arcing between high and low
voltage tracks, and ink contamination. Rectify any faults. Clean off any dust or
debris from the PCBs using a soft brush.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 38 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Scheduled Maintenance
32 While observing the printhead, shut down and then restart the jet using the [stop]
and [start] keys. Repeat the shutdown and startup operation four times,
monitoring the time taken to start up, and recording all the parameters and times
taken. Both the shutdown and startup should be clean. If any startup takes longer
than nominally 2 minutes, check for any associated fault or warning messages and
investigate the cause of the problem.
33 Take print samples using the standard test message and record the calculated Ref
Modulation on the Scheduled Maintenance Checklist. Refer to the ‘Modulation Range
Checks’ maintenance instruction.
34 Remove the printhead cover tube and reconfirm correct jet alignment. Refer to the
‘Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning’ maintenance instruction.
35 Refit the printhead cover tube, making sure that the securing screw is fully
tightened.
36 On the Maintenance Times page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance), reset the
Maintenance Due Within and Maintenance Due By values to the recommended
maintenance intervals for the ink type used in the printer and the environmental
conditions. To do this, select the Maintenance Finished option. Refer to
Maintenance Page > Maintenance Times earlier in this chapter.
37 Run the printer for 30 minutes, taking print samples every 10 minutes using the
standard test message. Record the calculated Reference Modulation on the
Scheduled Maintenance Checklist.. Refer to the ‘Modulation Range Checks’
maintenance instruction.
38 Run the printer on the production line. Advise the operator or production manager
of any specific points relating to the operation of the printer, its location, or the
mounting of the printhead. Record any advice given on the Service Report form.
39 Make sure that the printer top cover is securely refitted.
40 Clean the printer top cover and base unit.
41 On completion of the scheduled maintenance, make sure that the customer signs
the Service Report form.
42 Make sure that all print samples are retained with the Service Report form.
43 The ‘Scheduled Maintenance’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 39 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Scheduled Maintenance
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 40 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Scheduled Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST
PRINTHEAD CAL. CODE (CONDUIT) REF MOD PRINTHEAD CAL. CODE (PRINTER) REF MOD
ITEM ✔ ITEM ✔
• Speak with Operators to determine any problems • Examine for loose hardware
• Record printer and printhead details • Remove, examine, clean and refit PCBs
• Examine conduit/supply cable • Calibrate Charge Amplifier
• Examine and clean printhead • Perform valve tests
• Start printer and record data • Ensure correct jet alignment
Pressure TOF Phase Solvent Read Pressure TOF Phase Solvent Read
steady? Add Pressure steady? Add Pressure
NAME
SIGNATURE
Issue 9 Aug 09
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 41 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Scheduled Maintenance
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 42 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Cleaning for Pigmented Inks
Equipment Required
FA81505/5L General Purpose MEK 1505
FA900003 Solvent Cleaning Bottle
FA900005 Beaker 0.25 Litre
FA940029 Solvent Resistant Cleaning Brush
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 loves Nitrile Large 8–8.5
Gloves )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Absorbent, lint-free paper towel
Introduction
This maintenance instruction details the procedure for cleaning Mk7 printheads fitted to
7300 printers that use the following pigmented inks:
• Black Pigmented Ink 1009
• Yellow Pigmented Ink 1039
• White Pigmented Ink 1059
• Brilliant White Ink 1305 and 1306
• High-Opacity Grey Ink 1310 and 1311
• Opaque Blue ink 1043
Linx recommends that the printhead should be checked daily for ink build-up and cleaned
if necessary. It should also be cleaned at intervals of 1 working week using a non-abrasive,
solvent resistant brush (FA940029).
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 43 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Cleaning for Pigmented Inks
Procedure
1 Stop the jet and wait for the following message to appear in the Printer Status area
of the Print Monitor page:
“IDLE”
or wait until the Auto Power Down facility switches the printer off.
2 Switch off the printer and disconnect it from the mains electrical supply.
3 Remove the printhead cover tube.
CAUTION: Solvent Precautions for the Printhead and Nozzle. The printhead and nozzle can
be damaged if important precautions are not taken. Make sure that the solvent used to wash
the printhead is the correct type for the ink used in the printer. Do not wash the nozzle with
solvent unless the nozzle has an ink obstruction or blockage. NEVER USE A BRUSH ON
THE NOZZLE.
4 Hold the printhead over a beaker, as shown in Figure 1, and wash the area (shown
circled) from the charge electrode downwards with solvent.
68123
MIDI -PLUS
WASH THIS
AREA ONLY
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 44 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Cleaning for Pigmented Inks
5 Use the brush to gently remove any ink deposits that will not wash off from the
circled area shown in Figure 1, paying particular attention to the deflector plates
(Figure 2). Do not use the brush to clean the nozzle.
68124
MIDI -PLUS
6 Alternately, wash and then gently brush the circled area of the printhead (Figure
2), finishing with a wash when all the ink deposits have been removed. Only use
new solvent. Do not recycle the solvent.
7 Allow the printhead to dry.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 45 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Cleaning for Pigmented Inks
8 Wash the inside of the printhead cover tube with solvent, as shown in Figure 3,
until all ink has been removed. Use the brush, where possible, to remove ink
deposits that do not immediately wash off. Finish the cleaning with a wash and
allow the cover tube to dry.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 46 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Draining the Ink System
Equipment Required
FA74005 Damper Drain Tube
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
FA940052 Tube Cutter Plastic 4 mm–14 mm
FA79021 Tube PTFE 6 mm OD x 4 mm ID, Natural, 5 metres
FA65339 Mandrel Extraction Tool
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Waste ink container (at least 5 litres capacity)
Absorbent, lint-free paper towel
Procedure
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 47 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Draining the Ink System
4 Switch the printer on and select the System Flush option on the Maintenance
page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance). The first page of the System Flush
procedure is displayed with the instruction “Check solvent level.”.
69183
8 Orientate filter and damper. Ignore the instruction regarding the filter. Carefully
lift the feed damper clear of the ink system enclosure. Hold the feed damper in
the vertical position with the drain cap uppermost.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 48 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Draining the Ink System
9 Connect bleed line to damper. Remove the damper drain cap and connect the
Damper Drain Tube Luer fitting (included in the Damper Drain Tube kit) to the
damper drain. Insert the other end of the drain tube into a waste container of at
least 5 litres capacity. Orientate the damper so that the drain is at the bottom, that
is, at its lowest position, as shown in the following illustration.
68050
Drain Tube
69184
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 49 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Draining the Ink System
13 Press the OK key to continue the procedure, which starts the pump. The pump
runs at maximum pressure for approximately 1 minute and 40 seconds, and then
automatically stops on completion of the Empty Tank sequence. During the
sequence a Progress bar gives an indication of how much of the sequence has
been completed. Press the Stop Sequence key if the audible pitch of the pump
changes indicating that the ink tank is empty.
69307
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 50 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Draining the Ink System
16 At this point the ink pick-up pipe on the 7300 Spectrum must be reconnected to the
ink pick-up connection on the tank lid. To do this, proceed with the following
step 16 sub-items.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 51 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Draining the Ink System
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 52 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Spectrum Ink Tank Removal
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
FA900003 Solvent Cleaning Bottle
FA940029 Solvent Resistant Cleaning Brush
FA940052 Tube Cutter Plastic 4 mm–14 mm as required
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Correct solvent for the ink used in the printer as required
Absorbent, lint-free paper towel
Introduction
This maintenance instruction describes the procedure for removing the 7300 Spectrum ink
tank for access to the main ink filter. It also details the procedure for removing the ink
tank lid to enable the tank to be cleaned, and includes the cleaning recommendations.
Procedure
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 53 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Spectrum Ink Tank Removal
6 Disconnect the ink tank float switch sensor cable. Gently pull the cable through
the grommet in the ink system enclosure wall until the connector is touching the
grommet. This makes sure that there is sufficient slack to enable the tank to be
removed.
7 Unclip the PRV (pressure relief valve) from its retaining clip located on the left
side of the tank.
8 Disconnect the ink pick-up and return pipes (connections shown in Figure 1) from
the tank lid using a 12 mm AF spanner.
69390
Ink Tank Vent Pipe
and Purge Pipe
Connections
Ink Tank
Base Plate
Bracket
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 54 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Spectrum Ink Tank Removal
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 55 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Spectrum Ink Tank Removal
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 56 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink Tank Dip Tube Replacement
Parts Required
FA13004 Ink Dip Tube Assembly
FA79021 Tube PTFE 6 mm OD x 4 mm ID, Natural, 5 metres
Equipment Required
FA69012 Lubricant Small—Main Ink Filter
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
FA65337 4800/6800 Dip Tube Removal Tool
FA940052 Tube Cutter Plastic 4 mm–14 mm
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Absorbent, lint-free paper towel
Abrasive paper
Introduction
The ink tank dip (pick-up) tube has an integral 40 µm, stainless steel, in-line filter fitted
inside the tube. The dip tube and filter, together with relevant O-rings, come ready
assembled in the spare part pack. A compression fitting is also included.
48216
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 57 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink Tank Dip Tube Replacement
Procedure
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
Position the cover so that the keyboard can be accessed.
4 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
5 Place absorbent, lint-free paper towel around the area of the ink dip tube to contain
any ink that might be spilt.
6 Remove the dip tube from the ink tank using the Dip Tube Removal Tool. Note
that the dip tube is not threaded but is a push fit.
7 Unscrew the ink dip tube compression fitting and disconnect the ink pick-up pipe.
Discard the compression fitting and the dip tube.
8 Prepare the end of the ink pick-up pipe by cutting off the portion previously
compressed by the compression fitting and containing the steel insert
(approximately 20 mm). Use the Tube Cutter to make sure that the pipe is cut clean
and straight.
9 Remove the stainless steel insert from the cut portion of pipe and push it back into
the pick-up pipe until it is flush with the end. (It may help to grip the pipe if it is
held in a piece of abrasive paper.)
10 Slide the new compression fitting onto the ink pick-up pipe. Insert the pipe into the
new dip tube outlet and slide the compression fitting down to the dip tube
connection.
11 Apply two drops of thread assembly lubricant to the dip tube threads and screw
the compression fitting firmly onto the connection.
12 Lightly lubricate the two O-rings fitted to the neck of the new dip tube assembly
with thread assembly lubricant. Fit the dip tube to the ink tank by pushing it firmly
into place.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 58 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink Tank Dip Tube Replacement
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 59 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink Tank Dip Tube Replacement
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 60 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
3-Way Fluid Connector Filter Replacement
Parts Required
FA74163 3-Way Connector Replacement Filter (Ultima, Midi, Mini, and Micro
printheads)
or
FA74189 3-Way Connector Replacement Filter (Ultima plus and Midi plus
printheads)
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Tweezers
Absorbent, lint-free paper towel
Procedure
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
Position the cover so that the keyboard can be accessed.
4 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
5 Carefully lift the 3-way fluid connector clear of the ink system enclosure.
6 Place absorbent, lint-free paper towel under the 3-way fluid connector to contain
any ink that might be spilt.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 61 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
3-Way Fluid Connector Filter Replacement
7 Unscrew and remove the 3-way fluid connector assembly screw and separate the
two parts of the connector (see Figure 1).
68053
Assembly Filter
screw
O-ring gasket
Locating
lug
Locating
recess
10 Remove the new filter from its protective bag and examine it for any damage and
contamination.
11 Insert the new filter fully into the fluid connector using the thinner, smooth end of
the insert/extract tool supplied with the new filter.
12 Remove the new O-ring gasket from its protective bag and examine it for any
damage and flash.
13 Using the tweezers, carefully position the new O-ring gasket in the shaped recess
in the larger part of the fluid connector.
14 Fit and hold the two parts of the fluid connector together, making sure that the
locating lug and recess are correctly aligned.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 62 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
3-Way Fluid Connector Filter Replacement
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 63 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
3-Way Fluid Connector Filter Replacement
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 64 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Main Ink Filter Replacement
Parts Required
FA73044 Main Ink Filter 10 µm
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
FA940052 Tube Cutter Plastic 4 mm–14 mm
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Absorbent, lint-free paper towel
Abrasive paper
Introduction
This maintenance instruction describes the procedure for replacing the main ink filter on
both the Standard 7300 printer and the 7300 Spectrum printer. Where there are differences
in the procedure for the 7300 Spectrum printer, these are stated at the relevant points in the
instruction.
The main ink filter (which has a post-LOT #L087 number) has pre-lubricated fluid
connections, and therefore does not require the application of assembly lubricant.
Procedure
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
4 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
5 7300 Spectrum printer only. Remove the ink tank to gain access to the main ink
filter (refer to the ‘Spectrum Ink Tank Removal’ maintenance instruction).
6 Carefully lift the main ink filter clear of the ink system enclosure.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 65 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Main Ink Filter Replacement
7 Place absorbent, lint-free paper towel under the main ink filter and venturi
manifold to contain any ink that might be spilt.
8 Remove the new filter, two lengths of pipe and two stainless steel inserts from their
packaging.
9 Cut the two lengths of pipe to the following printer-dependent lengths (if
necessary), using the Tube Cutter to make sure that they are cut cleanly and
straight.
69319
MAIN INK FILTER INLET AND OUTLET PIPE LENGTHS
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 66 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Main Ink Filter Replacement
15 Repeat steps 12 to 14 for the outlet port of the new filter using the 185 mm or
220 mm pipe (refer to step 9).
16 Unscrew and disconnect the fluid connection from the inlet port of the old filter.
17 Hold the disconnected end of the filter, and pull off the glove from the hand
holding the filter so that the glove turns inside out over the filter (see Figure 3). Fit
a new glove on the bare hand.
68051
Figure 3. One End of the Main Ink Filter Enclosed in a Latex Glove
18 7300 Spectrum printer only. Remove the old filter inlet pipe from the pipe size
adaptor by cutting it off the metal barb. Discard the pipe.
18 Standard 7300 printer only. Unscrew and disconnect the fluid connection from the
pump outlet. Discard the pipe but retain the blue Festo nut and pipe elbow
support.
19 Unscrew and disconnect the fluid connection from the outlet port (venturi
manifold side) of the old filter.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 67 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Main Ink Filter Replacement
20 Hold the disconnected end of the filter, and pull off the glove from the hand
holding the filter so that the glove turns inside out over the filter. Both ends of the
filter are now enclosed in gloves (see Figure 4). Dispose of the old filter and fit a
new glove on the bare hand.
68052
Figure 4. Both Ends of the Main Ink Filter Enclosed in Latex Gloves
21 Unscrew and disconnect the fluid connection from the venturi manifold inlet.
Discard the pipe but retain the blue Festo nut and pipe elbow support.
22 7300 Spectrum printer only. Connect the inlet pipe of the new filter to the metal
barb of the pipe size adaptor.
22 Standard 7300 printer only. Fit the blue Festo nut that was removed from the
pump over the end of the new filter inlet pipe. Push the pipe onto the pump
connection (it may help to grip the pipe with a piece of abrasive paper). Screw the
Festo nut firmly onto the pump connection. Refit the pipe elbow support.
23 Fit the blue Festo nut that was removed from the venturi manifold over the end of
the new filter outlet pipe. Push the pipe onto the manifold connection (it may help
to grip the pipe with a piece of abrasive paper). Screw the Festo nut firmly onto the
manifold connection.
24 Remove any absorbent material from the ink system enclosure and position the
new main ink filter in its original location.
25 7300 Spectrum printer only. Refit the ink tank (refer to the ‘Spectrum Ink Tank
Removal’ maintenance instruction).
26 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
27 Refit the top cover and secure the locking latch.
28 Refit the ink and solvent filler caps.
29 The ‘Main Ink Filter Replacement’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 68 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Main Ink Filter Purging
Parts Required
0.5 litres of the appropriate ink as required
Procedure
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 69 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Main Ink Filter Purging
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 70 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Charge Amplifier Calibration
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
FA940067 Double-Ended Trim Tool
DVM (Digital Voltmeter)
Introduction
Calibration of the Charge Amplifier is required only when the IPM PCB is replaced and
during scheduled maintenance. The Charge Amplifier must not be calibrated when a
new printer is commissioned.
If the software alone is changed, the non-volatile RAM is initialized, which causes the
calibration values to be reset to the default values. Therefore, before the software is
changed, the XCAL125, XCAL255, CALCHG1 and EHTPSU1 values must be noted from
the Charge Calibration page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance) and then entered
again after the software is changed.
Procedure
1 Make sure that the printer is switched off at the mains electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
Position the cover so that the IPM PCB and the keyboard can both be accessed.
4 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
5 Switch on the mains electrical supply to the printer and switch on the printer.
IMPORTANT: Leave the printer switched on for at least 30 minutes before proceeding
with the following calibration.
6 Connect the DVM negative lead to a convenient 0 V test point (for example, TP17
or TP18) and the positive lead to test point TP29 (CHARGE).
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 71 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Charge Amplifier Calibration
7 Access the Charge Calibration page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance) and
set the Calibration Mode option to Zero.
69321
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 72 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Charge Amplifier Calibration
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 73 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Charge Amplifier Calibration
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 74 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Valves Tests
Equipment Required
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Procedures
90 0
Off 0 0
0
0
24
Figure 1. Entering a Set Pressure of 4.49 bar on the Edit Pressure Page
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 75 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Valves Tests
3 Access the Valves page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance).
4 Open the ink system Feed valve by highlighting Feed in the Valves list and pressing
the Open/Close key.
69332
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 76 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Valves Tests
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 77 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Valves Tests
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 78 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink System Feed Valve Test
Equipment Required
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Procedure
90 0
Off 0 0
0
0
24
Figure 1. Entering a Set Pressure of 4.49 bar on the Edit Pressure Page
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 79 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink System Feed Valve Test
3 Access the Valves page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance).
4 Open the Printhead Feed valve by highlighting Printhead Feed in the Valves list
and pressing the Open/Close key.
69345
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 80 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Purge and Gutter Valves Tests
Parts Required
FA65022 Fluid Connector 3-Way—Service Accessories
or
FA72150 Fluid Connector 3-Way—Service Accessories—Pigmented
FA74135 M3 x 28 CSK POZ SS Screw—Pack as required
FA74136 Gasket Fluid Connector 3-Way—Pack as required
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Absorbent, lint-free paper towel
Procedures
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 81 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Purge and Gutter Valves Tests
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 82 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Purge and Gutter Valves Tests
12 Connect the Purge/Gutter Test fluid connector between the printhead and the ink
system parts of the 3-way fluid connector, using the extra screw supplied with the
assembly (Figure 2). Make sure that the O-ring gaskets are fitted to both
connections before assembly to avoid the possibility of leaks. Make sure that the
assembly screws are tight.
NOTE: The purpose of the Purge Test fluid connector is to blank off the purge line.
O-ring gasket
68094
Assembly
screw
O-ring gasket
ead
Assembly Printh
To the
screw
Locating
recess
System
e Ink
m th
Fro
Figure 2. Purge Test Fluid Connector Fitted in the 3-Way Fluid Connector
13 Switch on the printer.
14 Access the Jet Functions page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance) and start the
jet by pressing the Jet Test – Start key.
15 Observe the jet parameters. Wait until the Actual TOF reading is within ±0.3% of
the Reference TOF reading, and the Set Pressure reading has stabilized. Note the
Set Pressure reading.
16 If the Set Pressure reading is less than the reading noted at step 4 minus 0.05 bar
(0.77 p.s.i.), the Purge or Gutter valve is leaking. To determine which valve is
leaking, continue from step 18.
17 Otherwise, proceed with the following sub-items:
(a) Shut down the printer.
(b) Disconnect and remove the Purge/Gutter Test fluid connector.
(c) Reconnect the 3-way fluid connector using a new O-ring gasket (supplied in
FA74136 Gasket Fluid Connector 3-way—Pack). Make sure that the assembly
screw is tight.
(d) Proceed to step 21.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 83 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Purge and Gutter Valves Tests
CAUTION: Printhead Damage and Print Failures. The printhead can be damaged or the printer
can fail if the wrong solvent is allowed to enter the ink or solvent tanks. Make sure that the
solvent used during the following procedure is the correct type for the ink and solvent used in
the printer. Use only Linx solvents.
18 Place the free end of the purge line tube in a container of clean solvent (Figure 3). If
solvent is seen to be drawn up the tube, the Gutter valve is leaking and must be
replaced. If solvent is not drawn up the tube, and the Set Pressure values from step
16 are different, the Purge valve is leaking and must be replaced.
68095
Purge/Gutter Test
fluid connector
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 84 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Purge and Gutter Valves Tests
19 Repeat this instruction from the beginning after replacing either valve as both
valves may have been leaking.
20 On completion of the test, proceed with the following sub-items:
(a) Shut down the printer.
(b) Disconnect and remove the Purge/Gutter Test fluid connector.
(c) Reconnect the 3-way fluid connector using a new O-ring gasket (supplied in
FA74136 Gasket Fluid Connector 3-way—Pack). Make sure that the assembly
screw is tight.
24 While the Nozzle Clear sequence is in operation (20 seconds), apply small amounts
of solvent to the gutter. The solvent should not be drawn into the gutter except for
the first 5 seconds of the sequence. If solvent is drawn into the gutter during the
remaining 15 seconds of the sequence, the Gutter valve is leaking. If solvent is not
drawn in at all, the Gutter valve is not operating. To repair either fault, replace the
Gutter valve and repeat the test.
25 Carry out the ‘Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning’ maintenance instruction,
checking the 3-way fluid connector for leaks at the same time.
26 Remove any absorbent material from the ink system enclosure and reposition the
3-way fluid connector back in its original location.
27 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 85 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Purge and Gutter Valves Tests
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 86 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Solvent Flush Valve Tests
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Procedures
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 87 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Solvent Flush Valve Tests
6 Access the Jet Functions page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance) and start the
jet by pressing the Jet Test – Start key.
69171
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 88 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Solvent Flush Valve Tests
68104
Solvent Flush
valve
Figure 4. Creating Bubbles to Test the Solvent Flush Valve for Leakage
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 89 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Solvent Flush Valve Tests
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 90 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Solvent Add Valve Tests
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Procedures
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 91 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Solvent Add Valve Tests
6 Using a finger, gently flick the pipe connecting the solvent tank to the Solvent Add
and Solvent Flush valves to cause bubbles to appear (Figure 1).
68104
Solvent Flush
valve
Figure 1. Creating Bubbles to Test the Solvent Add Valve for Leakage
7 Access the Edit Pressure page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance > Monitor
Jet) and enter the maximum Set Pressure of 4.49 bar (65.00 p.s.i.).
69329
90 0
Off 0 0
0
0
24
Figure 2. Entering a Set Pressure of 4.49 bar on the Edit Pressure Page
8 Observe the bubbles in the pipe between the Y-piece connector and the Solvent
Flush valve. If the bubbles are seen to move in the direction of the Solvent Flush
valve, the Solvent Add valve is leaking and must be replaced.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 92 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Solvent Add Valve Tests
10 Access the Edit Pressure page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance > Monitor
Jet) and enter a Set Pressure of 0.9 bar (12.75 p.s.i.).
11 Access the Valves page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance).
12 Open the Solvent Add valve by highlighting Solvent Add in the Valves list and
pressing the Open/Close key.
69348
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 93 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Solvent Add Valve Tests
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 94 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning
Parts Required
FA73051 Screw M2 x 6 Pan Poz SS—Pack
FA73052 Washer Shakeproof M2 SS—Pack
Equipment Required
FA74046 Nozzle Cleaning Service Accessory
FA900003 Solvent Cleaning Bottle
FA900005 Beaker 0.25 Litre
FA940003 Eyeglass x9 Magnification
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Ultrasonic bath
Empty 0.5 litre ink bottle
Beaker, stainless steel or glass
Correct solvent for the printer as required
Clean hot water (preferably deionized)
between 55 °C and 100 °C as required
Absorbent, lint-free paper towel
Procedures
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 95 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning
2 Access the Jet Functions page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance) and start the
jet by pressing the Jet Test – Start key.
69171
68055
70% 30%
Mk7 50%
Mini
Micro 50%
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 96 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning
5 Examine the jet to make sure that it is perpendicular to the nozzle face (Figure 3).
Misaligned jet
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 97 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning
CAUTION: Printhead Damage and Print Failures. The printhead can be damaged or the printer
can fail if the wrong solvent is allowed to enter the ink or solvent tanks. Make sure that the
solvent used during the following procedure is the correct type for the ink and solvent used in
the printer. Use only Linx solvents.
5 While the Nozzle Clear sequence is in operation (20 seconds), apply small amounts
of solvent to the inverted nozzle face. Observe that the solvent is drawn in through
the nozzle (Figure 5).
68056
a good coating of
solvent on the nozzle
face, as shown here
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 98 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning
9 If the jet is now correctly aligned, this maintenance instruction can be terminated.
Shut down and switch off the printer, and refit the printhead cover tube.
10 If after eight Nozzle Clear sequences the jet is still misaligned due to a partial
nozzle blockage or is non-existent, continue with the ‘Nozzle Soaking’ procedure.
If the jet is now perpendicular to the nozzle face (Figure 3) but is misaligned with
the gutter, proceed to the ‘Nozzle Realignment’ part of this maintenance
instruction.
Nozzle Soaking
CAUTION: Contamination of the Printhead Nozzle Assembly. Blockages and print failures can
occur if contamination is allowed to enter the printhead nozzle assembly. The following
procedure must be performed in a clean, dust-free environment, and a special Clean Room is
recommended. Maximum care must be taken when the nozzle assembly is fitted. The pipe on
the rear of the nozzle assembly must not touch any fibres, and contact with the skin must be
prevented. Wear powder-free protective gloves during the following procedure to prevent
contamination of the printhead nozzle assembly. If the standard protective gloves that contain
powder are worn, powder contamination can enter the nozzle assembly.
CAUTION: Printhead Damage and Print Failures. The printhead can be damaged or the printer
can fail if the wrong solvent is allowed to enter the ink or solvent tanks. Make sure that the
solvent used during the following procedure is the correct type for the ink and solvent used in
the printer. Use only Linx solvents.
6220
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 99 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning
Nozzle Washing
This procedure is intended for use on nozzles that are experiencing jet misalignment due to
severe blockages, which cannot be cleared using the normal Nozzle Clear function or by
nozzle soaking. It is especially useful when the insides of nozzle assemblies have become
obstructed by deposits of the water-soluble conductive salts present in the ink.
The Nozzle Cleaning Service Accessory is required for this procedure.
CAUTION: Contamination of the Printhead Nozzle Assembly. Blockages and print failures can
occur if contamination is allowed to enter the printhead nozzle assembly. The following
procedure must be performed in a clean, dust-free environment, and a special Clean Room is
recommended. Maximum care must be taken when the nozzle assembly is fitted. The pipe on
the rear of the nozzle assembly must not touch any fibres, and contact with the skin must be
prevented. Wear powder-free protective gloves during the following procedure to prevent
contamination of the printhead nozzle assembly. If the standard protective gloves that contain
powder are worn, powder contamination can enter the nozzle assembly.
CAUTION: Printhead Damage and Print Failures. The printhead can be damaged or the printer
can fail if the wrong solvent is allowed to enter the ink or solvent tanks. Make sure that the
solvent used during the following procedure is the correct type for the ink and solvent used in
the printer. Use only Linx solvents.
Solvent Wash
1 Shut down and switch off the printer.
2 Remove the securing screw from the printhead nozzle protection cover and
remove the cover (if not previously removed).
3 Remove the two securing screws and shakeproof washers from the nozzle
assembly plate and remove the nozzle assembly. Remove the nozzle O-ring from
the nozzle assembly and retain it in a safe place.
4 Wash the nozzle assembly with the same type of solvent that is used in the printer.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 100 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning
5 Soften the free end of the PTFE tube supplied with the Nozzle Cleaning Service
Accessory by dipping it into hot water for a few seconds. Fit the end of the tube to
the pipe on the back of the nozzle assembly.
6 Connect the syringe to the Luer fitting on the other end of the PTFE tube.
7 Fill a clean, dry beaker or similar container (stainless steel or glass, not plastic)
with the same type of solvent that is used in the printer.
8 Position the nozzle assembly in the solvent and withdraw the syringe plunger to
draw solvent back through the nozzle assembly and into the syringe. Depress the
syringe plunger and withdraw it again, with the nozzle assembly remaining in the
solvent in the beaker. Take care at this point because the syringe may dribble
slightly around the plunger. Repeat this operation three times.
9 Lift the nozzle assembly out of the solvent, and empty the syringe and nozzle
assembly into the beaker by depressing the plunger to the bottom of the syringe.
10 Dry the nozzle assembly by withdrawing the syringe plunger to suck only air into
the syringe through the nozzle. Depress the syringe plunger again to force air
through the nozzle assembly. Repeat this drying process three times.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 101 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning
20 Open the Feed and Printhead Feed valves by highlighting Feed and Printhead
Feed in the Valves list and pressing the Open/Close key for each. Leave the valves
open for 5 seconds, during which time ink is ejected from the nozzle.
69350
Figure 7. Feed and Printhead Feed Valves Open on the Valves Page
21 Press the Valve Reset key to close the valves after 5 seconds.
22 On the Edit Pressure page, set the Set Pressure to 0.
23 Switch off the printer.
24 Remove the printhead from the ink bottle and thoroughly wash the printhead with
the correct solvent type. Pay particular attention to the nozzle assembly and
surrounding area.
25 Disconnect the syringe from the PTFE tube and remove the tube from the pipe at
the rear of the nozzle assembly.
26 Refit the nozzle O-ring to the nozzle assembly, and then refit the nozzle assembly
to the printhead using new securing screws and shakeproof washers. While doing
this, avoid touching the nozzle assembly pipe with fingers.
27 Switch on the printer
28 Access the Jet Functions page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance) and start the
jet by pressing the Jet Test – Start key.
29 Check that the jet is now correctly aligned into the gutter, as described in ‘Correct
Jet Alignment’ at the beginning of this maintenance instruction. The jet should now
be perpendicular to the nozzle face. If this is correct but the jet is not correctly
aligned into the gutter, proceed to the following ‘Nozzle Realignment’ procedure.
30 If the jet alignment is correct, carefully refit the nozzle protection cover making
sure that the jet alignment is not disturbed.
31 Shut down and switch off the printer.
32 Refit the printhead cover tube.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 102 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning
Nozzle Realignment
1 Remove the securing screw from the printhead nozzle protection cover and
remove the cover (if not previously removed).
2 The best method to realign the nozzle is to use a finger and thumb only with very
little force applied until the alignment is correct (do not use pliers or any other
tool). The nozzle will move a little, and will probably return to its original position.
Apply a little more force so that the nozzle is deflected, but when released does not
return completely to its original position. Continue to use this method until the jet
is correctly aligned into the gutter, as described in ‘Correct Jet Alignment’ at the
beginning of this maintenance instruction.
3 Shut down the printer and then restart the jet using the [start] key on the control
panel. Repeat this four times to make sure that the jet alignment is maintained, the
jet is stable during the start and stop sequences, and that no warning or fault
messages are reported.
4 Carefully refit the nozzle protection cover and securing screw, making sure that
the jet alignment is not disturbed.
5 Shut down and switch off the printer.
6 Refit the printhead cover tube.
7 The ‘Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning’ maintenance instruction is now
completed.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 103 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 104 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Modulation Range Checks
Introduction
This maintenance instruction checks the quality of the printed message and makes sure
that the Reference Modulation value is set so that optimum print quality is maintained
with varying ink viscosity. It can also be used to assess the relative viscosity of the ink.
Procedure
1 Switch on the printer.
2 Access the Test Message page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance).
3 Create a test message by highlighting the biggest available message type (raster) in
the Test Message list and pressing the Create key.
69352
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 105 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Modulation Range Checks
5 Access the Jet Functions page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance) and start the
jet by pressing the Jet Test – Start key, then press the Start Print key.
69353
Figure 2. Jet Test – Start and Start Print Options on the Jet Functions Page
6 Access the Monitor Jet page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance) and note the
Reference Modulation value (circled in Figure 3). Also note the Actual Modulation
value (displayed in the box to the right of the Reference Modulation) so that it can
be reset to this at the end of the procedure.
69354
90 67
1262 1261
15
0
24
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 106 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Modulation Range Checks
7 Access the Edit Modulation page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance > Monitor
Jet).
69176
90 67
1262 1261
15
0
24
Figure 4. Changing the Actual Modulation Value on the Edit Modulation Page
8 Carry out a modulation range analysis using the following method. Produce a
series of print samples, starting at the original Reference Modulation value and
then decreasing the Actual Modulation value in steps of 10 volts on the Edit
Modulation page. Press the Back key after each value change. Continue to
decrease the Actual Modulation until the print quality just starts to deteriorate
(see Figure 5), and record the value (Vm1). Then increase the Actual Modulation
from the original Reference Modulation value in steps of 10 volts. Continue to
increase the Actual Modulation until the print quality just starts to deteriorate (see
Figure 6), or until the maximum of 255 is reached, and record the value (Vm2).
NOTE: It may be that the maximum setting for Vm2 is reached without there being
evidence of over modulation. In this case record Vm2 as the maximum
value. The same applies to under modulation.
48168
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 107 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Modulation Range Checks
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 108 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Blocked Gutter Clearance
Parts Required
FA65022 Fluid Connector 3-Way—Service Accessories
or
FA72150 Fluid Connector 3-Way—Service Accessories—Pigmented
FA74135 M3 x 28 Csk Poz SS Screw—Pack as required
FA74136 Gasket Fluid Connector 3-Way—Pack as required
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
FA900003 Solvent Cleaning Bottle
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Empty 0.5 litre ink bottle
Correct solvent for the printer as required
Absorbent, lint-free paper towel
Introduction
If the gutter has become totally blocked with dried ink, it can be cleared by connecting the
feed line directly to the gutter line and starting the jet. This forces ink out of the gutter (that
is, in the reverse direction), which should clear the blockage.
This procedure is best carried out with the printhead positioned in an empty 0.5 litre ink
bottle with absorbent, lint-free paper towel wrapped around the top to contain the ink jet.
Alternatively, the printhead can be enclosed in a suitable size plastic bag, again sealed to
contain the ink jet.
IMPORTANT: The Linx 7300 Solver printer is fitted with the Dynamic Flow Control
(DFC) device. Two fluid pipes connect the DFC module to the printhead
gutter line instead of the gutter restrictor. Because the DFC module is part
of the gutter line, additional steps must be performed if this ‘Blocked
Gutter Clearance’ procedure is done on a 7300 Solver printer. These
additional steps are included in the following procedure at the applicable
point. If these additional steps are ignored, the DFC will be damaged.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 109 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Blocked Gutter Clearance
Procedure
WARNING: HIGH-PRESSURE INK JET HAZARD. DURING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE INK
IS EJECTED FROM THE PRINTHEAD GUTTER AT MAXIMUM PRESSURE.
WHEN THE PROCEDURE IS BEING PERFORMED, ENCLOSE THE PRINTHEAD IN AN
ACCEPTABLE CONTAINER TO CONTAIN THE INK JET. WEAR SAFETY GLASSES AND
SOLVENT-RESISTANT PROTECTIVE GLOVES.
THERE IS A RISK OF SEVERE IRRITATION AND TEMPORARY (REVERSIBLE) DAMAGE TO
THE EYES, AND IRRITATION OF THE SKIN IF THIS SAFETY WARNING IS IGNORED.
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
Position the cover so that the keyboard can be accessed.
4 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
5 Carefully lift the 3-way fluid connector clear of the ink system enclosure.
6 Place absorbent, lint-free paper towel under the 3-way fluid connector to contain
any ink that might be spilt.
7 Unscrew and remove the 3-way fluid connector assembly screw and separate the
two parts of the connector.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 110 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Blocked Gutter Clearance
8 Connect the Gutter Clear fluid connector between the printhead and the ink
system parts of the 3-way fluid connector, using the extra screw supplied with the
assembly (Figure 1). Make sure that the O-ring gaskets are fitted to both
connections before assembly to avoid the possibility of leaks. Make sure that the
assembly screws are tight.
O-ring gasket
68096
Assembly
screw
O-ring gasket
ead
Assembly Pr inth
To the
screw
Locating
recess
System
Ink
the
From
Figure 1. Gutter Clear Fluid Connector Fitted in the 3-Way Fluid Connector
69644
Printhead In-line A1
conduit barb connector
P/HD CONNECTOR
DFC Module
Cut the
GUTTER
pipe here
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 111 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Blocked Gutter Clearance
8b Connect the pipe from the 3-way fluid connector to the A1 barb connector, as
shown in Figure 3. The DFC is now removed from the gutter line.
69645
Printhead
conduit Connect
this pipe to the
A1 barb connector
P/HD CONNECTOR
DFC Module
GUTTER
90 0
Off 0 0
0
0
24
Figure 4. Entering a Set Pressure of 4.49 bar on the Edit Pressure Page
13 Access the Valves page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance).
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 112 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Blocked Gutter Clearance
14 Open the ink system Feed valve by highlighting Feed in the Valves list and pressing
the Open/Close key. The full force of the maximum running pressure is now
applied to the gutter.
69332
20 Thoroughly wash the printhead with the correct solvent type. Pay particular
attention to the gutter assembly area on the printhead.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 113 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Blocked Gutter Clearance
22 Carry out the ‘Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning’ maintenance instruction,
checking the 3-way fluid connector for leaks at the same time.
23 Remove any absorbent material from the ink system enclosure and reposition the
3-way fluid connector back in its original location.
24 Refit the printhead cover tube making sure that the securing screw is fully
tightened.
25 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
26 Refit the top cover and secure the locking latch.
27 Refit the ink and solvent filler caps.
28 The ‘Blocked Gutter Clearance’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 114 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
System Flush
Equipment Required
FA74005 Damper Drain Tube
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
FA900005 Beaker 0.25 Litre
FA900003 Solvent Cleaning Bottle
FA940021 Syringe Polypropylene 50 ml as required
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Correct solvent for the ink used in the printer as required
Absorbent, lint-free paper towel
Waste container—15 litres capacity
Empty solvent bottle—base removed
Introduction
NOTE: This maintenance instruction is not applicable to the 7300 Spectrum printer.
This maintenance instruction provides the procedures to completely flush a 7300 printer in
the following three circumstances:
1. To prepare the printer to be shipped or for storage.
2. To remove contaminated ink.
3. To change an ‘in use’ printer to a new ink, in preparation for calibration.
The detailed ‘System Flush Procedure’ referred to within the individual procedures for the
above circumstances, is provided separately in Part B of this maintenance instruction.
The procedure for purging the main ink filter is referred out to the ‘Main Ink Filter
Purging’ maintenance instruction, which is provided earlier in this section of Chapter 5.
It is important to make sure that the procedures outlined in this maintenance instruction
are followed carefully to achieve reliable printer operation.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 115 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
System Flush
Procedures
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
Position the cover so that the keyboard and display can be accessed.
4 Carry out the ‘System Flush Procedure’ described in Part B of this maintenance
instruction (that is, ‘Empty Ink Tank’, ‘Flush Cycle’ and’ Solvent Drain’).
5 Repeat step 4 two more times before proceeding to step 6.
6 Carry out the ‘Empty Ink Tank’ part of the ‘System Flush Procedure’ once more.
The solvent tank should be empty, but if it is not, syphon off any remaining
solvent.
7 Reposition the damper back in its original location in the ink system enclosure.
8 Refit the top cover and secure the locking latch.
9 Refit the ink and solvent filler caps.
10 The printer is now flushed ready for packing.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 116 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
System Flush
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
Position the cover so that the keyboard and display can be accessed.
4 Carry out the ‘System Flush Procedure’ described in Part B of this maintenance
instruction (that is, ‘Empty Ink Tank’, ‘Flush Cycle’ and’ Solvent Drain’).
5 Repeat step 4 two more times before proceeding to step 6.
6 Carry out the ‘Empty Ink Tank’ part of the ‘System Flush Procedure’ once more.
The solvent tank should be empty, but if it is not, syphon off any remaining
solvent.
7 Replace the main ink filter and the ink tank dip (pick-up) tube. Maintenance
instructions for these tasks can be found earlier in this section of Chapter 5.
8 The printer may now be recommissioned with fresh ink (one or two bottles, until
the ‘ink low’ warning has cleared) and fresh solvent (one or two bottles, until the
‘solvent low’ warning has cleared).
9 Carry out the ‘Main Ink Filter Purging’ maintenance instruction.
NOTE: If the main ink filter or damper do not fill with ink, the pump must be primed. This
must be done with the printer switched off. Insert the nozzle of the syringe (Linx
part number FA940021—Syringe Polypropylene 50 ml) into the Luer fitting on the
damper. Withdraw the syringe plunger to draw ink through the pump. Continue
withdrawing the plunger until ink is present in the pipe on the outlet side of the
pump. Note that the syringe is a disposable item, with a limited functional life of
approximately two applications when used with solvent-based inks.
10 Carry out at least six Nozzle Clear sequences (refer to the ‘Jet Alignment and
Nozzle Cleaning’ maintenance instruction).
11 Reposition the damper back in its original location in the ink system enclosure.
12 Refit the top cover and secure the locking latch.
13 Refit the ink and solvent filler caps.
14 Press the [start] key to start the jet.
15 The printer is now clear of contaminated ink and ready for use.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 117 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
System Flush
4 Carry out the ‘System Flush Procedure’ described in Part B of this maintenance
instruction (that is, ‘Empty Ink Tank’, ‘Flush Cycle’ and’ Solvent Drain’).
5 Repeat step 4 two more times before proceeding to step 6.
6 Carry out the ‘Empty Ink Tank’ part of the ‘System Flush Procedure’ once more.
The solvent tank should be empty, but if it is not, syphon off any remaining
solvent.
7 Replace the main ink filter and the ink tank dip (pick-up) tube. Maintenance
instructions for these tasks can be found earlier in this section of Chapter 5.
CAUTION: Printhead Damage and Print Failures. Make sure that the solvent added to the ink
tank during the following process is the correct type for the ink type that will be added when
the printer is recommissioned.
8 Carry out the ‘System Flush Procedure’ again (that is, ‘Empty Ink Tank’, ‘Flush
Cycle’ and’ Solvent Drain’).
9 Repeat step 8 two more times before proceeding to step 10.
10 Carry out the ‘Empty Ink Tank’ part of the ‘System Flush Procedure’ once more.
The solvent tank should be empty, but if it is not, syphon off any remaining
solvent.
11 The printer may now be recommissioned with the new ink (one or two bottles,
until the ‘ink low’ warning has cleared) and the new solvent (one or two bottles,
until the ‘solvent low’ warning has cleared).
12 Carry out the ‘Main Ink Filter Purging’ maintenance instruction.
NOTE: If the main ink filter or damper do not fill with ink, the pump must be
primed. This must be done with the printer switched off. Insert the nozzle
of the syringe (Linx part number FA940021—Syringe Polypropylene 50 ml)
into the Luer fitting on the damper. Withdraw the syringe plunger to draw
ink through the pump. Continue withdrawing the plunger until ink is
present in the pipe on the outlet side of the pump. Note that the syringe is
a disposable item, with a limited functional life of approximately two
applications when used with solvent-based inks.
13 Carry out at least six Nozzle Clear sequences (refer to the ‘Jet Alignment and
Nozzle Cleaning’ maintenance instruction).
14 Access the Jet Functions page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance) and start
the jet by pressing the Jet Test – Start key.
15 Run the jet for 10 minutes.
16 Stop the jet.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 118 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
System Flush
17 Carry out the ‘Empty Ink Tank’ part of the ‘System Flush Procedure’ once more.
NOTE: It is important to make sure that the ink tank, damper, and main ink filter
are drained completely of ink.
18 The printer may now be recommissioned with fresh, new ink (one or two bottles,
until the ‘ink low’ warning has cleared), which must be of the same batch and
viscosity, as marked on the ink bottle label.
NOTE: Steps 11 to 18 must be carried out, despite the apparent duplication of ink
commissioning. These steps help to remove traces of solvent that remain
from the flushing process, which could decrease the viscosity of the ink
and cause incorrect calibration.
19 Repeat the ‘Main Ink Filter Purging’ maintenance instruction.
NOTE: If the main ink filter or damper do not fill with ink, the pump must be
primed. This must be done with the printer switched off. Insert the nozzle
of the syringe (Linx part number FA940021—Syringe Polypropylene 50 ml)
into the Luer fitting on the damper. Withdraw the syringe plunger to draw
ink through the pump. Continue withdrawing the plunger until ink is
present in the pipe on the outlet side of the pump. Note that the syringe is
a disposable item, with a limited functional life of approximately two
applications when used with solvent-based inks.
20 Place an earthed container under the printhead because solvent will be present in
the pipes.
21 Reposition the damper back in its original location in the ink system enclosure.
22 Refit the top cover and secure the locking latch.
23 Refit the ink and solvent filler caps.
24 The printer is now ready for calibration. Refer to the ‘Ink Conversion Calibration
(Offset Calibration)’ maintenance instruction.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 119 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
System Flush
Precautions
During the system flush, the solvent tank must contain only enough solvent
(approximately 600 ml) to successfully complete the task. Too much solvent in the solvent
tank may result in the ink tank overflowing during the cycle, due to solvent being dumped
into the ink tank as solvent is used to fill the system. Therefore, fill the solvent tank just
until the System Warning message “3.04 Solvent Low” is cleared. This may require
drawing off some solvent first to see the warning message appear, and then refilling with
solvent until the warning message clears.
As a precaution, fit an empty solvent bottle (with its base removed) to the ink tank filler
tube during the flush cycles in case the tank overflows. Also, it is advisable to put the
printhead in a beaker to contain any spillage from the nozzle.
NOTE: The ‘Flush Cycle’ part of the ‘System Flush Procedure’ thoroughly flushes all the
valves and pipework with solvent.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 120 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
System Flush
5 Prop up the printer. (Not applicable to the 7300 Spectrum printer—see NOTE
below.) Before commencing the ink draining procedure, the printer must be raised
by approximately 50 mm at the front left side to aid drainage of the ink. This is
because the ink dip tube is situated at the rear right side of the tank.
NOTE: The 7300 Spectrum printer does not require propping up, but the OK key
must be pressed to continue the procedure.
6 Orientate filter and damper. Ignore the instruction regarding the filter. Carefully
lift the feed damper clear of the ink system enclosure. Hold the feed damper in the
vertical position with the drain cap uppermost.
7 Connect bleed line to damper. Remove the damper drain cap and connect the
Damper Drain Tube Luer fitting (included in the Damper Drain Tube kit) to the
damper drain. Insert the other end of the drain tube into a waste container of at
least 5 litres capacity. Orientate the damper so that the drain is at the bottom, that
is, at its lowest position, as shown in the following illustration.
68050
Drain Tube
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 121 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
System Flush
8 When the required actions have been completed, the following page is displayed.
69184
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 122 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
System Flush
11 Press the OK key to continue the procedure, which starts the pump and increments
the sequence count by 1. The pump runs at maximum pressure for approximately 1
minute and 40 seconds, and then automatically stops on completion of the Empty
Tank sequence. During the sequence a Progress bar gives an indication of how
much of the sequence has been completed. Press the Stop Sequence key if the
audible pitch of the pump changes indicating that the ink tank is empty.
69307
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 123 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
System Flush
Flush Cycle
69355
19 It is necessary to add solvent to the ink tank before the Flush Cycle can begin. Add
1.0 litre of solvent to the ink tank. If this is the first time the Flush Cycle has been
run (sequence count is 0) and a “3.04 Solvent Low” warning message is displayed,
the Flush Cycle cannot proceed. If necessary, fill the solvent tank just until the
“3.04 Solvent Low” warning message is cleared.
20 Press the OK key to continue, which starts the pump and increments the sequence
count by 1. The pump runs at maximum pressure for approximately 1 minute and
40 seconds, and then automatically stops on completion of the Flush Cycle
sequence. During the sequence a Progress bar gives an indication of how much of
the sequence has been completed. The Flush Cycle sequence can be terminated at
any time by pressing the Stop Sequence key.
NOTE: The “3.04 Solvent Low” warning message may be reported during the
Flush Cycle as solvent is used to fill the system. This warning can be
ignored, except when the software does not allow the sequence to continue
and action is required, as described in step 19.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 124 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
System Flush
Solvent Drain
69356
90 0
Off 0 0
0
0
24
Figure 7. Entering a Set Pressure of 4.49 bar on the Edit Pressure Page
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 125 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
System Flush
26 Apply solvent to the gutter using the solvent cleaning bottle until the solvent in the
gutter line flows clear. Note that a minimum of 250 ml of solvent must be used.
27 On the Edit Pressure page, set the Set Pressure to 0.
28 Return to Part A of this maintenance instruction.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 126 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration)
Parts Required
FA20012 Printhead Calibration Label–Pack
Introduction
This maintenance instruction details the procedure for calibrating a 7300 printer, fitted
with a Mk7 Ultima plus 75 µm, Midi plus 75 µm, Ultima 62 µm, Midi 62 µm, Mini 50 µm or
Micro 40 µm printhead, following a conversion from one ink type to another. See Figures 5
to 13 for allowed ink conversions.
New printheads and new nozzles are supplied with a calibration sheet, and Reference
Pressure and Reference Modulation Offset Tables, which give offset values for conversion to
(printhead specific) approved inks.
IMPORTANT: It is most important that the Reference Pressure and Reference Modulation
Offset Tables sheet supplied with each individual printhead or nozzle is
retained and filed. If it is required to convert a printer to a different ink in
the future, the offset values from the original sheet for the printhead or
nozzle must be used. However, if the original offset values are not
available or were not supplied, they must be obtained from the Linx
International Technical Support department before carrying out a
recalibration.
Preparation
NOTE: The ‘System Flush’ part of this procedure (referred to below) is not applicable to
new ‘dry’ printers received from Linx when they are first commissioned with ink.
The ‘System Flush’ procedure is only applicable to ‘in use’ printers that have the
ink changed to a different ink in preparation for calibration.
Before this calibration is attempted, the printer must be flushed and recommissioned with
the new ink in accordance with the ‘System Flush’ maintenance instruction, which can be
found earlier in this section of Chapter 5.
It is important that the procedures outlined in the following maintenance instruction are
understood fully and followed carefully to make sure of reliable printer operation.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 127 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration)
Procedure
1 Carry out the ‘Preparation’ instructions detailed above.
2 Access the Ink/Solvent Type page (Print Monitor > Menu > Setup > Installation >
Ink/Solvent) and select the correct ink type for the ink that the printer is to be
converted to.
3 Access the Printhead Code page (Print Monitor > Menu > Setup > Installation >
Printhead).
4 Adjust the existing Reference Pressure (circled in Figure 1) in accordance with the
‘Reference Pressure Offset (bits)’ value given for the new ink in the offset table
supplied with the printhead or nozzle.
69359
Ink Type
Mk7 ULTIMA 3103 1010 1014 1016 1018 1035 1055 1070 1121 1240 1270 1290 1405 2030 2035 3123 3124 3240
Reference Pressure
— 0 1 13 4 3 9 –1 –1 1 2 6 3 1 1 0 0 1
Offset (bits)
Reference Modulation
— 10 –10 –15 0 –30 –25 –10 –10 10 20 –30 5 –10 –10 0 0 10
Offset (VM + offset) (V)
Modulation Slope 2.5 2.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.3 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.5 2.0
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 128 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration)
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 129 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration)
8 Remove any dust or dirt from the existing printhead conduit label protective
sheath using a damp cloth, and then it wipe dry. Do not use any solvents to clean
this conduit label.
9 Remove the backing paper from the completed Printhead Calibration Label and
attach it to the printhead conduit, on the existing conduit label. The label should
be wrapped around the conduit in such a way that it extends out from the conduit
at 90 degrees, and all written information is covered by the transparent tail (see
Figure 4).
6318
1 Write the date of fitting here. 2 Remove the backing paper from
the flag label.
3 Fold the label in half around the
conduit and stick the sides together
so that the label is tight on the
conduit.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 130 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration)
Figure 5. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Ultima Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 131 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration)
Figure 6. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Ultima plus Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 132 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration)
Figure 7. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Midi Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 133 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration)
Figure 8. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Midi plus Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 134 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Figure 9. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Ultima A Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
5 — 135
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration)
Sep 2009
Figure 10. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Midi A Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration)
Figure 11. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300FG Printers with Mk7 MidiEC Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 136 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Figure 12. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Mini Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
5 — 137
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration)
Figure 13. Approved Ink Types for Use in 7300 Printers with Mk7 Micro Printheads, and Allowed Ink Conversions
Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration)
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 138 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Calibrated Nozzle Replacement (Offset Calibration)
Parts Required
FA74194/3103 Calibrated Nozzle Assembly 75 µm (for use with non-food grade inks)
or
FA74070/3103 Calibrated Nozzle Assembly 62 µm (for use with non-food grade inks)
or
FA74218/XXXX Calibrated Nozzle Assembly 50 µm (for use with non-food grade inks)
or
FA74241/XXXX Calibrated Nozzle Assembly 40 µm (for use with non-food grade inks)
plus
FA20012 Printhead Calibration Label–Pack
Equipment Required
FA900003 Solvent Cleaning Bottle
FA940003 Eyeglass x9 Magnification
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Tweezers
Correct solvent for the printer as required
Introduction
The procedure in this maintenance instruction is primarily for use when replacing the
nozzles on Mk7 Ultima plus 75 µm, Midi plus 75 µm, Ultima 62 µm, Midi 62 µm, Mini 50
µm and Micro 40 µm printheads, in circumstances where it has not been possible to clear a
blocked nozzle after carrying out the full ‘Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning’ maintenance
instruction.
This instruction also contains details for recalibrating a 7300 printer to operate with a new
printhead/nozzle combination following a printhead or nozzle replacement.
New printheads and nozzles are supplied with a calibration sheet, and Reference Pressure
and Reference Modulation Offset Tables, which give offset values to be used when the
printhead or nozzle is replaced.
IMPORTANT: It is most important that the Reference Pressure and Reference Modulation
Offset Tables sheet supplied with each individual printhead or nozzle is
retained and filed. If it is required to convert a printer to a different ink in
the future, the offset values from the original sheet for the printhead or
nozzle must be used. However, if the original offset values are not
available or were not supplied, they must be obtained from the Linx
International Technical Support department before carrying out a
recalibration.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 139 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Calibrated Nozzle Replacement (Offset Calibration)
Procedure
Nozzle Replacement
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the printhead cover tube.
3 Remove the securing screw from the printhead nozzle protection cover and
remove the cover.
CAUTION: Contamination of the Printhead Nozzle Assembly. Blockages and print failures can
occur if contamination is allowed to enter the printhead nozzle assembly. The following
procedure must be performed in a clean, dust-free environment, and a special Clean Room is
recommended. Maximum care must be taken when the nozzle assembly is fitted. The pipe on
the rear of the nozzle assembly must not touch any fibres, and contact with the skin must be
prevented. Wear powder-free protective gloves during the following procedure to prevent
contamination of the printhead nozzle assembly. If the standard protective gloves that contain
powder are worn, powder contamination can enter the nozzle assembly.
4 Remove the two securing screws and shakeproof washers from the nozzle
assembly plate and remove the nozzle assembly.
5 Remove the old O-ring from the recess of the gun body, or from the nozzle
assembly plate if it has become adhered. Discard the O-ring.
CAUTION: Nozzle O-Ring Quality. Blockages and print failures can occur if rubber particles
from the new O-ring are allowed to enter the nozzle plate or the gun assembly. Examine the
new O-ring before it is fitted to make sure that the part is clean and not damaged.
6 Carefully remove the new calibrated nozzle assembly and O-ring from the
packaging, and examine them for cleanliness and damage.
CAUTION: Printhead Damage and Print Failures. The printhead can be damaged or the printer
can fail if the wrong solvent is allowed to enter the ink or solvent tanks. Make sure that the
solvent used during the following procedure is the correct type for the ink and solvent used in
the printer. Use only Linx solvents.
7 Thoroughly clean the nozzle assembly plate location and the gun body recess with
solvent.
8 Using the tweezers, carefully place the new O-ring into the recess of the gun body.
9 Position the nozzle assembly on the printhead and loosely refit the two securing
screws and shakeproof washers.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 140 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Calibrated Nozzle Replacement (Offset Calibration)
CAUTION: Nozzle Damage. Damage to the nozzle can occur if tools are used to adjust the
nozzle position. Do not use pliers or any other tool to adjust the nozzle. Use only fingers to
adjust the nozzle until the alignment is correct.
10 Adjust the nozzle alignment until the jewel is visible through the slot in the charge
electrode when viewed from the gutter.
11 Fully tighten the two nozzle assembly securing screws.
12 Switch on the printer.
13 Access the Printhead Code page (Print Monitor > Menu > Setup > Installation >
Printhead).
14 Adjust the existing Reference Pressure (circled in Figure 1) in accordance with the
‘Reference Pressure Offset (bits)’ value given for the new ink in the offset table
supplied with the printhead or nozzle.
69359
Ink Type
Mk7 ULTIMA 3103 1010 1014 1016 1018 1035 1055 1070 1121 1240 1270 1290 1405 2030 2035 3123 3124 3240
Reference Pressure
— 0 1 13 4 3 9 –1 –1 1 2 6 3 1 1 0 0 1
Offset (bits)
Reference Modulation
— 10 –10 –15 0 –30 –25 –10 –10 10 20 –30 5 –10 –10 0 0 10
Offset (VM + offset) (V)
Modulation Slope 2.5 2.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.3 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.5 2.0
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 141 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Calibrated Nozzle Replacement (Offset Calibration)
Jet Realignment
16 Access the Jet Functions page (Print Monitor > Menu > Maintenance) and start the
jet by pressing the Jet Test – Start key.
69171
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 142 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Calibrated Nozzle Replacement (Offset Calibration)
17 Examine the alignment of the jet with an eyeglass. The jet should pass exactly
through the centre of the charge electrode and enter the gutter as shown in the
following illustration.
68055
70% 30%
Mk7 50%
Mini
Micro 50%
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 143 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Calibrated Nozzle Replacement (Offset Calibration)
1 Write the date of fitting here. 2 Remove the backing paper from
the flag label.
3 Fold the label in half around the
conduit and stick the sides together
so that the label is tight on the
conduit.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 144 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printer Installation
Equipment Required
FA65838 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
MP65317 Commissioning Procedure (supplied with printer)
FA65839 Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide
Linx 7300 How To … documents
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Service/Install Report
Procedure
1 Configuration
Configure the printer by entering the supplied Configuration Code on the ID page
(Print Monitor > Menu > Setup > Installation). Also enter the printer serial number
on the ID page.
Refer to the Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual, Chapter 4: ‘System Options’.
2 Installation Parameters
Enter the required parameters on the Installation pages (Date & Time, ID,
Printhead, Ink/Solvent, and Locale pages).
Refer to the Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual, Chapter 4: ‘System Options’.
3 Commissioning
Commission the printer in accordance with the Commissioning Procedure.
4 Installation on the Line
Position the printer on the production line and install the relevant accessories (for
example, cabinet, gantry, product sensor, and line speed detector). Refer also to the
‘Correct Installation of Mk7 Printheads’ maintenance instruction.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 145 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printer Installation
5 Line Parameters
Enter the required parameters on the Line Setup pages (Trigger, Speed, Alarm,
and Power Down pages).
Refer to the Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual, Chapter 4: ‘System Options’.
6 Message Creation
Set the message defaults. Create a template and adjust the print parameters as
necessary.
Refer to the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide and the Linx 7300 How To … documents.
7 Operator/Supervisor Training
Carry out operator training.
Refer to the Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual, Chapter 8: ‘Training Course Guides’.
8 Password
Set the required password level.
Refer to the ‘Linx 7300 How To Change the System Setup’.
9 Documentation
Complete the Service/Install Report making sure that the customer signs the
report.
10 The ‘Printer Installation’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 146 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
24 Volts Alarm Beacon Installation (Printer Mounted)
Parts Required
FA61094 Alarm Beacon 6800
Procedure
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Loosely fit the Alarm Beacon Mounting Bracket to the Alarm Beacon Stalk
Assembly, in the correct orientation as shown in Figure 1, using two of the four
screws provided in the kit.
48173
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 147 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
24 Volts Alarm Beacon Fitting (Printer Mounted)
3 Fit the mounting bracket and stalk assembly to the two holes in the ink system vent
on the rear panel of the printer, using the two remaining screws provided in the kit
(Figure 2).
NOTE: Figure 2 shows a 6900 printer, but the fitting procedure for the alarm
beacon is the same on the 7300 printer.
69361
Alarm Beacon
Stalk Assembly
Mounting Bracket
clamp screws (x2)
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 148 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
24 Volts Alarm Beacon Fitting (Printer Mounted)
CAUTION: Printer Electrical Damage. Do not connect the ALARM OUTPUT connector of the
printer to the mains electrical supply or any other power source. Damage to the printer can
occur if this caution is ignored.
Figure 3. Alarm Setup Page — “3.12 Printhead Cover Off” Set to Constant
9 Remove the printhead cover tube and make sure that the alarm beacon flashes on
and off continuously.
10 Make sure that the System Event page is displayed with the warning message
“3.12 Printhead Cover Off”.
69363
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 149 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
24 Volts Alarm Beacon Fitting (Printer Mounted)
12 Make sure that the message “Printer Warnings Exist” is displayed in the bottom
box of the Printer Status area on the Print Monitor page.
69364
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 150 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Mains (VFC) External Alarm Conversion
Parts Required
FA71080 VFC Alarm Conversion
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
DVM (Digital Voltmeter)
Procedure
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 151 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Mains (VFC) External Alarm Conversion
12 Fit the three brass pillars, supplied in the kit, to the three terminals on the new
3-pin connector.
13 Fit the new connector through the standard rear panel plate; refit and tighten the
connector locking ring.
14 Refit the dust cap and retaining strip to the new connector.
15 Refit the Alarm PCB to the three pillars on the connector and secure using the three
new Nyloc nuts.
16 Refit the nut that secures the Alarm PCB to the supporting pillar.
17 Connect the new VFC (volt-free contact) Alarm Cableform to the Alarm PCB and
the IPM PCB (PL11).
18 Remove the warning label below the ALARM OUTPUT connector on the standard
rear panel plate (“Do Not Connect A Power Source To The Alarm Output”).
19 If a mains-powered alarm beacon is available, proceed with the ‘Mains-Powered
Alarm Test’. If a mains-powered alarm beacon is not available, proceed with the
‘DVM Test’.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 152 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Mains (VFC) External Alarm Conversion
24 Highlight the “3.12 Printhead Cover Off” warning message and press the
Constant key.
69362
Figure 1. Alarm Setup Page — “3.12 Printhead Cover Off” Set to Constant
25 Remove the printhead cover tube and make sure that the alarm beacon lights and
remains lit while the printhead cover tube is removed.
26 Make sure that the System Event page is displayed with the warning message
“3.12 Printhead Cover Off”.
69363
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 153 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Mains (VFC) External Alarm Conversion
28 Make sure that the message “Printer Warnings Exist” is displayed in the bottom
box of the Printer Status area on the Print Monitor page.
69364
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 154 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Mains (VFC) External Alarm Conversion
DVM Test
20 Switch on the printer.
21 Access the Alarm Setup page (Print Monitor > Line Setup > Alarm).
22 Highlight the “3.12 Printhead Cover Off” warning message and press the
Constant key.
69362
Figure 4. Alarm Setup Page — “3.12 Printhead Cover Off” Set to Constant
23 Set the DVM to the resistance range and connect it between pins L and N
(‘normally closed’ contacts) on the ALARM OUTPUT connector. The DVM should
indicate a short circuit.
24 Remove the printhead cover tube and make sure that the DVM indicates an open
circuit.
25 Make sure that the System Event page is displayed with the warning message
“3.12 Printhead Cover Off”.
69363
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 155 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Mains (VFC) External Alarm Conversion
27 Make sure that the message “Printer Warnings Exist” is displayed in the bottom
box of the Printer Status area on the Print Monitor page.
69364
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 156 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Positive Air Pump Installation
Parts Required
FA67050 Positive Air Upgrade Internal
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
FA940052 Tube Cutter Plastic 4 mm–14 mm
Procedure
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
4 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
5 Locate the coiled, yellow-striped positive air pipe. It is routed from the printhead
conduit entry point in the rear panel of the printer, through the ink system
enclosure and out through a grommet in the ink system enclosure wall to the
electronics area (see Figure 1).
6 Remove and discard the cable tie securing the coiled pipe, and neatly cut off the
protective end cap using the Tube Cutter.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 157 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Positive Air Pump Installation
7 Connect the pipe to the A1–C1 barb fitted to the short pipe on the pump assembly
(see magnified view in Figure 1).
NOTE: Figure 1 shows a 6900 printer, but the fitting procedure for the positive air
pump is the same on the 7300 printer.
69365
Yellow-striped
positive air pipe
To PL9 on the
IPM PCB
A1–C1 barb
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 158 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Positive Air Pump Installation
10 Tidy and secure the electrical cable and air supply pipe using the cable ties
supplied in the kit. Make sure that the electrical cable is routed clear of the pump
assembly’s body.
11 Switch on the printer.
12 Remove the printhead cover tube and check for airflow from the positive air pipe
outlet on the printhead (see Figure 2).
68144
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 159 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Positive Air Pump Installation
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 160 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Feed Valve Replacement
Parts Required
FA74160 Printhead Valve Assembly Mk7
comprising:
1 x 6800 Micro Valve Body
1 x O-ring
FA74219 Mk7 Printhead Valve Filter Assembly 15 µm (Ultima, Midi, Mini, and
Micro)
comprising:
1 x Feed Filter 15 µm
1 x O-ring
OR
FA74221 Mk7 Printhead Valve Filter Assembly 35 µm (Ultima plus and Midi plus)
comprising:
1 x Feed Filter 35 µm
1 x O-ring
Equipment Required
FA940052 Tube Cutter Plastic 4 mm–14 mm
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
Procedure
CAUTION: Contamination of the Printhead Feed Valve Components. Blockages and print
failures can occur if contamination is allowed to enter the printhead feed line. The following
procedure must be performed in a clean, dust-free environment, and a special Clean Room is
recommended. Maximum care must be taken when the feed valve assembly, filter and O-ring
are fitted. These components must not touch any fibres, and contact with the skin must be
prevented. Wear powder-free protective gloves during the procedure. If the standard
protective gloves that contain powder are worn, powder contamination can enter the nozzle
assembly.
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 161 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Feed Valve Replacement
2 Remove the one or two small cross head securing screw(s) from the printhead
upper cover (see Figure 1 below), and slide the cover back along the conduit to
expose the feed valve assembly.
Printhead
Upper Cover
68800
MIDI
Cross Head
Securing Screw(s) (x1 or x2)
68801
Feed Valve
Solenoid
Valve Assembly
Hexagonal-drive
Securing Screws
Feed Valve
Body
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 162 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Feed Valve Replacement
Valve Assembly
Knurled Connecting Nut Barb Connection
68803
Valve Solenoid
Valve Body
Valve Assembly
Hexagonal-drive
Securing Screws
O-ring Filter
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 163 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Feed Valve Replacement
CAUTION: Contamination from Dried Ink Deposits. Blockages and print failures can occur if
dried ink deposits are allowed to enter the filter housing. During the following process, be
very careful to make sure that ink deposits or build-up do not enter the filter housing.
11 Carefully remove the filter from its housing and discard it.
12 Carefully insert the new filter into its housing and make sure that the notches on
the filter are facing the inside of the valve mounting block. Take care not to
damage the filter when inserting it fully.
13 Refit the elbow supports to the ink feed pipe.
14 Fit the new O-ring (supplied in the spare parts pack FA74160) to the valve
mounting block.
15 Position the valve assembly onto the valve mounting block, and make sure that the
filter and O-ring are correctly seated. Secure the valve assembly using the two
hexagonal-drive screws. Tighten the screws until firm resistance is felt, then
tighten a further ¼ turn.
16 Slide the printhead upper cover back down the conduit into position, and make
sure that the cover does not trap any wires or pipes. Secure the cover using the
one or two small cross head screw(s).
17 The ‘Printhead Feed Valve Replacement’ maintenance instruction is now
completed.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 164 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Feed Valve Filter Replacement
Parts Required
FA74219 Mk7 Printhead Valve Filter Assembly 15 µm (Ultima, Midi, Mini, and
Micro)
comprising:
1 x Feed Filter 15 µm
1 x O-ring
OR
FA74221 Mk7 Printhead Valve Filter Assembly 35 µm (Ultima plus and Midi plus)
comprising:
1 x Feed Filter 35 µm
1 x O-ring
Equipment Required
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile Small 6–6.5 )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile Medium 7–7.5 ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile Large 8–8.5 )
Procedure
CAUTION: Contamination of the Printhead Feed Valve Components. Blockages and print
failures can occur if contamination is allowed to enter the printhead feed line. The following
procedure must be performed in a clean, dust-free environment, and a special Clean Room is
recommended. Maximum care must be taken when the feed valve assembly, filter and O-ring
are fitted. These components must not touch any fibres, and contact with the skin must be
prevented. Wear powder-free protective gloves during the procedure. If the standard
protective gloves that contain powder are worn, powder contamination can enter the nozzle
assembly.
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the one or two small cross head securing screw(s) from the printhead
upper cover (see Figure 1 below), and slide the cover back along the conduit to
expose the feed valve assembly.
Printhead
Upper Cover
68800
MIDI
Cross Head
Securing Screw(s) (x1 or x2)
Figure 1. Printhead Upper Cover and Securing Screw(s)
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 165 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Feed Valve Filter Replacement
3 Refer to Figure 2 and Figure 3 below for identification of the valve assembly parts
referred to in this procedure.
68801
Feed Valve
Solenoid
Valve Assembly
Hexagonal-drive
Securing Screws
Feed Valve
Body
Valve Assembly
Knurled Connecting Nut Barb Connection
68803
Valve Solenoid
Valve Body
Valve Assembly
Hexagonal-drive
Securing Screws
O-ring Filter
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 166 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Feed Valve Filter Replacement
4 Remove the two hexagonal-drive securing screws from the front face of the feed
valve assembly and carefully ease the assembly away from the valve mounting
block.
5 Carefully remove and discard the O-ring from the valve mounting block.
CAUTION: Contamination from Dried Ink Deposits. Blockages and print failures can occur if
dried ink deposits are allowed to enter the filter housing. During the following process, be
very careful to make sure that ink deposits or build-up do not enter the filter housing.
6 Carefully remove the filter from its housing and discard it.
7 Carefully insert the new filter into its housing and make sure that the notches on
the filter are facing the inside of the valve mounting block. Take care not to
damage the filter when inserting it fully.
8 Fit the new O-ring (supplied in the spare parts pack FA74219) to the valve
mounting block.
9 Position the valve assembly onto the valve mounting block, and make sure that the
filter and O-ring are correctly seated. Secure the valve assembly using the two
hexagonal-drive screws. Tighten the screws until firm resistance is felt, then
tighten a further ¼ turn.
10 Slide the printhead upper cover back down the conduit into position, and make
sure that the cover does not trap any wires or pipes. Secure the cover using the
one or two small cross head screw(s).
11 The ‘Printhead Feed Valve Filter Replacement’ maintenance instruction is now
completed.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 167 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Feed Valve Filter Replacement
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 168 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Correct Installation of Mk7 Printheads
Introduction
Correct installation and routing is critical to the life and reliability of the conduit. By
adhering to the following basic installation guidelines, the life of the conduit is significantly
increased.
The most important factor limiting the life of a conduit is the minimum bend radius it is
subjected to in an application. The recommendations are therefore to install the printhead
in a manner that maximizes this radius, and to make sure that the bend radius is never less
than the minimum.
This document is divided into three main topics, namely:
1. Printhead Choice (for a particular application)
2. Conduit Routing (for particular applications)
3. Printer Position
Topics 1 and 2 are further sub-divided into two categories, dealing with the dynamics of
the application, namely:
• Static applications. The printhead is fixed in position relative to the printer or product
line, and the product moved relative to it. A conveyor line is a typical example.
• Dynamic applications. The printhead is moved relative to a stationary product. A
printhead mounted on a traversing system to cross a multi-lane indexing line is a
typical example.
1 Printhead Choice
Linx Mk7 printheads are available in both straight and right-angled designs—it is
important to specify the correct one for the installation. The following diagrams illustrate
some of the factors to consider.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 169 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Correct Installation of Mk7 Printheads
AS168
AS169
AS170
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 170 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Correct Installation of Mk7 Printheads
AS171
AS172
2 Conduit Routing
• Do not force the conduit to take on a sharp bend.
• Leave a loop to take up movements on dynamic applications; use a 4-m conduit to help
achieve this.
• Support the conduit to stop it flopping around or making contact with other
machinery, but remember to allow access to the printhead for cleaning. Make sure that
there are cut-outs in guarding to prevent the conduit being crushed when the guards
are closed.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 171 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Correct Installation of Mk7 Printheads
The conduit is left to hang down The conduit is supported out of the
towards the production line way of the production line
AS174
The conduit will be crushed when the The conduit lies in a cut-out to prevent it
machine guard is closed being crushed when the guard is closed
AS175
The conduit is forced into a tight bend A conduit support prevents the conduit
over a sharp edge being bent over a sharp edge
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 172 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Correct Installation of Mk7 Printheads
AS176
The conduit is forced into a tight bend A conduit support prevents the conduit
round a sharp edge being bent round a sharp edge
The conduit is bent tighter than necessary Use a loop of conduit to take up the motion
when the printhead moves. This reduces over the greatest length of conduit. This
reliability improves reliability
AS178
The conduit is pulled tight to prevent it hitting The conduit is supported on rollers to prevent
the web below as the printhead moves it hitting the web below as the printhead moves
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 173 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Correct Installation of Mk7 Printheads
AS179
The conduit is twisted as the printhead The conduit is only bent as the printhead
moves. This reduces reliability moves. This improves reliability
3 Printer Installation
The printer must be installed so that the conduit is not bent sharply at the rear of the
printer. Always allow 150 mm clearance for the conduit to bend.
AS180
<150 mm >150 mm
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 174 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Changing the Orientation of Mk7 Right-Angled Printheads
Equipment Required
2.5 mm hexagon key
Introduction
The 2-metre and 4-metre Mk7 right-angled printheads have the facility to orientate the
right angle in any one of eight positions through 360° (that is, at 45° intervals). This allows
the printhead to be correctly installed in any given application, with the minimum strain
on the conduit due to bending. (See also the ‘Correct Installation of Mk7 Printheads’
maintenance instruction).
This maintenance instruction details the procedure for changing the orientation of the right
angle on Mk7 right-angled printheads.
Procedure
1 Support the printhead in the vertical position, preferably in a Linx Printhead
Mounting Assembly.
Referring to Figure 1
2 Remove the two Conduit Collar securing screws.
3 Unscrew and remove the four securing screws from the Right-Angle Adaptor Top
Section, and remove the Top Section.
Right-Angle Adaptor
—Top Section
Securing Screws
Right-Angle Adaptor
Top Section
Gasket
O-Ring
Conduit Collar
Conduit Collar
Securing Screws
Right-Angle
Orientation
Screw
AS181
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 175 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Changing the Orientation of Mk7 Right-Angled Printheads
Referring to Figure 2
4 Lift the conduit clear of the Right-Angle Adaptor Bottom Section and hold it in the
vertical position.
5 Unscrew and remove the Orientation Location Screw.
8 x orientation location
holes at 45° intervals
AS182
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 176 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Changing the Orientation of Mk7 Right-Angled Printheads
Referring to Figure 1
8 Lay the conduit straight back down in the Right-Angle Adaptor Bottom Section
making sure that it does not twist.
9 Refit the Right-Angle Adaptor Top Section and loosely refit the four securing
screws, making sure that the gasket is correctly seated.
10 Refit and tighten the two Conduit Collar securing screws, making sure that the O-
ring is correctly seated.
11 Fully tighten the four securing screws on the Right-Angle Adaptor Top Section.
12 The ‘Changing the Orientation of Mk7 Right-Angled Printheads’ maintenance
instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 177 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Changing the Orientation of Mk7 Right-Angled Printheads
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 178 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit Installation
Parts Required
FA67058 Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
Introduction
The purpose of the Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit is to remove the auto Power-Off
facility from the printer to allow it to be integrated into OEM applications. This means that
the power control for the printer is provided solely by the mains power supply switch on
the rear panel of the printer.
Procedure
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
4 Disconnect the Display PCB ribbon cable connectors from PL17 and PL21 on the
IPM PCB.
5 Disconnect the top cover’s earth lead from the push-on blade connector in the base
of the cabinet, and place the top cover safely to one side.
6 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 179 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit Installation
69366
Figure 1. Location of the Auto Power On/Off Connector PL20 on the IPM PCB
8 Disconnect the four connections on the Power On Switch at the front of the printer
(labelled ‘B’ in Figures 2 and 3).
69387
B
C
D
A
KEY
A Auto Power On/Off Cableform connector PL20
B Power On Switch
C Low Voltage Power Supply Unit connector
D Mains Power Supply Switch
Figure 2. Printer Rear View Showing the Auto Power On/Off Cableform Connections
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 180 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit Installation
KEY 69388 A
A Auto Power On/Off Cableform connector PL20
B Power On Switch
C Low Voltage Power Supply Unit connector
D Mains Power Supply Switch
D
Figure 3. Printer Front View Showing the Auto Power On/Off Cableform Connections
9 Disconnect the cableform’s two earth connections from the push-on blade
connectors adjacent to the Power On Switch.
10 Disconnect the cableform connector on the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit
(labelled ‘C’ in Figures 2 and 3).
11 Disconnect the cableform’s four connections (2 x brown and 2 x blue) on the
Mains Power Supply Switch at the rear of the printer, noting the colour coding of
these connections (labelled ‘D’ in Figures 2 and 3).
12 Disconnect the cableform’s three connections (brown, blue, and yellow and green)
from the Mains Filter located below the Mains Power Supply Switch, noting the
colour coding of these connections.
13 Remove the Auto Power On/Off cableform from the printer.
14 Remove the Power On Switch from the front of the printer by unscrewing its
retaining nut.
15 Insert the blanking plug supplied in the spares kit into the vacant hole and secure
with its retaining nut.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 181 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit Installation
Connecting the New Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Cableform (refer to Figure 4)
D
69389
KEY
C To Low Voltage Power Supply Unit connector
D To Mains Power Supply Switch
E To Mains Filter
F To push-on blade earth connectors adjacent to Power On Switch
G Power On Switch blanking plug and retaining nut
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 182 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit Installation
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 183 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit Installation
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 184 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Parallel I/O Interface Installation
Parts Required
FA67078 Parallel I/O Interface Upgrade Assembly
comprising:
Parallel I/O PCB Assembly
Screwlock x2
PCB Bracket
Snap Rivet x2
PCB Bracket M4 Securing Screw
USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable
Warning Label
FA72167 Alarm and Parallel I/O Options Plate
comprising:
Alarm and Parallel I/O Options Plate and Gasket
M4 Nyloc Nut x6
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
Antistatic Wrist Strap and Lead
Introduction
Linx 7300 printers can be fitted with a Parallel I/O Interface, which is available as an
accessory. It consists of an extra PCB and D-type connector on a mounting plate, which is
fitted to the rear panel of the printer. The accessory provides 8-off 24 V DC inputs and 8-off
24 V DC outputs. The interface can be used by the software in the printer for a variety of
applications, including:
• Selecting a message for printing from a list.
• Remote start and stop, and production line interlocks.
• Separate indications for warnings and faults.
This accessory allows the 7300 printer to interface easily with Programmable Logic
Controllers (PLCs) and similar machine controls.
The following procedure assumes that the printer is only fitted with the standard rear
panel plate.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 185 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Parallel I/O Interface Installation
Procedure
CAUTION: Static-Sensitive Devices. The PCBs contain static-sensitive devices. Take the
following antistatic precautions when PCBs are touched. Wear an antistatic wrist strap and
connect the lead to a good electrical earth. Always hold PCBs by their edges and do not touch
the components, printed circuit tracks or connector pins.
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
4 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
5 Disconnect the Display PCB ribbon cable connectors from PL17 and PL21 on the
IPM PCB.
6 Disconnect the top cover’s earth lead from the push-on blade connector in the base
of the cabinet, and place the top cover safely to one side.
7 Disconnect the 24 V Alarm Cableform from the IPM PCB (PL10).
8 Remove the six Nyloc nuts that secure the standard rear panel plate to the rear
panel of the printer. Retain the nuts.
9 Remove the standard rear panel plate and gasket (with the alarm connector still
fitted).
10 Remove and retain the two Nyloc nuts that secure the Alarm PCB to the back of
the ALARM OUTPUT connector.
11 Remove and retain the nut that secures the Alarm PCB to the supporting pillar.
12 Remove and retain the Alarm PCB.
13 Remove and retain the supporting pillar from the standard rear panel plate.
14 Remove the locking ring from the back of the 2-pin ALARM OUTPUT connector
and remove the connector from the standard rear panel plate. Retain the connector
and locking ring.
15 Fit the ALARM OUTPUT connector to the new Alarm and Parallel I/O options
plate. Refit the locking ring to the back of the 2-pin ALARM OUTPUT connector.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 186 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Parallel I/O Interface Installation
16 Fit the supporting pillar to the Alarm and Parallel I/O options plate.
17 Fit the Alarm PCB to the Alarm and Parallel I/O options plate.
18 Fit the nut that secures the Alarm PCB to the supporting pillar.
19 Fit the two Nyloc nuts that secure the Alarm PCB to the back of the ALARM
OUTPUT connector.
20 Fit the warning label below the ALARM OUTPUT connector on the outside of the
options plate.
21 Fit the Alarm and Parallel I/O options plate to the D-type connector (SK10) on the
Parallel I/O PCB using the two screwlocks.
22 Fit the PCB bracket to the solder side (underside) of the Parallel I/O PCB, at the
wider end of the board, using the two snap rivets. Push the rivets in from the
component side of the PCB.
23 Disconnect the Auto Power On/Off Cableform connector PL20 on the IPM PCB,
which is located at the top-left corner of the PCB as viewed from the component
side. Move the cableform to one side to give easy access to the options plate area.
24 Position the PCB and options plate assembly in the printer, with connector PL30
uppermost and the plate against the rear panel of the printer. Insert the studs
through the holes in the rear panel of the printer.
25 Loosely fit the M4 screw through the slot in the PCB bracket and into the hole in
the base of the cabinet. (Use the nearest of the two holes to the IPM PCB.)
26 Secure the PCB and options plate assembly to the rear panel of the printer using
the Nyloc nuts retained in step 8.
27 Tighten the M4 screw in the base of the cabinet.
28 Reconnect the 24 V Alarm Cableform to the IPM PCB (PL10).
29 Reconnect the Auto Power On/Off Cableform connector PL20 on the IPM PCB.
30 Connect the USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable to PL30 (labelled ‘IPM PCB’) on
the Parallel I/O PCB.
31 Connect the middle connector of the USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable to PL1
on the USB PCB.
32 Connect the other end of the USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable to PL14 on the
IPM PCB (location 3D and 4D—refer to the IPM PCB component locations
illustration in Chapter 3: Technical Description > Electronics and Software > IPM
PCB > Test Points and Links).
33 Reconnect the Display PCB ribbon cable connectors to PL17 and PL21 on the IPM
PCB.
34 Reconnect the top cover’s earth lead to the push-on blade connector in the base of
the cabinet.
35 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
36 Refit the top cover and secure the locking latch.
37 Refit the ink and solvent filler caps.
38 The ‘Parallel I/O Interface Installation’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 187 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Parallel I/O Interface Installation
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 188 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Conversion
Parts Required
FA67065 Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Upgrade Assembly
comprising:
Multi-Stage Alarm PCB Assembly
6-Way IP67 Buccaneer Plug Connector
6-Way IP67 Buccaneer Socket Connector
Screws x6
Brass Pillar
Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Cableform
FA72167 Alarm and Parallel I/O Options Plate
comprising:
Alarm and Parallel I/O Options Plate and Gasket
M4 Nyloc Nut x6
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
Introduction
The Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Upgrade provides up to four outputs that are used to control
multi-stage alarm beacons.
This accessory can only be used if the Parallel I/O Interface Upgrade accessory (FA67063)
has also been installed.
The following procedure assumes that the printer is fitted with the standard 24 volts
external alarm.
Procedure
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
4 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 189 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Conversion
5 Disconnect the Display PCB ribbon cable connectors from PL17 and PL21 on the
IPM PCB.
6 Disconnect the top cover’s earth lead from the push-on blade connector in the base
of the cabinet, and place the top cover safely to one side.
7 Disconnect the 24 V Alarm Cableform from the IPM PCB (PL10).
8 Remove the ALARM OUTPUT connector dust cap and unclip the retaining strip
from the connector; retain both items.
9 Remove the six Nyloc nuts that secure the standard rear panel plate to the rear
panel of the printer. Retain the nuts.
10 Remove the standard rear panel plate and gasket (with the alarm connector still
fitted). Retain the option plate for future reinstallation of the standard 24 V Alarm,
if required.
11 Fit the new supporting pillar to the new Alarm and Parallel I/O options plate.
12 Remove the locking ring from the new 6-pin ALARM OUTPUT plug connector and
insert the connector through the Alarm and Parallel I/O options plate. Make sure
that the gasket is in place on the connector before fitting it to the options plate.
13 Rotate the connector until the locating lug on the connector engages in the cut-out
in the options plate. It is most important to make sure that the connector is
correctly located on the options plate.
14 Refit and tighten the connector locking ring.
15 Fit the Multi-Stage Alarm PCB to the new ALARM OUTPUT connector as follows:
(a) Orientate the PCB as shown in Figure 1, with the component side of the PCB
facing towards you.
(b) Fit the six terminal screws, supplied in the kit, through the holes in the PCB.
(c) Align the threaded stud of the supporting pillar with the hole in the bottom left
corner of the PCB. Push the PCB onto the connector so that the connector
terminals are flush with PCB spring terminals.
(d) Screw the six terminal screws into the connector to secure the PCB.
(e) Refit the nut (that was retained earlier) to the threaded stud of the supporting
pillar, to secure the Alarm PCB.
69384
Location of the
six connector
terminal screws
PL1
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 190 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Conversion
16 Refit the dust cap and retaining strip to the new connector.
17 Fit the Alarm and Parallel I/O options plate to the D-type connector (SK10) on the
Parallel I/O PCB using the two screwlocks.
18 Fit the PCB bracket to the solder side (underside) of the Parallel I/O PCB, at the
wider end of the board, using the two snap rivets. Push the rivets in from the
component side of the PCB.
19 Disconnect the Auto Power On/Off Cableform connector PL20 on the IPM PCB,
which is located at the top-left corner of the PCB as viewed from the component
side. Move the cableform to one side to give easy access to the options plate area.
20 Position the PCB and options plate assembly in the printer, with connector PL30
uppermost and the plate against the rear panel of the printer. Insert the studs
through the holes in the rear panel of the printer.
21 Loosely fit the M4 screw through the slot in the PCB bracket and into the hole in
the base of the cabinet. (Use the nearest of the two holes to the IPM PCB.)
22 Secure the PCB and options plate assembly to the rear panel of the printer using
the Nyloc nuts retained in step 9.
23 Tighten the M4 screw in the base of the cabinet.
24 Connect the new Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Cableform to PL1 on the Multi-Stage
Alarm PCB and PL27 on the Parallel I/O PCB.
25 Reconnect the Auto Power On/Off Cableform connector PL20 on the IPM PCB.
26 Connect the USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable to PL30 (labelled ‘IPM PCB’) on
the Parallel I/O PCB.
27 Connect the middle connector of the USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable to PL1
on the USB PCB.
28 Connect the other end of the USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable to PL14 on the
IPM PCB (location 3D and 4D—refer to the IPM PCB component locations
illustration in Chapter 3: Technical Description > Electronics and Software > IPM
PCB > Test Points and Links).
29 Reconnect the Display PCB ribbon cable connectors to PL17 and PL21 on the IPM
PCB.
30 Reconnect the top cover’s earth lead to the push-on blade connector in the base of
the cabinet.
31 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
32 Refit the top cover and secure the locking latch.
33 Refit the ink and solvent filler caps.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 191 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Conversion
34 Connect the multi-stage alarm input cable to the 6-Way IP67 Buccaneer Socket
Connector in accordance with the details in the following table.
69391
MULTI-STAGE ALARM (VFC) CONNECTOR
Signal Pin
5
N/O (Normally Open) 2 5
6-Way Plug Connector
N/C (Normally Closed) 1 6
on the Printer
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 192 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Conversion
Parts Required
FA67064 Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Upgrade Assembly
comprising:
Multi-Stage Alarm PCB Assembly
7-Way IP67 Buccaneer Socket Connector
Screws x6
Brass Pillar
Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Cableform
Warning Label
FA67066 7-Way IP67 Buccaneer Plug Connector
FA72167 Alarm and Parallel I/O Options Plate
comprising:
Alarm and Parallel I/O Options Plate and Gasket
M4 Nyloc Nut x6
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
Introduction
The Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Upgrade provides up to four outputs that are used to control
multi-stage alarm beacons.
This accessory can only be used if the Parallel I/O Interface Upgrade accessory (FA67063)
has also been installed.
The following procedure assumes that the printer is fitted with the standard 24 volts
external alarm.
Procedure
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
4 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 193 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Conversion
5 Disconnect the Display PCB ribbon cable connectors from PL17 and PL21 on the
IPM PCB.
6 Disconnect the top cover’s earth lead from the push-on blade connector in the base
of the cabinet, and place the top cover safely to one side.
7 Disconnect the 24 V Alarm Cableform from the IPM PCB (PL10).
8 Remove the ALARM OUTPUT connector dust cap and unclip the retaining strip
from the connector; retain both items.
9 Remove the six Nyloc nuts that secure the standard rear panel plate to the rear
panel of the printer. Retain the nuts.
10 Remove the standard rear panel plate and gasket (with the alarm connector still
fitted). Retain the option plate for future reinstallation of the standard 24 V Alarm,
if required.
11 Fit the new supporting pillar to the new Alarm and Parallel I/O options plate.
12 Remove the locking ring from the new 7-pin ALARM OUTPUT socket connector
and insert the connector through the Alarm and Parallel I/O options plate. Make
sure that the gasket is in place on the connector before fitting it to the options plate.
13 Rotate the connector until the locating lug on the connector engages in the cut-out
in the options plate. It is most important to make sure that the connector is
correctly located on the options plate.
14 Refit and tighten the connector locking ring.
15 Fit the Multi-Stage Alarm PCB to the new ALARM OUTPUT connector as follows:
(a) Orientate the PCB as shown in Figure 1, with the component side of the PCB
facing towards you.
(b) Fit the six terminal screws, supplied in the kit, through the holes in the PCB.
(c) Align the threaded stud of the supporting pillar with the hole in the bottom left
corner of the PCB. Push the PCB onto the connector so that the connector
terminals are flush with PCB spring terminals.
(d) Screw the six terminal screws into the connector to secure the PCB.
(e) Refit the nut (that was retained earlier) to the threaded stud of the supporting
pillar, to secure the Alarm PCB.
69384
Location of the
six connector
terminal screws
PL1
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 194 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Conversion
16 Refit the dust cap and retaining strip to the new connector.
17 Fit the warning label below the ALARM OUTPUT connector on the outside of the
options plate.
18 Fit the Alarm and Parallel I/O options plate to the D-type connector (SK10) on the
Parallel I/O PCB using the two screwlocks.
19 Fit the PCB bracket to the solder side (underside) of the Parallel I/O PCB, at the
wider end of the board, using the two snap rivets. Push the rivets in from the
component side of the PCB.
20 Disconnect the Auto Power On/Off Cableform connector PL20 on the IPM PCB,
which is located at the top-left corner of the PCB as viewed from the component
side. Move the cableform to one side to give easy access to the options plate area.
21 Position the PCB and options plate assembly in the printer, with connector PL30
uppermost and the plate against the rear panel of the printer. Insert the studs
through the holes in the rear panel of the printer.
22 Loosely fit the M4 screw through the slot in the PCB bracket and into the hole in
the base of the cabinet. (Use the nearest of the two holes to the IPM PCB.)
23 Secure the PCB and options plate assembly to the rear panel of the printer using
the Nyloc nuts retained in step 9.
24 Tighten the M4 screw in the base of the cabinet.
25 Connect the new Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Cableform to PL1 on the Multi-Stage
Alarm PCB and PL29 on the Parallel I/O PCB.
26 Reconnect the Auto Power On/Off Cableform connector PL20 on the IPM PCB.
27 Connect the USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable to PL30 (labelled ‘IPM PCB’) on
the Parallel I/O PCB.
28 Connect the middle connector of the USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable to PL1
on the USB PCB.
29 Connect the other end of the USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable to PL14 on the
IPM PCB (location 3D and 4D—refer to the IPM PCB component locations
illustration in Chapter 3: Technical Description > Electronics and Software > IPM
PCB > Test Points and Links).
30 Reconnect the Display PCB ribbon cable connectors to PL17 and PL21 on the IPM
PCB.
31 Reconnect the top cover’s earth lead to the push-on blade connector in the base of
the cabinet.
32 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
33 Refit the top cover and secure the locking latch.
34 Refit the ink and solvent filler caps.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 195 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Conversion
35 Connect the multi-stage alarm input cable to the 7-Way IP67 Buccaneer Plug
Connector (FA67066) in accordance with the details in the following table.
69392
MULTI-STAGE ALARM (24 V) CONNECTOR
Signal Pin
Alarm 1 1
Alarm 2 2
5
Alarm 3 3 6 4
7
24 V 4
1 3
Not used 5 2
Alarm 4 6
7-Way Socket Connector
on the Printer
Not used 7
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 196 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Dual Alarm Installation
Parts Required
FA67077 Dual Alarm Upgrade Assembly
comprising:
VFC Alarm PCB Assembly
3-Way IP65 Buccaneer Plug Connector
3-Way IP65 Buccaneer Socket Connector
Pillar x1
M4 Nyloc Nut x9
Dual Alarm Options Plate
Connector Plastic IP67 Dust Cap
VFC Alarm Cableform
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
Antistatic Wrist Strap and Lead
Introduction
Linx 7300 printers are fitted with a single 24 V alarm output as standard. The Dual Alarm
Upgrade allows an additional VFC alarm to be connected to the printer. Therefore, the
printer can control two alarm outputs (24 V and VFC).
NOTE: A configuration code is required to enable the second alarm in the software. When
enabled, Alarm 2 is available on the Alarm page (Print Monitor > Line Setup >
Alarm).
Procedure
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
4 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
5 Disconnect the Display PCB ribbon cable connectors from PL17 and PL21 on the
IPM PCB.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 197 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Dual Alarm Installation
6 Disconnect the top cover’s earth lead from the push-on blade connector in the base
of the cabinet, and place the top cover safely to one side.
7 Disconnect the 24 V Alarm Cableform from the IPM PCB (PL10).
8 Remove the six Nyloc nuts that secure the standard rear panel plate to the rear
panel of the printer. Retain the nuts.
9 Remove the standard rear panel plate and gasket (with the alarm connector still
fitted).
10 Remove and retain the two Nyloc nuts that secure the Alarm PCB to the back of
the ALARM OUTPUT connector.
11 Remove and retain the nut that secures the Alarm PCB to the supporting pillar.
12 Remove and retain the Alarm PCB.
13 Remove and retain the supporting pillar from the standard rear panel plate.
14 Remove the locking ring from the back of the 2-pin ALARM OUTPUT connector
and remove the connector from the standard rear panel plate. Retain the connector
and locking ring.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 198 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Dual Alarm Installation
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 199 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Dual Alarm Installation
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 200 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ethernet Interface Installation
Parts Required
FA67079 Ethernet RJ45 Connector Socket Assembly
comprising:
RJF544 Ethernet Metal Connector Socket
RJF544 Ethernet Connector Gasket
Screw x4
Ethernet Patch Lead
RJF544 Ethernet Connector Plastic IP67 Dust Cap
Warning label
FA72166 Alarm and Ethernet Options Plate
comprising:
Alarm and Ethernet Options Plate and Gasket
M4 Nyloc Nut x6
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
Introduction
Linx 7300 printers can be fitted with an Ethernet capability, which is available as an
accessory. It consists of a patch lead that connects the IPM PCB to a connector that is fitted
to a mounting plate on the rear panel of the printer.
This accessory allows the 7300 printer to be connected to a standard Ethernet network or
directly to a local PC.
The following procedure assumes that the printer is only fitted with the standard rear
panel plate.
Procedure
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
4 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 201 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ethernet Interface Installation
5 Disconnect the Display PCB ribbon cable connectors from PL17 and PL21 on the
IPM PCB.
6 Disconnect the top cover’s earth lead from the push-on blade connector in the base
of the cabinet, and place the top cover safely to one side.
7 Disconnect the 24 V Alarm Cableform from the IPM PCB (PL10).
8 Remove the six Nyloc nuts that secure the standard rear panel plate to the rear
panel of the printer. Retain the nuts.
9 Remove the standard rear panel plate and gasket (with the alarm connector still
fitted).
10 Remove and retain the two Nyloc nuts that secure the Alarm PCB to the back of
the ALARM OUTPUT connector.
11 Remove and retain the nut that secures the Alarm PCB to the supporting pillar.
12 Remove and retain the Alarm PCB.
13 Remove and retain the supporting pillar from the standard rear panel plate.
14 Remove the locking ring from the back of the 2-pin ALARM OUTPUT connector
and remove the connector from the standard rear panel plate. Retain the connector
and locking ring.
15 Fit the ALARM OUTPUT connector to the new Alarm and Ethernet options plate.
Refit the locking ring to the back of the 2-pin ALARM OUTPUT connector.
16 Fit the supporting pillar to the Alarm and Ethernet options plate.
17 Fit the Alarm PCB to the Alarm and Ethernet options plate.
18 Fit the nut that secures the Alarm PCB to the supporting pillar.
19 Fit the two Nyloc nuts that secure the Alarm PCB to the back of the ALARM
OUTPUT connector.
20 Fit the warning label below the ALARM OUTPUT connector on the outside of the
options plate.
21 Fit the Ethernet connector to the Alarm and Ethernet options plate as follows (refer
to Figure 1):
(a) Fit the Ethernet connector gasket to the inside mating face on the Ethernet
connector.
(b) Insert the miniature PCB end of the connector through the hole in the Alarm
and Ethernet options plate from the outside face of the plate.
(c) Orientate the connector as shown in Figure 1, with the miniature PCB of the
connector facing down.
(d) Fit the four screws, supplied in the kit, to secure the connector to the options
plate.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 202 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ethernet Interface Installation
69385
Insert this end of the
connector through Fit the gasket to this
the Ethernet option mating face of the
plate from the outside connector
face of the plate
Miniature PCB
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 203 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Ethernet Interface Installation
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 204 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Combined Ethernet & Parallel I/O Interfaces Installation
Parts Required
FA67079 Ethernet RJ45 Connector Socket Assembly
comprising:
RJF544 Ethernet Metal Connector Socket
RJF544 Ethernet Connector Gasket
Screw x4
Ethernet Patch Lead
RJF544 Ethernet Connector Plastic IP67 Dust Cap
FA67078 Parallel I/O Interface Upgrade Assembly
comprising:
Parallel I/O PCB Assembly
Screwlock x2
PCB Bracket
Snap Rivet x2
PCB Bracket M4 Securing Screw
USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable
FA72168 Alarm, Parallel I/O and Ethernet Options Plate
comprising:
Alarm, Parallel I/O and Ethernet Options Plate and Gasket
M4 Nyloc Nut x6
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
Antistatic Wrist Strap and Lead
Introduction
The Alarm, Parallel I/O and Ethernet Options Plate (FA72168) must be used in the
following procedure to install the combined Ethernet and Parallel I/O Interface options.
The following procedure assumes that the printer is only fitted with the standard rear
panel plate.
Ethernet
Linx 7300 printers can be fitted with an Ethernet capability, which is available as an
accessory. It consists of a patch lead that connects the IPM PCB to a connector that is fitted
to a mounting plate on the rear panel of the printer.
This accessory allows the 7300 printer to be connected to a standard Ethernet network or
directly to a local PC.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 205 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Combined Ethernet & Parallel I/O Interfaces Installation
Parallel I/O
Linx 7300 printers can be fitted with a Parallel I/O Interface, which is available as an
accessory. It consists of an extra PCB and D-type connector on a mounting plate, which is
fitted to the rear panel of the printer. The accessory provides 8-off 24 V DC inputs and 8-off
24 V DC outputs. The interface can be used by the software in the printer for a variety of
applications, including:
• Selecting a message for printing from a list.
• Remote start and stop, and production line interlocks.
• Separate indications for warnings and faults.
This accessory allows the 7300 printer to interface easily with Programmable Logic
Controllers (PLCs) and similar machine controls.
Procedure
CAUTION: Static-Sensitive Devices. The PCBs contain static-sensitive devices. Take the
following antistatic precautions when PCBs are touched. Wear an antistatic wrist strap and
connect the lead to a good electrical earth. Always hold PCBs by their edges and do not touch
the components, printed circuit tracks or connector pins.
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
4 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
5 Disconnect the Display PCB ribbon cable connectors from PL17 and PL21 on the
IPM PCB.
6 Disconnect the top cover’s earth lead from the push-on blade connector in the base
of the cabinet, and place the top cover safely to one side.
7 Disconnect the 24 V Alarm Cableform from the IPM PCB (PL10).
8 Remove the six Nyloc nuts that secure the standard rear panel plate to the rear
panel of the printer. Retain the nuts.
9 Remove the standard rear panel plate and gasket (with the alarm connector still
fitted).
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 206 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Combined Ethernet & Parallel I/O Interfaces Installation
10 Remove and retain the two Nyloc nuts that secure the Alarm PCB to the back of
the ALARM OUTPUT connector.
11 Remove and retain the nut that secures the Alarm PCB to the supporting pillar.
12 Remove and retain the Alarm PCB.
13 Remove and retain the supporting pillar from the standard rear panel plate.
14 Remove the locking ring from the back of the 2-pin ALARM OUTPUT connector
and remove the connector from the standard rear panel plate. Retain the connector
and locking ring.
15 Fit the ALARM OUTPUT connector to the new Alarm, Parallel I/O and Ethernet
options plate. Refit the locking ring to the back of the 2-pin ALARM OUTPUT
connector.
16 Fit the supporting pillar to the Alarm, Parallel I/O and Ethernet options plate.
17 Fit the Alarm PCB to the Alarm, Parallel I/O and Ethernet options plate.
18 Fit the nut that secures the Alarm PCB to the supporting pillar.
19 Fit the two Nyloc nuts that secure the Alarm PCB to the back of the ALARM
OUTPUT connector.
20 Fit the warning label below the ALARM OUTPUT connector on the outside of the
options plate.
21 Fit the Ethernet connector to the Alarm, Parallel I/O and Ethernet options plate
(FA72168) as follows (refer to Figure 1):
(a) Fit the Ethernet connector gasket to the inside mating face of the Ethernet
connector.
(b) Insert the miniature PCB end of the connector through the hole in the Alarm,
Parallel I/O and Ethernet options plate from the outside face of the plate.
(c) Orientate the connector as shown in Figure 1, with the miniature PCB on the
connector facing down.
(d) Fit the four screws, supplied in the kit, to secure the connector to the options
plate.
69385
Insert this end of the
connector through Fit the gasket to this
the Ethernet option mating face of the
plate from the outside connector
face of the plate
Miniature PCB
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 207 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Combined Ethernet & Parallel I/O Interfaces Installation
22 Fit the Alarm, Parallel I/O and Ethernet options plate to the D-type connector
(SK10) on the Parallel I/O PCB using the two screwlocks.
23 Fit the PCB bracket to the component side of the Parallel I/O PCB, at the wider end
of the board, using the two snap rivets. Push the rivets in from the component side
of the PCB.
24 Disconnect the Auto Power On/Off Cableform connector PL20 on the IPM PCB,
which is located at the top-left corner of the PCB as viewed from the component
side. Move the cableform to one side to give easy access to the options plate area.
25 Position the PCB and options plate assembly in the printer, with connector PL30
uppermost and the plate against the rear panel of the printer. Insert the studs
through the holes in the rear panel of the printer.
26 Loosely fit the M4 screw through the slot in the PCB bracket and into the hole in
the base of the cabinet. (Use the nearest of the two holes to the IPM PCB.)
27 Secure the PCB and options plate assembly to the rear panel of the printer using
the six Nyloc nuts retained in step 8. Fit the retaining strip of the Ethernet
connector dust cap to one of the screws or threaded studs.
28 Tighten the M4 screw in the base of the cabinet.
29 Reconnect the 24 V Alarm Cableform to the IPM PCB (PL10).
30 Reconnect the Auto Power On/Off Cableform connector PL20 on the IPM PCB.
31 Connect the USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable to PL30 (labelled ‘IPM PCB’) on
the Parallel I/O PCB.
32 Connect the middle connector of the USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable to PL1
on the USB PCB.
33 Connect the other end of the USB and Parallel I/O Interface Cable to PL14 on the
IPM PCB (location 3D and 4D—refer to the IPM PCB component locations
illustration in Chapter 3: Technical Description > Electronics and Software > IPM
PCB > Test Points and Links).
34 Connect the Ethernet patch lead to the Ethernet connector.
35 Connect the other end of the Ethernet patch lead to SK9 on the IPM PCB (location
2C—refer to the IPM PCB component locations illustration in Chapter 3: Technical
Description > Electronics and Software > IPM PCB > Test Points and Links).
36 Fit the Ethernet connector dust cap.
37 Reconnect the Display PCB ribbon cable connectors to PL17 and PL21 on the IPM
PCB.
38 Reconnect the top cover’s earth lead to the push-on blade connector in the base of
the cabinet.
39 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
40 Refit the top cover and secure the locking latch.
41 Refit the ink and solvent filler caps.
42 The ‘Combined Ethernet and Parallel I/O Interfaces Installation’ maintenance
instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 208 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures
Equipment Required
Desktop or laptop PC running Microsoft® Windows® 2000 or XP
Professional.
System requirements: Pentium® II 450 MHz; 128 MB of RAM; CD-ROM
drive; an available COM port; 256 colour, 800 x 600-pixel display; 200 MB
of disc space; additional 25 MB of disc space for each Linx Sync system
software file (if downloaded from ExtraLinx), and up to 2 MB for each
backup file.
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
Antistatic Wrist Strap and Lead
FA67059 6800(SP) and 6900 Reboot Kit, comprising:
FA75038 6800(SP)/6900 Boot PROM Set, comprising:
6800(SP)/6900 Boot PROM (A-6-8-056 IPM IC62)
FA63033 RS232 PC Cable IP67 2-metre
Introduction
Linx Sync v4.0 is compatible with 6900 and 7300 System Software and backward
compatible with all versions of 6800 System Software. In addition, 6800 data can be backed
up and upgraded from any version up to the latest version of System Software.
Linx Sync v4.0 is compatible with the Boot PROMs issued with Linx Sync v2.0 and 6800
v1.6 System Software.
Linx Sync v4.0 is compatible with the Boot PROMs issued with Linx Sync v2.1 and 6800
v1.7 System Software.
Linx Sync v4.0 is compatible with the Boot PROMs issued with Linx Sync v3.0 and 6800
v2.0 System Software.
The table below shows the compatibility issues.
v3.1 69511
Linx Sync v1.2 Linx Sync v2.1 Linx Sync v3.0 Linx Sync v4.0
v1.2 Boot PROMs Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
v2.0 Boot PROMs Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible
v3.0 Boot PROMs Not supported Not supported Compatible Compatible
.lsf file format Not supported Supported Supported Supported
.mot file format Supported Supported Supported Supported
Backup and Restore Not supported Supported Supported Supported
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 209 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures
IMPORTANT:
1. The printer must be in the Idle state (that is, not printing) before any of the
following procedures can be carried out.
2. Some PC screen savers can severely impact the Linx Sync software by causing
programming problems if they are running at the same time. It is strongly
recommended that any screen savers and any power saving features are disabled
before starting the programming, backing up or transferring procedures.
Procedures
This maintenance instruction includes the following procedures:
• Software Programming—Normal.
• Software Programming—Corrupt/Faulty Software.
• Backing Up and Restoring Data.
• Transferring Data.
The first programming procedure (‘Software Programming—Normal’) details the normal
procedure for programming a printer with the system software from a PC in the following
circumstances:
• When upgrading the 7300 System Software (that is, installing a new version of system
software in place of a previous version).
• When the IPM PCB is replaced with a board that does not have 7300 System Software
installed.
The second programming procedure (‘Software Programming—Corrupt/Faulty
Software’) uses a PROM to copy software onto the printer that is then used for
programming the printer. This procedure is to be used in the following circumstances:
• When the system software installed on the printer is corrupt and Linx Sync does not
recognize the printer. More specifically, this would be to rectify a fatal software
corruption or a total software failure, which cannot be cleared by switching the printer
off and then back on (rebooting).
• When a printer is new and has no software installed, or when an IPM PCB is fitted that
has no software installed.
A ‘Failures While Programming’ problem solving guide is also provided at the end of the
two programming procedures.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 210 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures
Software Programming—Normal
NOTE: Only one printer can be programmed at a time.
1 Make sure that the printer is switched off at the mains electrical supply.
2 Connect the RS232 interface cable between the PC and the RS232 INTERFACE
connector on the rear panel of the printer.
3 Switch on the printer and the PC. Wait until the printer has carried out the startup
checks and the Welcome screen is displayed.
4 Make sure that the communications protocol is set to RPC (Print Monitor > Menu
> Setup > Communications > Protocol > RS232 Protocol).
NOTE: If it is necessary to change the protocol to RPC, remember to reset it to its
original setting at the end of this procedure.
5 Download the Linx Sync v4.0 software and the latest version of Linx 7300 System
Software from ExtraLinx (Linx’s Extranet site) to the PC.
IMPORTANT: The Linx Sync Service Tool must never be copied to a customer’s PC. It
must only be used by Linx and Linx Distributor maintenance
technicians. Unauthorized use may result in loss of printer data.
6 Double click the ‘Linx Sync.exe’ file. (If required, a shortcut to the application can
be made now and placed on the desktop.)
7 All available COM ports are displayed in the left pane of the Linx Sync window,
with a ‘+’ symbol next to each one that has a printer connected to it. Click a COM
port’s ‘+’ symbol to reveal the connected printer, which is identified by its UNIC
code or “Printer Ready for Download”.
69512
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 211 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures
8 Use one of the following three methods to program a printer with system
software (the system software file has an ‘.lsf’ file extension, for example
‘6900v3.1.lsf’):
• Drag and drop the system software file onto the printer in the left pane.
69513
69514
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 212 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures
• Select the printer in the left pane. On the File menu, click Download, which
displays the Open dialog box:
(a) Browse for the system software file and select it.
(b) Click the Open button to start the programming process.
69515
Figure 5. Downloading the System Software File Using the Download Menu Command
When programming has started, if the printer already has software installed, the
option is given to maintain the store during the programming process.
Maintaining the store simply backs up stored items (that is, messages, logos and
all configuration data, including calibration values and configuration codes) to the
PC before software installation, and then restores the data after software
installation. The following message dialog box is displayed.
69516
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 213 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures
9 Click the Yes button to restore the store when the software installation is
complete, or click the No button if you no longer wish to maintain the store.
A dialog box is displayed during the programming process, which shows the
progress of the software installation. It displays the total size of the file being
installed and how much has been installed so far. A progress bar also displays the
progress pictorially.
69517
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 214 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures
CAUTION: Static-Sensitive Devices. The PCBs contain static-sensitive devices. Take the
following antistatic precautions when PCBs are touched. Wear an antistatic wrist strap and
connect the lead to a good electrical earth. Always hold PCBs by their edges and do not touch
the components, printed circuit tracks or connector pins.
1 Make sure that the printer is switched off at the mains electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
4 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
NOTE: Make sure that you have the latest version of the 6800(SP)/6900 Boot PROM Set
(FA75038).
5 Fit the 6800(SP)/6900 Boot PROM (A-6-8-056) to the IPM PCB socket IC62.
6 Fit link LK5 to the IPM PCB.
7 Switch on the printer.
8 Wait approximately 25 seconds while the reboot software is copied to the PCB. On
completion of the reboot, the LEDs adjacent to LK5 on the IPM PCB scroll in sequence.
9 Switch off the printer.
10 Remove link LK5 from the IPM PCB.
11 Remove the Boot PROM from the IPM PCB.
12 Download the system software as described in steps 1 to 12 of the ‘Software
Programming—Normal’ procedure. Note that in this circumstance the Welcome
screen is not displayed as stated in step 3, but the indication to continue from step
4 is the LEDs adjacent to LK5 scrolling.
13 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
14 Refit the top cover and secure the locking latch.
15 Refit the ink and solvent filler caps.
16 Switch on the printer.
17 The ‘Software Programming—Corrupt/Faulty Software’ procedure is now
complete and the printer is ready for use.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 215 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures
Restarting Programming
If programming fails and cannot be restarted, begin the programming again.
If the LEDs on the IPM PCB are not flashing, the first step is to prepare the printer for
programming using the Boot PROMs as detailed in the procedure, ‘Software
Programming—Corrupt/Faulty Software’.
If the store was maintained during the previous programming, a message dialog box is
displayed asking if you wish to maintain that store.
69518
Figure 8. “Maintain the store backed up last time?” Message Dialog Box
Click the Yes button to restore the store when the programming is complete, or click the
No button if you no longer wish to maintain the store.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 216 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures
Backing Up
The backup files are stored in a default base directory (also known as a folder) called
‘C:\backup’, but this directory can be changed if required. If you wish to change the base
directory, carry out step 1 first; if not, proceed to step 2.
1 To change the base directory: on the Setup menu, click Backup Directory, which
displays the Backup Directory dialog box.
69519
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 217 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures
69520
69521
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 218 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures
Restoring
NOTES:
1. If a backup file was taken from a printer that has an earlier version of system
software than the printer it is being restored to, the data items (see NOTE 2 below)
being restored are upgraded as necessary. For example, if a 6900 printer with v3.7
System Software was backed up, and then the backup file is restored to a 7300
printer with v4.1 System Software, data items in the backup file are upgraded to
work with v4.1.
2. When a backup file from a 6800 printer is restored to a 6900 or 7300 printer, Linx
Sync v4.0 only upgrades messages, logos and sequences data items. Setup data is
not maintained.
1 In the left pane of the Linx Sync window, select the printer to restore a backup to.
2 On the File menu, click Restore, which displays the Select Backup File dialog box
containing a list of backup files for the selected printer.
69522
Transferring Data
Data can be transferred between one printer and another, between a printer and a backup
file, and between a printer and a PC.
Transferring data is achieved by using either copy and paste, or drag and drop methods.
NOTE: As with backing up and restoring, a store item copied from one printer to another
is upgraded according to the versions of system software on the printers. See
NOTE at the beginning of the procedure, ‘Restoring’.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 219 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures
69523
2 To transfer one or more data types from a printer to a backup, copy them from the
printer and paste them to the backup, or drag them from the printer onto the
backup, as shown in the following screen.
69524
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 220 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 221 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures
Transferring from a PC
Data can be transferred from a PC to a printer or a backup.
1 To transfer one or more data items from a PC, copy them from the explorer
application and paste them to the destination, or drag them from the explorer
application onto the destination, as shown in the following screen.
69527
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 222 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
MidiEC Printhead Cleaning
Equipment Required
FA69034 Cleaning Swab Pack
FA900003 Solvent Cleaning Bottle
FA900005 Beaker 0.25 Litre
FA999004 Hand Cleaner Reinolen, 100 ml Tube
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile (small) )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile (medium) ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile (large) )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Food Grade Solvent, 5L
Introduction
For trouble-free operation, the printhead must be kept free of any ink build-up or moisture.
The following cleaning procedure is intended to be used for weekly cleaning, and after any
uncontrolled shutdown (for example, power failure while the jet is running).
A cleaning kit is available from Linx—order as FA69035, 6800EC and 6900 FG Cleaning Kit.
This contains a cleaning swab pack, solvent cleaning bottle, beaker for waste solvent, hand
cleaning cream, nitrile gloves and safety spectacles.
Procedure
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 223 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
MidiEC Printhead Cleaning
CAUTION: Printhead Damage. Extended contact with solvent can damage the printhead. Do
not put the printhead into solvent to clean it and do not use an ultrasonic bath. These
incorrect methods can cause damage to the printhead and can make your warranty invalid.
CAUTION: Printhead Damage. Only the correct Linx food grade solvent for the ink must be
used with the cleaning swabs supplied with the cleaning kit. The use of any other materials or
fluid can cause damage to the printer and make the Food Grade status invalid.
CAUTION: Print Obstructions. Do not dry the printhead with a cloth or any other material,
because these items can leave fibres that can cause obstructions to the ink jet.
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the printhead cover tube.
3 Mount the printhead on a washstation, or hold the printhead over a beaker or
suitable container.
4 Remove the dried ink by gently squirting the correct Linx food grade solvent onto
the printhead area shown in Figure 1. Use short bursts, allowing the ink to
dissolve between bursts. Repeat the solvent application until all (or most) of the
ink is removed.
68754
MIDI 62 EC
WASH THIS
AREA ONLY
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 224 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
MidiEC Printhead Cleaning
5 Squirt more solvent onto the components shown circled in Figure 1. While they
are still wet, use the foam cleaning swabs to gently remove any ink deposits from
the components, as shown in Figure 2.
68780
MIDI 62 EC
THOROUGHLY
CLEAN
ALL THESE
COMPONENTS
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 225 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
MidiEC Printhead Cleaning
6 Pay particular attention to the printhead components and parts that are identified
in Figure 3.
A
68711
D E
Figure 3. Identification of the Printhead Components
• Charge Electrode (A).
• EHT plate (C)—paying particular attention to the underside of the EHT plate.
• EHT plate mounting pillars (B).
• Deflector and Phase Plate (E)—paying particular attention to the blue face
plate (D).
• Deflector and Phase Plate mounting pillars (F)—paying particular attention to
the sides facing the EHT plate.
• PCB—clean only the area circled in Figure 2.
7 Continue using the solvent and cleaning swabs until any remaining ink deposits
are removed and the components and PCB are clean.
8 Allow a minimum of 10 minutes for the printhead to dry completely before
starting the printer (this may take up to 20 minutes on a cold day). This is
important as the printer may fail on startup if the printhead is not completely dry.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 226 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
MidiEC Printhead Cleaning
9 Wash the inside of the printhead cover tube with the correct Linx food grade
solvent , as shown in Figure 4, until all ink is removed. Use the cleaning swabs,
where possible, to remove ink deposits that do not immediately wash off.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 227 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
MidiEC Printhead Cleaning
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 228 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Dynamic Flow Control Module Replacement
Parts Required
FA67074 Dynamic Flow Control
FA74275 DFC/Printhead Signal Wire Connector
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
FA940052 Tube Cutter Plastic 4 mm–14 mm
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile (small) )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile (medium) ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile (large) )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Introduction
The Dynamic Flow Control (DFC) option is a factory-fit module that is installed in the ink
system enclosure. The module replaces the function of the standard gutter restrictor in the
printhead gutter line.
This maintenance instruction describes only the replacement procedure for a DFC module
that has a fault. The DFC option cannot be retrofitted, because a Configuration Code is
required to enable the DFC software control, which is entered during manufacturing.
If the printhead is replaced on a printer that has the DFC module fitted (a 7300 Solver
printer), refer to the replacement procedure in the ‘Printhead Replacement (Printer with
DFC)’ maintenance instruction.
Procedure
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the mains
electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
4 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
5 Place absorbent, lint-free paper towel under the in-line A1 barb connector in the
gutter return line and the 3-way fluid connector to contain any ink that might be
spilt during the following process.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 229 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Dynamic Flow Control Module Replacement
6 Identify the pipe labelled “GUTTER” on the DFC module. Cut the pipe off the in-
line barb connection in the gutter return line from the printhead, as shown in
Figure 1. Cut the pipe as close as possible to the barb connection and use the Tube
Cutter to make sure that the pipe is cut cleanly and straight. The gutter line must
be cut on the printhead side of the in-line A1 barb connector, leaving the barb
connector in the end of the gutter line to the DFC module.
69626
Printhead
conduit
In-line A1
barb connector
P/HD CONNECTOR
DFC Module
Cut the
pipe here GUTTER
DFC module
cableform
B
Location
C of the coiled
positive air pipe
A
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 230 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Dynamic Flow Control Module Replacement
9 Uncoil the positive air pipe and remove the pipe from the grommet in the wall of
the ink system enclosure.
10 Remove the DFC module cableform and the grommet from the wall of the ink
system enclosure.
11 Remove the DFC module from the ink system enclosure.
12 Fit the replacement DFC module in its correct location in the ink system enclosure.
13 Route the DFC module cableform as shown in Figure 3 and feed the cableform
through the grommet hole in the wall of the ink system enclosure.
14 Insert the positive air pipe through the grommet, and then fit the DFC module
cableform and the grommet to the wall of the ink system enclosure.
Correct DFC
cableform routing DFC module
69628
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 231 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Dynamic Flow Control Module Replacement
20 Switch on the printer and make sure that the fan operates.
21 Make sure that the green LED on the DFC module illuminates (that is, in the ‘Idle’
jet state).
22 Start the jet and make sure that the red LED on the DFC module is illuminated
during the jet start sequence (that is, in the ‘Jet Starting’ state).
23 When the jet has started (‘Jet Running’ state) and is running normally, make sure
that the green LED is illuminated. (The green LED illuminates provided that the
Set Pressure is between Reference Pressure and Solvent Add Pressure + 1 bit.)
24 Switch off the printer.
25 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
26 Refit the top cover and secure the locking latch.
27 Refit the ink and solvent filler caps.
28 The ‘Dynamic Flow Control Module Replacement’ maintenance instruction is now
completed.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 232 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Replacement (Printer with DFC)
Parts Required
FA74275 DFC/Printhead Signal Wire Connector
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
FA940052 Tube Cutter Plastic 4 mm–14 mm
FA999056 Gloves Nitrile (small) )
FA999057 Gloves Nitrile (medium) ) as required
FA999058 Gloves Nitrile (large) )
FA999076 Safety Spectacles Blue
Introduction
The Dynamic Flow Control (DFC) option is a factory-fit module that is installed in the ink
system enclosure. The module replaces the function of the standard gutter restrictor in the
printhead gutter line.
If the printhead is replaced on a printer that has the DFC module fitted (a 7300 Solver
printer), the spare part DFC/Printhead Signal Wire Connector (FA74275) is required. This
spare part is an in-line connector with a single wire connected to it and a single pin
connector on the other end.
This maintenance instruction describes only the replacement procedure for a standard
printhead on a printer that has the DFC module fitted.
Procedure
1 Shut down and switch off the printer. Make sure that it is switched off at the
mains electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
4 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 233 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Replacement (Printer with DFC)
5 Place absorbent, lint-free paper towel under the in-line A1 barb connector in the
gutter return line and the 3-way fluid connector to contain any ink that might be
spilt during the following process.
6 Remove the printhead using the normal procedure for non-DFC printers.
Important additional points are:
(a) Cut the pipes off the two barb connectors as shown in Figure 1.
(b) Cut the pipes as close as possible to the barb connectors and use the Tube Cutter to
make sure that the pipes are cut cleanly and straight.
(c) The gutter line must be cut on the printhead side of the in-line A1 barb connector,
leaving the barb connector in the end of the gutter line to the DFC module.
(d) Disconnect the DFC signal wire in-line connector from the DFC module cableform
(connector A in Figure 4).
NOTE: Figure 4 shows a 6900 printer, but the replacement procedure for the printhead
(printer with DFC) is the same on the 7300 printer.
69626
Printhead
conduit
In-line A1
barb connector
P/HD CONNECTOR
DFC Module
Cut the
pipe here GUTTER
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 234 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Replacement (Printer with DFC)
69629
Printhead
conduit Cut the pipe here
In-line A1
barb connector
P/HD CONNECTOR
DFC Module
GUTTER
69630
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 235 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Printhead Replacement (Printer with DFC)
13 Connect the in-line connector that is on the other end of the ‘DFC/Printhead
Signal Wire Connector’ to the control signal connector of the DFC module
(connector A in Figure 4).
DFC module
cableform
69631
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 236 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Pressure Transducer Calibration
Equipment Required
FA16005 Cover Removal Tool
FA940067 Double-Ended Trim Tool
DVM (Digital Voltmeter)
Introduction
Calibration of the Pressure Transducer is required only when the IPM PCB or Pressure
Transducer is replaced. The Pressure Transducer must not be calibrated when a new
printer is commissioned or during scheduled maintenance.
IMPORTANT: This maintenance instruction describes a static calibration procedure.
During manufacturing a dynamic calibration procedure is used, therefore,
there can be a difference in calibration settings between printers when new
printers are received. New printers must not be calibrated when
commissioned.
Procedures
1 Make sure that the printer is switched off at the mains electrical supply.
2 Remove the ink and solvent filler caps.
3 Unlock the security latch on the front of the top cover and remove the cover.
Position the cover so that the IPM PCB and the keyboard can both be accessed.
4 Temporarily refit the ink and solvent filler caps to reduce evaporation of the ink
and solvent.
5 Switch on the mains electrical supply to the printer and switch on the printer.
6 Set the Digital Volt Meter (DVM) to DC Volts. Connect the DVM negative lead to a
convenient 0 V test point (for example, TP17 or TP18) and the positive lead to TP11
(READPRESS) on the IPM PCB.
7 Turn VR2 on the IPM PCB anticlockwise (using the Double-Ended Trim Tool) until
the DVM reading is greater than 1 volt.
8 Slowly turn VR2 clockwise until a reading of +20 millivolts is achieved, with a
tolerance of ±2 millivolts.
9 Switch off the printer.
10 Disconnect the DVM.
11 The ‘Pressure Transducer Calibration’ maintenance instruction is now completed.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 5 — 237 Sep 2009
7300 Maintenance Instruction
Pressure Transducer Calibration
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 5 — 238 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
CHAPTER 6: SYSTEM EVENTS
6.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the system events that can occur on 7300 printers. System events
are divided into four categories:
1. System Failures
2. Print Failures
3. System Warnings
4. Information Events
System Failures, Print Failures, and System Warnings are defined as those that can occur at
any time and are not a direct response to operator commands.
Information events are not failures or warnings, but are events that are reported when
specific jet functions have occurred.
Each event message is given a unique code number, which identifies the type and source of
the event, and is followed by a short description, for example:
“3.18 Low Pressure”
When an event occurs, the System Event page is displayed, which provides information
about the event that includes the time and date that it occurred (the Timestamp). The page
shows a list of the last six reported events.
NOTE: The Event Log and System Event pages are mutually exclusive, which means
that if one page is displayed, the other page cannot be displayed. Therefore, if
the Event Log is being used when an event occurs, the System Event page is not
displayed. Refer to Chapter 4: ‘System Options’ for information about the Event
Log.
73065
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 6—1 Sep 2009
6.2 System Event Identifications
6.2.1 System Failures
These failures prevent normal printer operation. The messages are prefixed with ‘1’, that
is, 1.XX.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 6—2 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
6.3 Summary of System Events
69281
1. System Failures 2. Print Failures 3. System Warnings
1.00 Internal Failure 2.00 Printhead Over Temperature 3.00 Shutdown Incomplete
1.01 Stack Overflow 2.01 EHT Trip 3.01 Shutdown Incomplete (Failure)
1.02 Corrupt Program Data 2.02 Phase Failure 3.02 Memory Corrupt
2.03 Time Of Flight Failure 3.03 Ink Low
2.04 300V Power Supply 3.04 Solvent Low
2.05 Ink Tank Empty 3.05 Over Speed (Print Trigger)
2.06 Solvent Tank Empty 3.06 Over Speed (Synchronous Data)
2.07 Internal Spillage 3.07 Over Speed (Asynchronous Data)
2.08 Printer Over Temperature 3.08 Over Speed (Line Speed)
2.09 Misaligned Ink Jet 3.09 Over Speed (Compensation)
2.10 Not used 3.10 Under Speed (Line Speed)
2.11 Pressure Limit Reached 3.11 Printer Requires Scheduled
2.12 Viscosity Maintenance
2.13 Hardware Safety Trip 3.12 Printhead Cover Off
2.14 Pressure O/ride Circuit Tripped 3.13 Cover Override Link Fitted
3.14 Power Off Override Active
3.15 Safety Override Active
3.16 Gutter Override Active
3.17 Gate Array Test Mode Active
3.18 Low Pressure
3.19 Valid UNIC Chip Not Found
3.20 No Time Of Flight
3.21 Ink Low Prevented Mix
3.22 Fault Prevented Mix
3.23 Power Off Occurred During Mixing
3.24 Restart In Progress
3.25 Ink Unmixed For 4 Weeks
3.26 User Data Corrupt–Please contact
your local Linx Service Centre
3.27 Mix Disabled
3.28 Printhead requires cleaning at
shutdown
3.29 Over Speed (No Remote Data)
3.30 Remote Error
3.31 Restarted Print Delay
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 6—3 Sep 2009
6.4 System Failures
System Failures occur when the software detects a condition that prevents the software
from operating. System Failures are fatal; it is not possible to continue to operate the
printer after a System Failure has occurred. The only way to clear the failure is to switch
the printer off and then on again.
Most System Failures are reported while the software is performing the self test and
initialization routines, which are carried out after the printer is switched on, that is, while
the splash screen is displayed. When the Print Monitor is displayed, all the initialization
and self tests have been completed.
WARNING: LETHAL VOLTAGE. BECAUSE SYSTEM FAILURES 1.00 AND 1.01 INDICATE A
FAILURE IN THE MICROPROCESSOR, THE SOFTWARE CANNOT BE DEPENDED ON TO
SET THE PRINTER TO A SAFE STATE. THE EHT AND THE 300 VOLTS DC CAN
CONTINUE TO BE GENERATED IN THE PRINTER.
EXTREME CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN WORK IS DONE ON THE PRINTER WHILE
SYSTEM FAILURES 1.00 AND 1.01 EXIST AND THE TOP COVER IS REMOVED. THE
CORRECT, STANDARD ELECTRICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN.
THERE IS A DANGER OF INJURY OR DEATH FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK IF THE CORRECT
ELECTRICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ARE NOT TAKEN.
System Failures that occur during normal operation indicate a serious problem that
prevents further printer operation. The software attempts to set the printer to a safe state
when the failure occurs, as follows:
• Set the pressure to zero.
• Switch off the EHT.
• Close all valves.
• Switch off the 300 V DC.
System Failures cause the printer to stop printing by simply closing the ink system and
printhead Feed valves; a normal jet shutdown is NOT performed. This leads to a
subsequent messy startup and can cause permanent damage to the printhead if it is left in
this condition.
When a System Failure occurs, the ‘print ready’ line is set low and a System Failure
message is displayed. The internal alarm tone is switched on continuously, but the external
alarm is not activated because the software cannot be certain of the ‘alarm enable’ state
following some System Failures.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 6—4 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
6.4.1 “1.00 Internal Failure”
Undefined software failure. This failure message indicates that the software has received a
corrupting signal and the software has been reset in an undefined manner. It would more
commonly be expected to occur when the printer is in operation, having successfully
completed the normal switch-on system checks.
Possible Causes:
• Printer top cover not correctly secured or printhead cover tube screw not in place.
• Dirty IPM PCB caused by a damaged or missing air inlet filter.
• Faulty IPM PCB.
• EMC interference or spike on mains power supply.
• Static discharge to the printhead from the operating environment.
• Poor electrical connections.
Possible Causes:
• Faulty or corrupt microprocessor.
• Faulty IPM peripheral that is issuing too many interrupts.
Possible Causes:
• Faulty or corrupt Flash memory—reload the software.
• Faulty IPM PCB.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 6—5 Sep 2009
6.5 Print Failures
Print Failures occur when the software detects an electrical or mechanical failure that
prevents printing. When a Print Failure occurs, the ‘print ready’ line is set low, the System
Event page is displayed, and a jet shutdown sequence is started. The internal alarm tone is
switched on continuously and, depending on the settings of the Alarm Setup options
(Print Monitor > Line Setup > Alarm), the external alarm may be activated continuously.
In some cases, although some message editing facilities may still be available, the printer
must be switched off at the mains power switch and then back on before printing can be
continued. This is to reset the hardware. With these Print Failures the conditions cannot be
altered until the cause of the failure has been rectified, that is, the jet cannot be restarted.
However, most Print Failures start a normal shutdown sequence and the printer can be
restarted in the normal manner afterwards without the need to switch the mains power off
and then on.
Following a Print Failure shutdown, the software will have completed the following:
• Set the pressure to zero.
• Switched off the EHT.
• Closed all valves.
• Switched off the 300 V DC.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 6—6 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
6.5.1 “2.00 Printhead Over Temperature”
Possible Causes:
• Printhead too close to source of high temperature.
• Short circuit printhead thermistor.
• Short circuit connection on printhead connector.
• Faulty IPM PCB.
NOTE: Hot substrates should be printed on from the side to avoid heat convection to the
printhead.
Possible Causes:
• Excessive build-up of ink on the EHT deflector plate, or the ink is shorting the plate to
another item in the printhead, for example, the gutter.
• Static discharge.
• High humidity.
• Vibration.
• Jet instability caused by contaminated ink or debris in the nozzle.
• Printhead too close to the substrate.
• High or low ink viscosity causing satellite drops, which have built up on the deflector
plates.
• No modulation.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 6—7 Sep 2009
6.5.3 “2.02 Phase Failure”
The printer failed to obtain a valid phase position. This failure is normally associated with
invalid data from the hardware and can be caused if the printhead becomes very dirty with
ink, particularly around the DPP.
When the jet is running, the phase position must be adjusted to ensure the correct charge is
applied to the drops to give a good print.
A phase failure occurs if the microprocessor has not received a phase feedback signal to
indicate the true phase position. A maximum number of attempts are made to find the
phase position, after which the printer fails and performs the jet shutdown sequence.
Possible Causes:
• No jet:
❐ Nozzle blocked.
❐ No ink feed to the printhead.
• Poor jet break-up:
❐ Ink viscosity too high or too low.
❐ Reference modulation set very low.
❐ Modulation too high or too low.
❐ No modulation signal.
• Jet misalignment:
❐ Partly blocked nozzle.
❐ Debris in the nozzle.
❐ Contaminated ink.
❐ Mechanical misalignment.
❐ An obstruction such as a fine hair impeding the jet, for example, through the
charge electrode.
• No charge to the charge electrode caused by bad connections, faulty charge amplifier
or incorrect charge DAC calibration.
• No signal from the phase/TOF connections.
• Faulty phase amplifier on IPM PCB.
• Faulty gate array circuitry on the IPM PCB.
• Conductivity problems due to contaminated ink.
• Very heavy ink build-up in the printhead.
• EHT tracking on the printhead due to very damp/humid environments.
NOTE: This failure detection is disabled whenever the Jet Test – Start option is used.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 6—8 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
6.5.4 “2.03 Time Of Flight Failure”
This failure occurs if, after the jet has been started, there are no valid TOF readings for a
period of 40 minutes.
Possible Causes:
• The shaft encoder or production line stops mid-print (only applicable to IPM PCBs
that have an earlier than Issue 4 Gate Array).
• Incorrect or no signal from the TOF sensor caused by a partially blocked nozzle or jet
misalignment.
• Poor drop break-up caused by incorrect modulation/ink viscosity.
• The ink viscosity is so far out of range that correctly measured TOF values are rejected
as being spurious readings.
• Heavy build-up of dry ink on the deflector plates.
• Noise (EMC) interference.
• The inter-print distance is too small to allow TOF measurement.
NOTE: This failure detection is disabled whenever the Jet Test – Start option is used.
Possible Causes:
• The EHTPSU 300 V output has failed.
• Faulty 5 volts reference, which is compared with a proportion of the 300 volts line to
determine the presence of the 300 volts.
• Printhead modulation/charge short circuit.
• Faulty 300 volts control circuit on IPM PCB.
• Faulty 300 volts sense comparator (IC35A).
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 6—9 Sep 2009
6.5.8 “2.07 Internal Spillage”
The base of the ink system enclosure is sealed in order to contain any ink or solvent
spillage, preventing external leakage. In the event of a pressurized ink leak from an ink
system pipe, manifold assembly or pump head, a spillage sensor stops the pump within 5
seconds of detection (that is, there is no jet shutdown). The sensor is fitted through (but
insulated from) the lower front wall of the ink system enclosure. When a spillage reaches a
minimum of 50 ml, a short circuit occurs between the sensor and the ink system enclosure
through the conductive ink. This short circuit is detected by the microprocessor on the IPM
PCB and the System Failure “2.07 Internal Spillage” is reported.
Possible Causes:
• Ink or solvent reservoir overflow.
• Incorrect ink replenishment procedure.
• Leak within the ink system.
• Faulty spillage detection circuit.
Possible Causes:
• Blocked air filter.
• Fan failure, caused by:
❐ Bad electrical connections to the fan.
❐ Fan blade obstruction.
❐ Fan control circuit failure.
• Fire within the printer cabinet.
Possible Causes:
• Partly blocked nozzle.
• Debris in the nozzle.
• Blocked gutter.
• Contaminated ink.
• Mechanical misalignment.
• An obstruction, such as a fine hair, impeding the jet through the charge electrode.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 6 — 10 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
6.5.11 “2.11 Pressure Limit Reached”
The software is unable to increase the pressure sufficiently to achieve a TOF measurement
equal to the Reference TOF. This can occur during the jet start process.
Possible Causes:
• Blocked ink pick-up tube in-line filter or main ink filter.
• Leaking purge or gutter valve.
• Very high ink viscosity.
• No modulation.
• No charge.
• Worn pump.
• Faulty pressure transducer.
• Incorrect calibration code entered.
• Incorrect printhead type selected.
• Excessive noise on the phase/TOF signal.
Possible Causes:
• Blocked ink pick-up tube in-line filter or main ink filter.
• Leaking purge or gutter valve.
• Incorrect calibration code entered.
• Solvent pick-up tube in-line filter blocked.
• There is a loss of pressure in the ink system and the pressure has been set artificially
high in order to reach the TOF reference. Consequently, the maximum number of
solvent additions may have been exceeded, which results in this failure being
reported.
• Ink has been added to the solvent tank by mistake.
NOTE: This failure detection is disabled whenever the Jet Test – Start option is used.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 6 — 11 Sep 2009
6.5.13 “2.13 Hardware Safety Trip”
The hardware safety trip has activated locking out certain hardware functions. This may be
initially reported as Print Failures “2.00 Printhead Over Temperature” or “2.01 EHT Trip”.
Possible Causes:
• See Print Failures “2.00 Printhead Over Temperature” or “2.01 EHT Trip”.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 6 — 12 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
6.6 System Warnings
System Warnings inform the operator of problems that may affect the operation of the
printer, but are not serious enough to require a shutdown. When a System Warning event
occurs, the System Event page containing the warning message is displayed. The internal
alarm tone is switched on and off twice and, depending on the settings of the Alarm
options (Print Monitor > Line Setup > Alarm > Alarm Setup), the external alarm may be
activated twice.
Possible Causes:
• The battery back-up has partially failed (flat battery).
• Link LK4 is not fitted on the IPM PCB.
• Electrical spikes.
• Faulty memory ICs.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 6 — 13 Sep 2009
6.6.5 “3.04 Solvent Low”
If the solvent level sensor indicates that the volume of solvent in the tank is low, this
warning is reported. Unlike other event messages that are displayed on the System Event
page, the Solvent Low warning is displayed on the SureFill page. This page includes a
request to enter the SureFill code, which is on the solvent bottle label, before the new
solvent is added.
The warning is cleared automatically when a sufficient quantity of solvent is added to the
tank.
If this event is detected before the jet is started, the jet cannot be started until the event has
been cleared (that is, the solvent tank is refilled). If the event is detected while the jet is
running, the jet continues to run for 12 hours (all printheads) until the solvent level is
critically low, at which point the printer fails (see Print Failure “2.06 Solvent Tank Empty”).
IMPORTANT: The solvent tank should be refilled only when this warning is reported
(one bottle of solvent only).
Possible Causes:
• The trigger device is providing false triggers due to electrical noise, or an inadequate
trigger device is being used for the application.
• There is electrical ‘bounce’ on the trigger device input. Try moving the debounce link
LK36 to the SLOW position.
• The distance from the trigger device to the printhead is greater than the distance from
one product to the next.
Possible Causes:
• The amount of variable data in the message is too high for the current rate of print
triggers.
• False trigger device triggers.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 6 — 14 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
6.6.8 “3.07 Over Speed (Asynchronous Data)”
A ‘print go’ occurred before the message data could be generated in response to an
asynchronous event. The unmodified message may be printed without the asynchronous
data.
While printing is taking place an asynchronous command may be received, which attempts
to change the printed message, for example, invert or reverse the message. The software
may assume that the data has not arrived and ignore the command, depending on the
software setting, in which case the printer continues to print the unchanged previous
message.
Possible Causes:
• The printer has received a command to change the message during the delay time.
• ‘Time change’ related data (a sequential message with a time trigger) has changed
after the delay time has started.
Possible Causes:
• The shaft encoder gear ratio is too big.
• The shaft encoder gear wheel is too small.
• The production line speed is greater than the maximum speed for the message type
(raster).
Possible Causes:
• The shaft encoder gear ratio is too big.
• The shaft encoder gear wheel is too small.
• The production line speed is greater than the maximum speed for the message type
(raster).
Possible Causes:
• The shaft encoder gear ratio is too small.
• The shaft encoder gear wheel is too big.
• The production line is travelling too slowly or has stopped.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 6 — 15 Sep 2009
6.6.12 “3.11 Printer Requires Scheduled Maintenance”
The time remaining to the next scheduled maintenance is monitored. If it is zero or a
negative value, this warning is reported and the jet can be started as normal. The time
remaining decrements only when the jet is running.
When the Maintenance Due Within or Maintenance Due By time (Print Monitor > Menu
> Maintenance > Maintenance Times > Maintenance Due Within/Maintenance Due By)
reaches zero, this warning message is displayed every time the printer is switched on. It
continues to be displayed until the scheduled maintenance has been carried out and the
intervals to the next maintenance have been reset by the maintenance technician. This is
achieved by selecting Maintenance Finished on the Maintenance Times page, which
automatically resets the maintenance intervals according to the ink type being used in the
printer.
See also: Chapter 5: Maintenance > Maintenance Menu > Maintenance Times.
WARNING: LETHAL VOLTAGE HAZARD. WHEN THE ‘COVER OVERRIDE’ LINK LK21 IS
FITTED AND THE PRINTHEAD COVER TUBE IS REMOVED, 300 VOLTS DC CONTINUES
TO BE SUPPLIED TO THE CHARGE ELECTRODE. THE EHT ALSO CONTINUES TO BE
SUPPLIED TO THE DEFLECTOR PLATES.
THE CORRECT, STANDARD ELECTRICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN
WHEN WORK IS DONE ON THE PRINTHEAD WITH LINK LK21 FITTED AND WITH THE
COVER TUBE REMOVED. DO NOT FIT LINK LK21 PERMANENTLY AND DO NOT LEAVE
THE PRINTER UNATTENDED WHILE THE LINK IS FITTED.
THERE IS A DANGER OF INJURY OR DEATH FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK IF THIS SAFETY
WARNING IS IGNORED.
This warning is reported if the printhead cover tube is removed. The +8 kV EHT supply to
the positive deflector plate is automatically switched off and printing is suspended when
the cover tube is removed. Printing is resumed a few seconds after the cover tube is
refitted. The red strobe LED is also switched on when the cover tube is removed.
See also: System Warning “3.13 Cover Override Link Fitted” below.
Chapter 3: Technical Description > Printhead Components > Printhead Cover
Sensor.
WARNING: LETHAL VOLTAGE HAZARD. WHEN THE ‘COVER OVERRIDE’ LINK LK21 IS
FITTED AND THE PRINTHEAD COVER TUBE IS REMOVED, 300 VOLTS DC CONTINUES
TO BE SUPPLIED TO THE CHARGE ELECTRODE. THE EHT ALSO CONTINUES TO BE
SUPPLIED TO THE DEFLECTOR PLATES.
THE CORRECT, STANDARD ELECTRICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN
WHEN WORK IS DONE ON THE PRINTHEAD WITH LINK LK21 FITTED AND WITH THE
COVER TUBE REMOVED. DO NOT FIT LINK LK21 PERMANENTLY AND DO NOT LEAVE
THE PRINTER UNATTENDED WHILE THE LINK IS FITTED.
THERE IS A DANGER OF INJURY OR DEATH FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK IF THIS SAFETY
WARNING IS IGNORED.
This warning is reported if link LK21 (Cover Override) is fitted on the IPM PCB.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 6 — 16 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
When this software-readable link is fitted, the EHT and charge voltage remain on while the
printhead cover tube is removed (that is, they are not automatically disabled). This allows
printing to continue for fault diagnosis purposes. The red strobe LED also remains lit. After
removing the printhead cover tube and then fitting the link (or refitting the printhead cover
tube), a few seconds elapse before printing recommences.
See also: System Warning “3.12 Printhead Cover Off” above.
Chapter 3: Technical Description > Electronics and Software > IPM PCB > Test
Points and Links > LK21 (Cover Off Override).
Chapter 4: System Options > Setup > Installation > Printhead > Cover Override.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 6 — 17 Sep 2009
6.6.18 “3.17 Gate Array Test Mode Active”
This warning is reported if link LK26 (Built In Self-Test) is fitted on the IPM PCB.
When this link is fitted, it places the gate array (IC58) in test mode, which generates a
staircase waveform with historic correction.
Possible Causes:
• The main ink filter or the ink pick-up tube in-line filter are blocked (most probable).
• Some other loss of pressure in the ink system.
• Faulty pump.
• Faulty pump drive circuit.
Possible Causes:
• The software is not receiving TOF signals.
• Incorrect or no signal from the TOF sensor caused by a partially blocked nozzle or jet
misalignment.
• Poor jet break-up caused by incorrect modulation/ink viscosity.
• The ink viscosity is so far out of range that correctly measured TOF values are rejected
as being spurious readings.
• Heavy build-up of dry ink on the deflector plates.
• Noise (EMC) interference.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 6 — 18 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
6.6.22 “3.21 Ink Low Prevented Mix”
7300 Spectrum only. A mix will not take place while the ink is low.
Possible Cause:
• The jet was misaligned during startup and the restart sequence is attempting to clear a
suspected blockage.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 6 — 19 Sep 2009
The phase packets are reduced by 1 drop each time the signal is too large, down to a
minimum of 2 drops. If the signal is still too large when the phase packet contains only 2
drops, this System Warning is reported.
Possible Causes:
• Poor drop break-up caused by incorrect modulation/ink viscosity.
• Misaligned jet.
• Build-up of wet ink between the EHT deflector plate and earth.
• Conductivity problems due to contaminated ink.
• Faulty phase amplifier on the IPM PCB.
• Noise (EMC) interference.
• Bad earthing.
• Incorrect printhead type entered on the Printhead Type page (Print Monitor > Menu
> Setup > Installation > Printhead > Printhead Type).
• EHT leakage due to contamination of the printhead.
• EHT leakage due to moisture on and around the EHT deflector plate caused by
condensation or a high humidity environment.
Possible Causes:
• Print rate is too fast.
• Data was sent too late.
• The baud rate is too low.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 6 — 20 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
CHAPTER 7: TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1 Introduction
The Troubleshooting Flow Charts in this chapter are designed to cover the large amount of
knowledge that exists about printer failures, and to present this knowledge in a clear and
easy to follow way. Flow charts do not replace the need for a Linx-trained maintenance
technician, as there is always the occasion when there is no flow chart for a particular
problem. The flow charts must only be used by a Linx-trained maintenance technician, who
has been given the opportunity to practice with them during training.
NO NO
YES
End
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 7—1 Sep 2009
FCXXX Each flow chart is identified
with a code number, which
can be referenced in the
Start 68491
Index.
Procedure location
Decision YES and title
NO
This symbol instructs you to
perform an action a number
of times. When this has
been completed, continue
with the flow chart as
... until directed.
Sometimes a number
of instructions are
to be repeated.
Test ...
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 7—2 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7.3 First Steps
The first flow chart in the series is ‘Troubleshooting Start’, for which the reference is FC001.
This flow chart must always be followed first no matter what the fault is. It ensures that
all the parameters are set for the troubleshooting session.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 7—3 Sep 2009
69056
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 7—4 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
7.7 List of Flow Charts
69397
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 7—5 Sep 2009
FC001
Troubleshooting 69057
Start
NO
Go to the appropriate
Troubleshooting Flow Chart
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 7—6 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FC002
Jet 69058
Does
Set Pressure = Flow Chart
Actual Pressure NO FC006
(±0.25 bar / 3.57 p.s.i. 'Low Pressure'
/ 14 bits)?
YES
Maintenance Manual
Is the jet going
Chapter 5
straight into NO
the gutter? 'Jet Alignment and
Nozzle Cleaning'
YES
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 7—7 Sep 2009
FC003
Modulation 69059
YES Return
NO
NO NO
Is an Is an
improvement improvement Is the signal present?
observed? observed?
YES
NO
NO YES NO
NO
Maintenance Manual
Replace the printhead. Chapter 5 Replace the IPM PCB.
'Modulation Range'
YES
Final Test
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 7—8 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FC004
Charge 69060
Check continuity of
Is a message printed? NO charge coaxial cable.
YES
YES
NO
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 7—9 Sep 2009
FC005
Phase 69061
Flow Chart
FC007
'Ink Quality'
Test continuity of
Is the phase
phase coaxial cable, NO value good?
YES Return
including outer screen.
Is the p hase
cable continuity NO Replace the printhead.
good?
YES
Final Test
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 7 — 10 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FC006
Maintenance Manual
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5 Is the printer
Chapter 5
'IPM PCB Calibration' NO due for scheduled YES
maintenance? 'Scheduled
(Pressure Transducer
Maintenance'
Calibration only)
Final Test
Is there good
Check ink flow from the Check vacuum at the
main ink filter outlet.
YES ink flow from NO pump inlet
the pump?
Final Test
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 7 — 11 Sep 2009
FC007
Ink Quality 69063
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
Is one of the print
'IPM PCB Calibration' NO samples good?
(Charge Amplifier
Calibration only)
YES
Was charge
calibration required? Reset TOF to TOF/Phase
(Monitor Jet page)
NO
Final Test
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 7 — 12 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FC008
Low Viscosity Ink 69064
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
'Solvent Add
Valve Tests'
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
'Solvent Flush
Valve Tests'
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
'Purge and Gutter
Valves Tests'
Final Test
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 7 — 13 Sep 2009
FC009
High Viscosity Ink 69065
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
'IPM PCB Calibration'
(Pressure Transducer
Calibration only)
Flow Chart
Is TOF OK? NO FC203
'Time Of Flight Failure'
YES
Is there
Refill the solvent tank. NO solvent in the solvent
tank?
YES
Maintenance Manual
Test the solvent level Chapter 5
sensor. 'Solvent Add
Valve Tests'
Final Test
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 7 — 14 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FC010
EHT Deflection 69066
NO
Was voltage
YES NO as expected?
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 7 — 15 Sep 2009
FC011
From the Maintenance
menu > Jet Functions Print 69067
menu, put the printer into
the "Ready to Print" state
by selecting the Start Print
option.
Place a piece of paper at YES
Flow Chart
the printhead outlet and
select the Test Print option. Is TOF OK? NO FC203
'Time Of Flight Failure'
NO YES
YES
Flow Chart
Is the fault still
apparent?
NO Is the print sample NO FC012
good? 'Print Quality'
YES
Maintenance Manual
Does Chapter 5
Print Count NO 'Software
increment? Programming'
procedure
YES
YES
NO
Final Test
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 7 — 16 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FC012
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
Is the problem
'IPM PCB Calibration' solved?
(Pressure Transducer
& Charge Calibration)
NO
Flow Chart
Is the problem
FC010
solved?
'EHT Deflection'
NO
Flow Chart
Is the problem
FC007
solved?
'Ink Quality'
NO
YES
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
Problem solved? YES
'Modulation Range
Checks'
NO
YES
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
'Software
Programming'
procedure YES
Final Test
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 7 — 17 Sep 2009
FC200
Is the
printhead ambient
NO temperature less than YES
60 °C?
NO
Final Test
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 7 — 18 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FC201
Flow Chart
FC002
'Jet'
Flow Chart
FC003
Make sure that the event 'Modulation'
settings are correct.
Examine printhead cover Make sure that link LK21
tube detection system and is removed.
replace faulty components
as necessary.
Remove the printhead
from the printhead cover
tube, and then refit it.
NO YES
Was Was
warning 3.12 warning 3.13 "Cover
"Printhead Cover Off" YES Override Link Fitted"
displayed? displayed?
NO
YES NO
Take a print sample. Make sure that the
environment is within
operating parameters.
Make sure that cleaning
procedures are being
adhered to.
Make sure that there is no
Replace the IPM PCB. vibration being transmitted to
Does the the printhead.
printer fail? If all else is OK, replace
the EHTPSU.
Final Test
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 7 — 19 Sep 2009
FC202
Flow Chart
FC002
'Jet'
Is the problem
NO solved?
Flow Chart
FC003
'Modulation'
Is the problem
NO solved?
Flow Chart
FC004
'Charge'
Is the problem
NO solved?
YES
Flow Chart
FC005
'Phase'
YES
Is the problem
NO solved?
YES
Flow Chart
FC001 YES
'Troubleshooting Start'
Final Test
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 7 — 20 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FC203
Flow Chart
FC002
'Jet'
Flow Chart
FC003
'Modulation'
Flow Chart
FC004
'Charge'
Final Test
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 7 — 21 Sep 2009
FC204
Does the
fault still exist?
YES NO
Does the
fault still exist?
YES NO
Final Test
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 7 — 22 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FC205
YES
Is the ink tank
nearly empty?
NO YES
Is the warning
Has the fault cleared? "3.03 Ink Low" still
present?
NO
YES
NO
Final Test
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 7 — 23 Sep 2009
FC206
YES
Is the solvent tank
nearly empty?
NO YES
Is the warning
Has the fault cleared? "3.04 Solvent Low"
still present?
NO
YES NO
Final Test
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 7 — 24 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FC207
Is there ink
YES or solvent in the NO
ink tray?
NO
NO
Test the leak detection
wiring for short circuit to
Replace the IPM PCB.
earth and repair as
necessary.
Final Test
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 7 — 25 Sep 2009
FC208
Is the external
temperature greater
than +58 °C?
NO
Is the YES
fan rotating after
switching on the
printer?
NO YES
Reload software.
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
'Software
Programming'
procedure
YES
NO
YES
Final Test
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 7 — 26 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FC209
Is the jet
entering the centre of
the gutter?
YES
NO
Connect pin 12 to pin 13
on the printhead connector
PL6.
Monitor TP6.
Flow Chart
Is the voltage on
FC002 TP6 greater than
'Jet' 4 volts DC?
NO YES
Final Test
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 7 — 27 Sep 2009
FC211
Is the problem
NO solved?
Flow Chart
FC004
'Charge'
Is the problem
NO solved?
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
'IPM PCB Calibration'
(Pressure Transducer
Calibration only)
YES
Is the problem
solved?
YES
NO
Flow Chart
FC001 YES
'Troubleshooting Start'
Final Test
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 7 — 28 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FC212
Increase/decrease the
pressure to bring the jet
break-up into the charge
electrode and achieve
good TOF.
Is it
possible to achieve
good TOF?
YES
NO
Maintenance Manual
Chapter 5
'Modulation Range
Checks'
Viscosity?
Flow Chart
Low or High or
FC203
lower higher
'Time Of Flight Failure'
than than
expected expected
Final Test
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 7 — 29 Sep 2009
FC213
Flow Chart
FC201
'EHT Trip'
Is the problem
NO solved?
Flow Chart
FC200
'Printhead Over
Temperature'
Is the problem
NO solved?
YES
Flow Chart
FC001 YES
'Troubleshooting Start'
Final Test
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 7 — 30 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FC999
Final Test 69082
Evaluate any
precautionary measures
to be taken to avoid
a reoccurrence
of the problem.
Put the printer back on
the production line and run
it, observing
its operation, for
at least ½ hour.
Clean the working area.
Dispose of all liquid
and solid waste in
accordance with local
regulations.
Finish
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 7 — 31 Sep 2009
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 7 — 32 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
CHAPTER 8: TRAINING COURSE
GUIDES
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 8—1 Sep 2009
Level C Modules
01. Introduction
02. Continuous Ink Jet Printing
03. Getting Started and Printing Messages
04. Navigating the 7300
05. Creating and Editing Messages
06. Stopping Print and Shutting Down
07. Looking After Your Printer
08. Routine Maintenance
09. Line Installation
10. Review
Level A Modules
01. Introduction
02. Continuous Ink Jet Printing
03. Getting Started and Printing Messages
06. Stopping Print and Shutting Down
07. Looking After Your Printer
09. Line Installation
10. Review
Equipment List
Equipment Quantity
Equipment Quantity
Linx 7300 Printer 1
Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide 1 per printer
Magnifier or eyeglass 1
Safety glasses 1 pair per trainee
Protective gloves sufficient for the course
Paper towels sufficient for the course
Hand cleanser sufficient for the course
Eyewash 1 bottle
Paper for printing onto As required (optional)
Make sure that all local Health and Safety regulations are complied with.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 8—2 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Level C: Module 01 – Introduction
Aims
• To establish the credibility of the course, the trainer and the course materials.
• To establish a relaxed atmosphere in which to learn.
• To make the trainees aware of the relevant health and safety aspects.
Key Points
• Outline the course objectives.
• Cover the health and safety aspects of working with a CIJ printer, inks and solvents.
Activities
Introduce yourself and the training course to the trainees.
Explain domestic arrangements (timings, breaks, lunch, facilities).
Explain the use of the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide.
Outline the course objectives.
Explain the warnings and cautions. Use the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide to illustrate the
relevant points.
Explain the safety implications (hazards and their prevention, and accident management)
for the following:
• Ink/solvent flammability
• Eye and skin contact
• Inhalation
• Ingestion
Stress the importance of keeping the printer cover fitted.
Equipment
Ink and solvent bottles
Personal safety equipment
Fire extinguisher
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 8—3 Sep 2009
Level C: Module 02 – Continuous Ink Jet Printing
Aims
• To give some awareness of what continuous ink jet printing is and, in particular, how
the Linx printer achieves its purpose.
Key Points
• Continuous ink jet printing is a non-contact printing method for printing small
variable characters and images.
• The Linx printer achieves this by creating a stream of ink drops, from which
individual drops are electrically charged and deflected out of the printhead onto the
product in a predetermined manner.
Activities
Ask the trainees if they can give examples of where continuous ink jet printers might be
used. Examples could be food products for legislation reasons, pills, motor parts for
product traceability, and cable for marking the product length. In fact, there are very few
products manufactured today that do not require a mark for one reason or another, and
many of these applications are satisfied by marking the product using continuous ink jet
technology.
State that ink jet is usually selected for its capacity to print a large number of characters
every second, and so can cope with production line speeds up to 6 m/s.
Explain that when the printhead cover tube is removed, all dangerous voltages are
removed and the printhead can be handled and viewed safely.
Show the passage of the ink from the nozzle to the gutter.
Explain that, as the drops are formed they can be given an electric charge that causes them
to be deflected by the deflector plate onto the passing product.
Explain that, as the uncharged drops receive no charge they are not deflected and pass
directly into the gutter at the end of the printhead.
Point out the sensors on the DPP and explain that they are used to control the charge and
speed of the drops.
Equipment
Magnifier or eyeglass
Safety glasses
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 8—4 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Level C: Module 03 – Getting Started and Printing
Messages
Aims
• To make sure that there is understanding as to what is required for the printer to be
used successfully on the production line.
• To make sure that the trainees are able to bring the printer to a state where it can be
run on line.
Key Points
• Powering up the printer.
• The keyboard and display.
• Printing a message.
• Using the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide.
• Selecting a message.
Activities
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to switch on
the printer. Invite the trainees to switch on the printer and observe the startup screen.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about the printer display
and explain the use of each of the items on the display.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to start
printing.
Briefly explain what is happening during start up.
Show when the printer status changes to ‘Printing’ and demonstrate printing onto a
product. (You may have to improvise and explain the installation at this point.)
Show that Print Count increments each time the message is printed.
Explain that the message displayed on the Current Message page when the printer was
switched off, will be available for immediate printing the next time the printer is switched
on.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to select a
message. Indicate the Message Store option on the Print Monitor page.
Invite each of the trainees to select a message from the list of stored messages.
Make sure that all the trainees can select and print messages.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 8—5 Sep 2009
Level C: Module 04 – Navigating the 7300
Aims
• To make sure that the trainees become familiar with, and can confidently use, the
cursor control keys.
• To make sure that the trainees become familiar with the menu structure.
Key Points
• Using the Up, Down, Left, and Right cursor control keys.
• Understanding the menu structure.
Activities
Introduce the cursor control keys.
Explain the principle menu options.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 8—6 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Level C: Module 05 – Creating and Editing
Messages
Aims
• To make sure that the trainees can access and use the functions of the Message Editor
to create their messages.
Key Points
• Using the Message Editor.
• Placing fields using the cursor keys.
• Saving and printing newly created messages.
• Adjusting the position and appearance of the message.
• Editing messages.
Activities
Before starting this module, the printer must be set up with the default message type for
the particular line the printer is to be running on.
Invite the trainees to access the Message Store menu and select the New option.
Demonstrate entering text into the message by using the insert text options.
After entering text, demonstrate how the message can be saved and printed.
Invite each of the trainees to create a new message and input their name, and then save and
print each message.
Invite the trainees to adjust the appearance of their message using distance, height, and
pitch.
Explain how other fields, such as the time and date, can be added to a message and moved
into position using the cursor control keys.
Discuss with the operators what message they will be printing on the production line. Ask
the trainees to enter the message into the printer and to print it.
Explain how to edit the message and change the data within it.
Remember to save the message before attempting to print it.
Demonstrate how to change the setting of the message type if more than one message type
is to be used on site (optional).
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 8—7 Sep 2009
Level C: Module 06 – Stopping Print and Shutting
Down
Aims
• To show the difference between a paused print and a stopped jet.
• To emphasize that the 7300 is a completely automatic printer requiring minimum
intervention.
Key Points
• Pausing stops the printing but the jet continues to run.
• The [stop] key initiates a full shutdown sequence.
• The full shutdown sequence stops the jet, flushes the nozzle with solvent, and leaves
the printer in a condition ready for a clean and reliable startup next time.
• The [stop] key is the preferred method for switching off the printer.
• The power switch should only be used if the printer has failed (as displayed in the
Printer Status area of the Print Monitor page), or in the event of a hazardous
situation (for example, fire).
Activities
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to pause
printing.
Invite a trainee to demonstrate the correct key to stop and restart the print.
Show how the status message changes.
Demonstrate to the trainees that when printing is paused, the jet is still running (emphasize
the importance of wearing safety glasses during this operation).
At this point, it may be an opportunity to demonstrate the ink jet and drop formation
(optional).
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to stop
printing and shut down the printer.
Invite one of the trainees to shut down the printer, noting that the status message changes
in the Printer Status area of the Print Monitor page.
Explain what is happening as the printer shuts down. Observe the printer switching itself
off and explain that the whole operation is automatic with no user intervention required.
Equipment
Safety glasses
Magnifier or eyeglass
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 8—8 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Level C: Module 07 – Looking After Your Printer
Aims
• To demonstrate to the trainees that minimum intervention is required for basic printer
operation, and if a few simple rules are followed the printer will give trouble-free
operation.
• To demonstrate the correct method of filling the printer with ink and solvent, as
required.
Key Points
• System Event (warning) messages and appropriate actions.
• ‘Ink low’ and ‘solvent low’ warnings.
• Ink and solvent dos and don’ts.
• Ink and solvent addition.
• Event message log.
Activities
Demonstrate a warning on the printer (a simple one is to remove the printhead from its
cover tube) and show the warning message on the System Event page.
Explain that all printer ‘events’ are logged and demonstrate how to access the Event Log.
Explain that the Printer Status area of the Print Monitor page should be examined
whenever they are close to the printer to make sure that no attention is needed.
Explain that if the printer is reporting an ‘ink low’ or ‘solvent low’ warning, this is a
continuous reminder that a tank needs refilling.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about ink and solvent
safety precautions.
A ‘Quick Quiz’ can be given to cover all the relevant safety aspects about working with the
printer.
Make sure that there is complete understanding of all the points. In particular, show the
protective gloves and glasses symbols, which remind operators that protective equipment
is to be worn when handling ink and solvents.
Show the trainees the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about First Aid instructions.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about adding ink and
solvent.
Show the adhesive label on the solvent filler cap, which indicates the solvent type to be
used. Emphasize that this must be compared to the markings on the solvent bottle itself
and be the same. Also show the ‘Use-by’ date on the bottle.
Repeat the above activity for the ink filler cap and ink bottle.
Demonstrate, using an empty bottle, how the bottle should be placed into the filler tube.
Show the serrated teeth, which are designed to pierce the foil on the bottle neck.
Advise caution that the bottle must not be removed too early.
Emphasize that only one bottle of ink or solvent is to be added at any one time.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 8—9 Sep 2009
Level C: Module 08 – Routine Maintenance
Aims
• To make the trainees aware of the regular maintenance activities necessary to ensure
trouble-free operation of the Linx 7300 printer.
Key Points
• How and when to clean the printhead.
• How and when to clean or replace the air filter.
• Accessing the Monitor Jet page and the Event Log page.
• Use of the Nozzle Flush and Nozzle Clear functions.
Activities
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to look after
the printer. Demonstrate how to clean the printhead and printhead cover tube. Emphasize
that the guide states that the printhead requires cleaning only once every week.
Indicate the location of the air filter and demonstrate how to remove it. For the 7300 model,
demonstrate the cleaning procedure. State the cleaning interval.
Explain that the filter on the 7300 (IP65 version) model cannot be cleaned, but must be
replaced when it becomes excessively dirty.
Demonstrate and explain the Monitor Jet page (optional).
Emphasize that correct nozzle alignment is very important and must not be mechanically
adjusted.
Explain the causes of a blocked nozzle and demonstrate the use of the Nozzle Flush
function. Show the jet of solvent coming from the nozzle.
Demonstrate the Nozzle Clear procedure and encourage each trainee to try it himself or
herself.
Emphasize that, in the case of an incorrectly aligned nozzle, only the Nozzle Flush and
Nozzle Clear functions must be used to rectify the fault. No one should try to physically
move the nozzle without first seeking advice from a person trained to do so, or a Linx or
Linx Distributor maintenance technician.
Emphasize that moving the nozzle with non-approved tools cancels any current warranty
or service contract.
Equipment
Safety glasses
Protective gloves
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 8 — 10 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Level C: Module 09 – Line Installation
Aims
• To ensure that the trainees are able to install and change the setup parameters for
typical product sensors and line speed detectors.
Key Points
• A product sensor sends a signal to the printer to start a message printing onto the
product after a delay.
• A line speed detector sends a number of pulses to the printer, which interprets them
as a line speed.
• Correct setup is essential to ensure correct printing.
• Product sensors and line speed detectors are optional components.
• All line setup functions are accessed from the Line Setup page.
• Security.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 8 — 11 Sep 2009
Level C: Module 10 – Review
Aims
• To answer any questions that arise.
• To ensure all Aims have been adequately met.
Key Points
• Agreement of Aims.
• Decide upon any future training requirements.
Activities
Ask if there are any questions.
Review the Objectives from Module 01 and get agreement from the trainees that they are
happy that these have been met.
If there is any confusion, run through the particular points again.
If necessary, arrange a convenient time to cover again any areas where there is still
confusion. These needs may only be relevant to individual trainees.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 8 — 12 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Level A: Module 01 – Introduction
Aims
• To establish the credibility of the course, the trainer and the course materials.
• To establish a relaxed atmosphere in which to learn.
• To make the trainees aware of the relevant health and safety aspects.
Key Points
• Outline the course objectives.
• Cover the health and safety aspects of working with a CIJ printer, inks and solvents.
Activities
Introduce yourself and the training course to the trainees.
Explain domestic arrangements (timings, breaks, lunch, facilities).
Explain the use of the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide.
Outline the course objectives.
Explain the warnings and cautions. Use the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide to illustrate the
relevant points.
Explain the safety implications (hazards and their prevention, and accident management)
for the following:
• Ink/solvent flammability
• Eye and skin contact
• Inhalation
• Ingestion
Stress the importance of keeping the printer cover fitted.
Equipment
Ink and solvent bottles
Personal safety equipment
Fire extinguisher
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 8 — 13 Sep 2009
Level A: Module 02 – Continuous Ink Jet Printing
Aims
• To give some awareness of what continuous ink jet printing is and, in particular, how
the Linx printer achieves its purpose.
Key Points
• Continuous ink jet printing is a non-contact printing method for printing small variable
characters and images.
• The Linx printer achieves this by creating a stream of ink drops, from which individual
drops are electrically charged and deflected out of the printhead onto the product in a
predetermined manner.
Activities
Ask the trainees if they can give examples of where continuous ink jet printers might be
used. Examples could be food products for legislation reasons, pills, motor parts for
product traceability, and cable for marking the product length. In fact, there are very few
products manufactured today that do not require a mark for one reason or another, and
many of these applications are satisfied by marking the product using continuous ink jet
technology.
State that ink jet is usually selected for its capacity to print a large number of characters
every second, and so can cope with production line speeds up to 6 m/s.
Explain that when the printhead cover tube is removed, all dangerous voltages are
removed and the printhead can be handled and viewed safely.
Show the passage of the ink from the nozzle to the gutter.
Explain that, as the drops are formed they can be given an electric charge that causes them
to be deflected by the deflector plate onto the passing product.
Explain that, as the uncharged drops receive no charge they are not deflected and pass
directly into the gutter at the end of the printhead.
Point out the sensors on the DPP and explain that they are used to control the charge and
speed of the drops.
Equipment
Magnifier or eyeglass
Safety glasses
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 8 — 14 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Level A: Module 03 – Getting Started and Printing
Messages
Aims
• To make sure that there is understanding as to what is required for the printer to be
used successfully on the production line.
• To make sure that the trainees are able to bring the printer to a state where it can be
run on line.
Key Points
• Powering up the printer.
• The keyboard and display.
• Printing a message.
• Using the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide.
• Selecting a message.
Activities
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to switch on
the printer. Invite the trainees to switch on the printer and observe the startup screen.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about the printer display
and explain the use of each of the items on the display.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to start
printing.
Briefly explain what is happening during start up.
Show when the printer status changes to ‘Printing’ and demonstrate printing onto a
product. (You may have to improvise and explain the installation at this point.)
Show that Print Count increments each time the message is printed.
Explain that the message displayed on the Current Message page when the printer was
switched off, will be available for immediate printing the next time the printer is switched
on.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to select a
message. Indicate the Message Store option on the Print Monitor page.
Invite each of the trainees to select a message from the list of stored messages.
Make sure that all the trainees can select and print messages.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 8 — 15 Sep 2009
Level A: Module 06 – Stopping Print and Shutting
Down
Aims
• To show the difference between a paused print and a stopped jet.
• To emphasize that the 7300 is a completely automatic printer requiring minimum
intervention.
Key Points
• Pausing stops the printing but the jet continues to run.
• The [stop] key initiates a full shutdown sequence.
• The full shutdown sequence stops the jet, flushes the nozzle with solvent, and leaves
the printer in a condition ready for a clean and reliable startup next time.
• The [stop] key is the preferred method for switching off the printer.
• The power switch should only be used if the printer has failed (as displayed in the
Printer Status area of the Print Monitor page), or in the event of a hazardous
situation (for example, fire).
Activities
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to pause
printing.
Invite a trainee to demonstrate the correct key to stop and restart the print.
Show how the status message changes.
Demonstrate to the trainees that when printing is paused, the jet is still running (emphasize
the importance of wearing safety glasses during this operation).
At this point, it may be an opportunity to demonstrate the ink jet and drop formation
(optional).
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about how to stop
printing and shut down the printer.
Invite one of the trainees to shut down the printer, noting that the status message changes
in the Printer Status area of the Print Monitor page.
Explain what is happening as the printer shuts down. Observe the printer switching itself
off and explain that the whole operation is automatic with no user intervention required.
Equipment
Safety glasses
Magnifier or eyeglass
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 8 — 16 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Level A: Module 07 – Looking After Your Printer
Aims
• To demonstrate to the trainees that minimum intervention is required for basic printer
operation, and if a few simple rules are followed the printer will give trouble-free
operation.
• To demonstrate the correct method of filling the printer with ink and solvent, as
required.
Key Points
• System Event (warning) messages and appropriate actions.
• ‘Ink low’ and ‘solvent low’ warnings.
• Ink and solvent dos and don’ts.
• Ink and solvent addition.
• Event message log.
Activities
Demonstrate a warning on the printer (a simple one is to remove the printhead from its
cover tube) and show the warning message on the System Event page.
Explain that all printer ‘events’ are logged.
Explain that the Printer Status area of the Print Monitor page should be examined
whenever they are close to the printer to make sure that no attention is needed.
Explain that if the printer is reporting an ‘ink low’ or ‘solvent low’ warning, this is a
continuous reminder that a tank needs refilling.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about ink and solvent
safety precautions.
A ‘Quick Quiz’ can be given to cover all the relevant safety aspects about working with the
printer.
Make sure that there is complete understanding of all the points. In particular, show the
protective gloves and glasses symbols, which remind operators that protective equipment
is to be worn when handling ink and solvents.
Show the trainees the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about First Aid instructions.
Refer the trainees to the section in the Linx 7300 Quick Start Guide about adding ink and
solvent.
Show the adhesive label on the solvent filler cap, which indicates the solvent type to be
used. Emphasize that this must be compared to the markings on the solvent bottle itself
and be the same. Also show the ‘Use-by’ date on the bottle.
Repeat the above activity for the ink filler cap and ink bottle.
Demonstrate, using an empty bottle, how the bottle should be placed into the filler tube.
Show the serrated teeth, which are designed to pierce the foil on the bottle neck.
Advise caution that the bottle must not be removed too early.
Emphasize that only one bottle of ink or solvent is to be added at any one time.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 8 — 17 Sep 2009
Level A: Module 09 – Line Installation
Aims
• To make sure that the trainees are familiar with their installations.
Key Points
• A product sensor sends a signal to the printer to start a message printing onto the
product after a delay.
• A line speed detector sends a number of pulses to the printer, which interprets them
as a line speed.
• Correct setup is essential to ensure correct printing.
• Product sensors and line speed detectors are optional components.
• Security.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 8 — 18 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Level A: Module 10 – Review
Aims
• To answer any questions that arise.
• To make sure that all Aims have been adequately met.
Key Points
• Agreement of Aims.
• Decide upon any future training requirements.
Activities
Ask if there are any questions.
Review the Objectives from Module 01 and get agreement from the trainees that they are
happy that these have been met.
If there is any confusion, run through the particular points again.
If necessary, arrange a convenient time to cover again any areas where there is still
confusion. These needs may only be relevant to individual trainees.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual 8 — 19 Sep 2009
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 8 — 20 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
APPENDIX A: 7300 FOOD GRADE
PRINTER
A.1 Introduction
The Linx 7300 Food Grade printer is a special version of the Linx 7300 printer. The two
products are very similar, with some differences in operation and design. Where the 7300
Food Grade printer is different from the standard 7300 printer described in this manual, the
alternative information is provided in this appendix. Cross-references are given in bold text
to sections in other chapters of the manual and have one of the following statements:
• Read this section in conjunction with section …
• Read this section instead of section …
A.2.1 Hardware
• The 7300 Food Grade printer has a MidiEC printhead, optimized for up to 3 lines of text
or graphics and is specifically for use with Linx food grade inks.
• The nozzle assembly is not interchangeable with other types.
• The MidiEC printhead is only available as a straight printhead with a 2-metre conduit.
• The ink system uses a dual-circuit pump, which provides continuous gutter suction in
the primary circuit of the ink system.
• Unlike the pump in the standard 7300 printer, the pump fitted in the 7300 Food Grade
printer ink system has no internal pressure relief valve (PRV). Instead, an external PRV
is fitted between the input and output ports of the primary circuit of the pump.
• The 7300 Food Grade printer is fitted with a printhead positive air pump as standard.
A.2.2 Configuration
• The operating temperature range for the 7300 Food Grade printer is 0 °C to +40 °C,
compared to the recommended temperature range of +5 °C to +45 °C for a standard
7300 printer.
• Only Linx Red food grade ink 6100, Linx Blue food grade ink 6120 and Linx Blue food
grade ink 6220 can be used.
• A software link must be fitted to configure a standard 7300 printer to a 7300 Food Grade
printer. With the software link fitted, the printhead type and the ink types that are
available are limited to those used by the 7300 Food Grade printer.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual A—1 Sep 2009
A.2.3 Software
• To minimize the risk of printer failure due to a dirty printhead, an EHT flash test is
performed before each jet startup to check that the printhead is clean and dry.
• When the 7300 Food Grade printer is turned on, the jet start is delayed for a 5-minute
warm-up period. This helps to reduce the risk of EHT failure at jet startup due to
condensation within the printhead, which can occur in food marking environments.
• To prevent potential problems related to short print runs, if the [stop] key is pressed
the shutdown is delayed (if necessary) until a calculated, temperature-dependent,
minimum run time has elapsed. This helps to reduce the risk of over-dilution of the
ink.
• The Set Pressure is normally approximately 0.07 bar (1.02 p.s.i.) below the Solvent
Add Pressure. At low temperatures, this pressure can be much higher than the
Reference Pressure. This helps to reduce the risk of over-dilution of the ink.
• Modulation Tracking is not used on the 7300 Food Grade printer.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 A—2 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
A.3.2.2 Modulation
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Modulation’ in ‘Printhead Theory of
Operation’ of Chapter 3: ‘Technical Description’.
The modulation frequency for the MidiEC printhead is 80 kHz.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual A—3 Sep 2009
Warm-up Delay
In conditions of high humidity, condensation can cause any dried ink deposits on the
printhead components to become conductive, which can cause EHT trip failures. To avoid
this, there is a 5-minute warm-up time after the printer is switched on, which allows the
printhead heater time to disperse any condensation before the software allows the jet to start.
During the warm-up time, the jet cannot be started with the [start] key. The jet starts
automatically at the end of the warm-up time, unless the [stop] key is pressed first to cancel
the automatic startup.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 A—4 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
NOTE: The symbol ‘µm’ stands for micrometre, which is the SI unit of length and formerly
known as the micron.
The 7300 Food Grade printer has polyethylene ink and solvent tanks with nominal capacities
of 1440 ml. Both tanks are fitted with fluid level sensors (float switches) to detect when the
level of ink or solvent falls below a predetermined point. If either sensor detects a low fluid
level, a System Warning message is displayed (“3.03 Ink Low” or “3.04 Solvent Low”).
If, during a print run, the ink low condition is allowed to continue, the system reports the
Print Failure “2.05 Ink Tank Empty” after 8 hours. If, during a print run, the solvent low
condition is allowed to continue, the system reports the Print Failure “2.06 Solvent Tank
Empty” after 12 hours. This is to prevent the ink or solvent from running out completely.
The ink system pump used in standard 7300 printers has an integral pressure relief valve
(PRV). The 7300 Food Grade printer has an external PRV connected between the input and
output ports of the primary circuit of the dual-circuit pump. Control of the pump/motor
assembly is achieved by a 0 to +5 volts (depending on the requested pressure) drive signal
supplied by the IPM PCB.
The pump draws ink up from the tank through the ink pick-up tube, which incorporates a
40 µm in-line filter. The ink then flows through the primary circuit of the dual-circuit pump
to the 10 µm main ink filter, which provides the primary filtration within the ink system.
The filter removes any remaining foreign particles from the ink before it reaches the
venturi manifold and the printhead. From the main ink filter, the ink is fed through the
venturi manifold to the damper and the Feed valve, and then out to the printhead. The
purpose of the damper is to smooth any ink pressure fluctuations within the primary
circuit and to isolate them from the printhead.
Ink is fed to and from the printhead through the feed, purge and gutter lines, via a 3-way
fluid connector, which connects the printhead to the ink system. This connector is located
within the ink system enclosure and incorporates a 15 µm filter. The tubing to and from the
printhead is colour-coded: red stripe for the feed line, blue stripe for the purge line, and no
stripe for the gutter line.
The disposable ink pick-up tube and filter, and the main ink filter are replaced at every
Scheduled Maintenance. The damper is replaced annually. All these items must be
replaced in accordance with the Scheduled Maintenance procedure provided in Chapter 5:
‘Maintenance’.
The venturi in the manifold provides suction to draw unused ink from the printhead gutter
back to the ink tank via the Gutter valve, and to draw solvent from the solvent tank as
required. The secondary circuit of the dual-circuit pump provides additional gutter suction
to draw unused ink back to the ink tank.
During solvent addition and solvent flushing, the solvent is drawn from the tank via the
solvent pick-up tube, which incorporates a 20 µm in-line filter. It is then fed through the
Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) valve and the venturi to the ink tank, or through the Solvent
Flush valve and the venturi manifold to the printhead.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual A—5 Sep 2009
Gun Printhead
Chamber Purge Valve
Printhead Feed Valve and 15 µm filter Filter Assembly
Sep 2009
Purge Line
7 25 1 K 21 69562
19 20
Venturi
24
B C A 8
Pressure
A—6
Transducer
9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13
Feed Purge Gutter Solvent Solvent
Valve Valve Valve Add Flush
Valve Valve
E Vent
F
Dual-Circuit 22
G Vent
Pump
22
21
20 19
VENTURI
MANIFOLD
18 17 16 15 14
1 25
7 8
C
A B
6 5 4 3 2
13 12 11 10 9
PORT 1 (VENTURI) DAMPER INLET (BLEED CAP END) 500 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 2 NOT USED — —
PORT 3 (PURGE VALVE) 3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (PURGE) 450 mm BLUE STRIPE PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 4 (GUTTER VALVE) PORT 8 (VENTURI) 170 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 5 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) PORT 6 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) 120 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 9 (FEED VALVE) PORT A (VENTURI MANIFOLD) 250 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 10 (PURGE VALVE) E (PURGE VALVE T-PIECE) 250 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 12 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) PORT 7 (VENTURI) 170 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 13 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) PORT B (VENTURI MANIFOLD) 150 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 15 (PURGE VALVE) PORT 11 (GUTTER VALVE) 150 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 16 (GUTTER VALVE) J (GUTTER VALVE T-PIECE) 220 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 17 (SOLVENT ADD VALVE) 19 (Y-PIECE) 90 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 18 (SOLVENT FLUSH VALVE) 20 (Y-PIECE) 90 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 21 (Y-PIECE) 22 (SOLVENT TANK PICK-UP TUBE) 250 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PORT 24 (VENTURI) INK TANK (INK RETURN LINE) 500 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PORT C (VENTURI MANIFOLD) 3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (FEED) 450 mm RED STRIPE PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
DAMPER OUTLET PORT 14 (FEED VALVE) 330 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
MAIN INK FILTER OUTLET PORT 25 (PRESSURE TRANSDUCER) 220 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
INK PICK-UP TUBE PRIMARY PUMP INLET T-PIECE 100 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PRIMARY PUMP INLET T-PIECE PUMP INLET (PRIMARY) 100 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PUMP OUTLET (PRIMARY) PRIMARY PUMP OUTLET T-PIECE 75 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PRIMARY PUMP OUTLET T-PIECE MAIN INK FILTER INLET 75 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
INK TANK FILLER TUBE (VENT) SOLVENT TANK (VENT) 330 mm NATURAL PIPE (3/16 in. OD)
SOLVENT TANK FILLER TUBE (VENT) INK TRAY (VENT) 330 mm NATURAL PIPE (3/16 in. OD)
G (PURGE VALVE T-PIECE) INK TANK 120 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
3-WAY FLUID CONNECTOR (GUTTER) K (GUTTER VALVE T-PIECE) 225 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
H (GUTTER VALVE T-PIECE) PUMP INLET (SECONDARY) 225 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PUMP OUTLET (SECONDARY) F (PURGE VALVE T-PIECE) 170 mm NATURAL PIPE (1/8 in. OD)
PRIMARY PUMP OUTLET T-PIECE PRV INLET 45 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
PRV OUTLET PRIMARY PUMP INLET T-PIECE 45 mm NATURAL PIPE (6 mm OD)
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual A—7 Sep 2009
A.3.3.3 Ink and Solvent Flows
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Ink and Solvent Flows’ in Chapter 3:
‘Technical Description’.
The ink and solvent flow descriptions in Chapter 3: ‘Technical Description’ are also
applicable to the 7300 Food Grade printer, except that the layout of the ink system is slightly
different. Figure A-1. ‘Static Ink System—7300 Food Grade Printer’ in this appendix shows
the different ink system layout.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 A—8 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Normal Shutdown Sequence (7300 Food Grade Printer)
v3.6 69565A
NORMAL SHUTDOWN
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual A—9 Sep 2009
v3.6 69565B
NORMAL SHUTDOWN
Figure A-4. Normal Shutdown Summary Table—7300 Food Grade Printer (continued)
68776
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 A — 10 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
A.3.4.2 Printhead Positive Air Pump
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Printhead Positive Air Pump’ in
Chapter 3: ‘Technical Description’.
Unlike the standard 7300 printer and the 7300 Spectrum, the 7300 Food Grade printer has a
printhead positive air pump fitted as standard. The addition of a positive air pump
provides a significant improvement in startup reliability in very high humidity conditions.
High humidity can occur over a wide range of temperatures, so positive air provides
improved performance at all times of the year.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual A — 11 Sep 2009
A.4.2 Line Setup Page
A.4.2.1 Power Down
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Power Down’ in Chapter 4: ‘System
Options’.
Because the Delayed Power Down options are not applicable to the 7300 Food Grade printer,
the appearance of the Power Down page is as shown below.
v3.4 69568
MidiEC
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 A — 12 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Printhead Type
The 7300 Food Grade printer supports only one printhead type: MidiEC. This is the only
printhead shown on the Printhead Type page of the Printhead page.
Conduit Length
There is only one conduit length available on the Conduit Length page: 2 metres.
Printhead Code
The default Reference Modulation Voltage for the MidiEC printhead is 125 volts. This is
suitable for operation over a temperature range of 0 °C to +40 °C and applies to all 7300
Food Grade printer configurations (including egg coding applications).
Where ambient temperatures are likely to regularly exceed +35 °C, the installation
technician must enter a value 10 volts less than the Reference Modulation Voltage for the
printhead. Also see the note for Linx Blue Food Grade ink 6220 in the ‘Ink Type Dependent
Parameters (MidiEC)’ table (Chapter 3: Technical Description > Ink System > Ink Type
Dependent Parameters).
A.4.3.2 Ink/Solvent
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Ink/Solvent’ in Chapter 4: ‘System
Options’.
The Ink/Solvent page provides a facility for automatically calibrating the Reference
Pressure for food grade inks, as a diagnostic aid. The appearance of the Ink/Solvent page
is therefore as shown below.
v3.4 69570
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual A — 13 Sep 2009
A.5 Maintenance
A.5.1 Jet Functions
A.5.1.1 Overriding the Minimum Run Time Delay
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Jet Test – Stop’ in Chapter 5:
‘Maintenance’.
There are two ways to override the minimum run time delay and stop the jet immediately:
• By using the key combination [ctrl] + [stop].
• By using the key combination [shift] + [stop].
The first method works in the same way as on a standard 7300 printer, that is it initiates an
immediate quick stop of the jet.
The second method initiates a normal 7300 Food Grade shutdown sequence instead of a
quick stop, but again overrides the minimum run time.
In both cases, the printer first displays the following advisory message.
v3.4 69572
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 A — 14 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
A.5.2 Monitor Jet
A.5.2.1 Modulation
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘Modulation’ in ‘Monitor Jet’ of
Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’.
Automatic Tracking
Automatic Modulation Tracking is not used on the 7300 Food Grade printer.
Installation Parameters
On the Printhead Code page (Installation > Printhead > Printhead Code), set the Reference
Modulation Voltage to the appropriate value for the expected ambient operating
temperature range.
Refer to section Installation Page > Printhead > Printhead Code in this appendix for more
information.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual A — 15 Sep 2009
A.6 System Events
A.6.1 Print Failures
A.6.1.1 “2.01 EHT Trip”
Read this section in conjunction with the section ‘2.01 EHT Trip’ in Chapter 6: ‘System
Events’.
An additional feature of the 7300 Food Grade printer is the inclusion of a 10-second EHT
flash test on the printhead before each startup. This means that, unlike the standard 7300
printer, the 7300 Food Grade printer can report an EHT failure before the jet is started.
If this failure occurs, switch off the printer and clean the printhead, using the cleaning
procedure provided in the ‘MidiEC Printhead Cleaning’ maintenance instruction in
Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’.
A.7 Troubleshooting
A.7.1 First Steps
Read this section instead of the section ‘First Steps’ in Chapter 7: ‘Troubleshooting’.
For the 7300 Food Grade printer, the first flow chart in the series is ‘Troubleshooting Start’
(provided overleaf), for which the reference is ‘FC001—7300 Food Grade Printer Only’.
This flow chart must always be followed first no matter what the fault. It ensures that all
the parameters are set for the troubleshooting session.
The flow chart also includes a check for printhead cleanliness. Cleaning the printhead can
often clear failures, such as:
• “2.01 EHT Trip”.
• “2.03 Time of Flight Failure”.
• “3.28 Printhead requires cleaning at shutdown”.
If the printhead requires cleaning, use the cleaning procedure provided in the ‘MidiEC
Printhead Cleaning’ maintenance instruction in Chapter 5: ‘Maintenance’.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 A — 16 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
FC001—6900 Food Grade Printer Only
Troubleshooting
69571
Start
Go to the appropriate
Troubleshooting Flow Chart
Figure A-10. FC001 7300 Food Grade Printer Troubleshooting Start
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual A — 17 Sep 2009
A.8 Training Course Guides
Read this section in conjunction with Chapter 8: ‘Training Documentation’.
A.9.1 Introduction
The following table identifies the few parts that are different from the standard 7300
printer and specific to the 7300 Food Grade printer.
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 A — 18 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
A.10 On-Farm Egg Coding
A.10.1 Introduction
The 7300 Food Grade printer can be used for applications in environments that are subject to
wide temperature and humidity variations, and short printing runs, principally egg coding
on farms.
There are some additional features that are required for the standard 7300 Food Grade
printer to allow it to work effectively in the harsher conditions that are encountered in egg
coding environments.
These additional features are described in the following sections. Read these sections in
conjunction with, or instead of (as indicated), the related sections earlier in this ‘7300 Food
Grade Printer’ appendix or in other chapters of the manual.
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual A — 19 Sep 2009
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 A — 20 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Index
NOTE: In the following Index, entries contained within double quotation marks are
event messages.
Symbols
24 Volts Alarm Beacon
Installation 5—147
Output 3—82
3-Way Fluid Connector 3—9, 3—10, 3—23, 3—31
Filter Replacement 3—23, 5—36, 5—37, 5—61
"300V Power Supply" 3—70, 3—71, 5—6, 6—9, 7—22
A
Abbreviations 2—9
Actual Modulation 5—11
Actual Pressure 5—10
Actual TOF 3—8, 3—18, 5—12
Additional Publications xxiii
After Jet Shutdown (auto power-down option) 4—8
Air Filter 3—2
Replacement 5—37
Alarm PCB 3—82, 3—83
Alarms
24 Volts External Alarm Beacon
Installation 5—147
Output 3—82
Dual Alarm
Installation 5—197
Mains (VFC) External Alarm
Conversion to 5—151
Output 3—83
Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V)
Conversion to 5—193
Output 5—196
Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC)
Conversion to 5—189
Output 5—192
Alignment
Jet 3—20, 5—95
Nozzle 3—20
Always Log option 4—14
Amendments iii
Antistatic Precautions 5—30
Approvals, Regulatory 2—8
Arrow keys 3—4
Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit
Installation 5—179
Automatic Tracking
Modulation 5—12
Modulation, Food Grade Printer A—15
Pressure 5—10
Auxiliary PCBs 3—76
B
Backing Up and Restoring Data 3—76
Battery 3—70
Block New Events option 4—11
Blocked Gutter Clearance 5—109
Built In Self-Test 3—72, 6—18
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual Index — 1 Sep 2009
C
Cabinet 3—1
Cooling 3—2
CALCHG1 option 5—18
Calendar option 4—25
Calibrate 6xxx Ink option, Food Grade Printer A—13
Calibrated Nozzle Replacement (Offset Calibration) 3—21, 5—139
Calibration
Charge Amplifier 5—71
Pressure Transducer 5—237
Calibration Mode option 5—18
Calibration Value option 5—18
Cautions (Safety) 1—1
CE Approval Checklist 5—31
Change User Level page 4—27
Changing the Orientation of Mk7 Right-Angled P/Hs 5—175
Charge (Troubleshooting FC004) 7—9
Charge Amplifier
Calibration Procedure 5—71
Output 3—69
Charge Calibration Factor 3—20, 4—19
Charge Calibration page 5—17
CALCHG1 option 5—18
Calibration Mode option 5—18
Calibration Value option 5—18
EHTPSU1 option 5—18
XCAL125/XCAL255 option 5—18
Charge Electrode 3—7, 3—15
Charge Voltage 3—15, 3—69
Circuit Diagrams 3—67
Clear Event History option 4—13
Conduit Length option 4—18
Conduit Length option, Food Grade Printer A—13
Configuration Code 3—76, 4—21
Egg Coding A—19
Control Panel and Keyboard Keys xxii
Control Panel LEDs 3—4
Conventions (used in this manual) xxii
Cooling Fan 3—66
Correct Installation of Mk7 Printheads 5—169
"Corrupt Program Data" 6—5
Cover Override 3—71, 6—16
"Cover Override Link Fitted" 3—71, 6—16
Cover Override option 4—19
Cover Tube Magnet (printhead) 3—8
Create (test message) option 5—24
Cross-References xxii
Current Date option 4—17
Current Events page 4—10
Current Time option 4—17
D
D-Type Connector, correct assembly 3—89
Damper 3—22, 3—23
Replacement 3—23, 5—36, 5—37
Date & Time page 4—17
Current Date option 4—17
Current Time option 4—17
Hijri Date Offset (Days) option 4—18
Hijri Date option 4—18
Debounce
Primary Trigger 3—72, 3—78
Secondary Trigger 3—73, 3—80
Deflector and Phase Plate (DPP) 3—7
Deflector Plates 3—7, 3—16
Cleanliness 3—16
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 Index — 2 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Delay (auto power-down option) 4—9
Delayed on Idle (auto power-down option) 4—8
Delayed on Jet Running (auto power-down option) 4—9
Delayed on Printing (auto power-down option) 4—9
Density, Ink 3—8
Disable Mix option 4—23
Display 3—4
Display PCB 3—76
Downloading Software 3—77
Draining the Ink System 5—47
Drop Charge 3—15
Drop Deflection 3—16
Drops item 5—27
Dual Alarm 3—84
Installation 5—197
Dynamic Flow Control 3—11
Module Replacement 5—229
Printhead Replacement (Printer with DFC) 5—233
E
Edit Interval option 4—15
Edit Modulation option 5—11
Edit Modulation page
Automatic Tracking (modulation) option 5—12
Automatic Tracking (modulation) option, Food Grade A—15
Edit Pressure option 5—9
Edit Pressure page
Automatic Tracking (pressure) option 5—10
Egg Coding, Food Grade Printer A—19
Configuration Code A—19
Maintenance Times A—19
Warm-up Delay A—19
EHT default value 3—64
EHT Deflection (Troubleshooting FC010) 7—15
EHT Flash Test A—3
EHT Power Supply Unit 2—3, 3—64
"EHT Trip" 5—6, 6—7, 7—19
"EHT Trip", Food Grade Printer A—16
EHTPSU1 option 5—18
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Compliance 2—8
EMC Directive 2—8
European EMC Standards 2—8
USA EMC Standards 2—8
EMC Compliance 2—8
Empty Tank option 5—22
Empty Tank Sequence 3—55
Enclosure Protection Compliance 2—8
Engineering units 4—24
Environmental Compliance 2—8
RoHS Directive 2—8
Environmental Specification 2—1
Ethernet & Parallel I/O Interfaces (Combined)
Installation 5—205
Ethernet Interface 3—88
Installation 5—201
Event Filtering page 4—12
Hide/Show Faults options 4—12
Hide/Show Information options 4—12
Hide/Show Warnings options 4—12
Event History page 4—10
Block New Events option 4—11
Clear Event History option 4—13
Track New Events option 4—11
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual Index — 3 Sep 2009
Event Log 4—10
Current Events page 4—10
Event Filtering page 4—12
Event History page 4—10
Event Setup page 4—13
Event Setup page 4—13
Always Log option 4—14
Edit Interval option 4—15
Log At Intervals option 4—14
Never Log option 4—14
Reset Count option 4—15
Events messages 6—1
External Alarm Beacons
24 Volts Alarm
Installation 5—147
Output 3—82
External Alarms
Dual Alarm
Installation 5—197
Mains (VFC) Alarm
Conversion to 5—151
Output 3—83
Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V)
Conversion to 5—193
Output 5—196
Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC)
Conversion to 5—189
Output 5—192
External Signals 3—77
Alarm Output 3—82
Dual Alarm 3—84
Ethernet Interface 3—88
Multi-Stage Alarm 3—84
Parallel I/O Interface 3—86
Primary Trigger 3—77
Secondary Trigger 3—79
Serial Interface 3—85
Shaft Encoders 3—80
USB Facility 3—88
F
Fail LED 3—4
"Fault Prevented Mix" 6—19
Fault Shutdown Sequence 3—50
Feed Dry Cycle option 5—22
Feed Dry Cycle Sequence 3—51
Feed Valve (Ink System) 3—22, 3—23, 3—28, 3—31, 3—41
Testing for Leaks 5—79
Feed Valve (Printhead) 3—9, 3—31, 3—41
Feed Valve Replacement 5—161
Filter Replacement 5—165
Testing for Leaks 5—75
Feed valve option 5—23
Filter, Air 3—2
Replacement 5—37
Filter Purge option 5—21
Filter Purge Sequence 3—54
Final Test (Troubleshooting FC999) 7—31
First Aid 1—5
Eye Contact with Inks or Solvents 1—5
Ingestion of Inks or Solvents 1—5
Inhalation of Solvent Fumes 1—5
Skin Contact with Inks or Solvents 1—5
Flash Memory 3—77
Float Switches 3—22, 3—65
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 Index — 4 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Fluid Connector, 3-way 3—9, 3—10, 3—23, 3—31
Filter Replacement 3—23, 5—36, 5—37, 5—61
Fluid Level Control 2—4
Fluid Level Sensors (Float Switches) 3—22, 3—65
Flush Cycle option 5—22
Flush Cycle Sequence 3—53
Food Grade Inks
Ink Types A—1
Printhead Cleaning 5—223
Food Grade Options Link A—11
Food Grade Printer 3—1
Automatic Tracking (modulation) option A—15
Calibrate 6xxx Ink option A—13
Conduit Length option A—13
Egg Coding A—19
Configuration Code A—19
Maintenance Times A—19
Warm-up Delay A—19
EHT Flash Test A—3
Flow Diagram, Static Ink System A—6
Gutter Restrictor A—2
Ink and Solvent Flows A—8
Ink System A—4
Ink System Connections A—7
Ink Type Dependent Parameters 3—59
Ink/Solvent page A—13
IPM PCB Links A—11
Minimum Run Time A—4, A—11
Link A—11
Overridng the Shutdown Delay A—14
Modulation Frequency A—3
Options Link A—11
Parts List A—18
Positive Air Pump A—11
Power Down page A—12
Printhead Cleaning 5—223
Printhead Code option A—13
Printhead page A—12
Printhead Type option A—13
Pump/Motor Assembly A—10
Secondary Ink Circuit A—8
Training Courses Special Features A—18
Valve Sequences
Normal Shutdown Sequence A—9
Normal Start Sequence A—8
Viscosity Control A—3
Warm-up Delay A—4, A—19
Fuses (Mains) 3—63
G
"Gate Array Test Mode Active" 6—18
Glossary 2—9
Gregorian calendar 4—25
Guard Drops 3—16
Gun Chamber 3—7
Gutter (clearing a blockage) 5—109
Gutter Check Valve (In-Line) 3—10
Gutter Dry Cycle option 5—22
Gutter Dry Cycle Sequence 3—55
"Gutter Override Active" 3—72, 6—17
Gutter Restrictor 3—10
Gutter Restrictor, Food Grade Printer A—2
Gutter Sense Override 3—72, 6—17
Gutter Valve 3—28, 3—41
Testing for Leaks 5—82, 5—85
Testing for Operation 5—85
Gutter valve option 5—23
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual Index — 5 Sep 2009
H
Hall-Effect Switch 3—8, 3—15
"Hardware Safety Trip" 6—12, 7—30
Hide/Show Faults options 4—12
Hide/Show Information options 4—12
Hide/Show Warnings options 4—12
High Viscosity Ink (Troubleshooting FC009) 7—14
Hijri Date Offset (Days) option 4—18
Hijri Date option 4—18
Historic Correction 3—15
I
ID page 4—20
Printer Configuration Code option 4—21
Printer Serial Number option 4—22
UNIC Code option 4—21
Imperial units 4—24
Important Notes xxiii
In-Line Feed Filter 3—9, 3—31
In-Line Gutter Check Valve 3—10
Ink Bottles item 5—27
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration) 5—127
Ink Density 3—8
Ink Dip (Pick-up) Tube 3—22, 3—23, 3—31
Filter 3—22
Replacement 5—36
Ink Flow 3—31
Ink Flow, Food Grade Printer A—8
"Ink Low" 3—22, 6—13
Ink Low (level) 2—4
"Ink Low Prevented Mix" 6—19
Ink Mixing Sequence—7300 Spectrum Printer Only 3—57
Ink Mixing Valve 3—22, 3—23, 3—28, 3—39, 3—41
Ink Mixing—7300 Spectrum Printer Only 3—23, 3—39
Damper Purge 3—39
Ink Mixing 3—39
Pump Jog-Start 3—39
Ink Quality (Troubleshooting FC007) 7—12
Ink Spillage Detection 3—65, 6—10
Ink System 2—3, 3—2, 3—22
Capacity 2—4
Connections 3—29
Connections, Food Grade Printer A—7
Construction 2—3
Damper 3—22, 3—23
Draining 5—47
Electrical Connections 2—3
Environmental 2—3
Feed Valve Test 5—79
Flow Diagram, Static Ink System
7300 Food Grade Printer A—6
7300 Spectrum Printer 3—25
Standard 7300 Printer 3—24
Fluid Level Control 2—4
Fluid Level Sensors (Float Switches) 3—22, 3—65
Food Grade Printer A—4
Gutter Valve Tests 5—81
Ink Dip (Pick-up) Tube 3—22, 3—23
Ink Spillage Detection 3—65, 6—10
Ink Tank 3—22
IP Rating 2—3
Main Ink Filter 3—22, 3—23
Maximum Surface Temperature of valves solenoids 2—3
Performance 2—4
Pressure 2—3
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 Index — 6 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Primary Ink Circuit
7300 Spectrum Printer 3—31
Standard 7300 and Food Grade Printers 3—31
Pump/Motor Assembly 3—22, 3—65
Pump/Motor Assembly, Food Grade Printer A—10
Purge Valve Test 5—81
Secondary Ink Circuit
All 7300 Printers 3—31
Food Grade Printer A—8
Solvent Add Valve Tests 5—91
Solvent Dip (Pick-up) Tube 3—23
Solvent Flush Valve Tests 5—87
Solvent Tank 3—22
Valves 3—28, 3—65
Venturi 3—23
Ink Tank
7300 Spectrum 3—22
Capacity 2—4
Construction 2—3
Removal 5—53
Standard 7300 3—22
Capacity 2—4
Construction 2—3
Ink Tank Dip (Pick-up) Tube
Replacement 3—23, 5—57
"Ink Tank Empty" 3—22, 6—9, 7—23
Ink Type Dependent Parameters 3—58
Micro printhead 3—60
Midi A printhead 3—59
Midi plus printhead 3—61
Midi printhead 3—58
MidiEC printhead 3—59
Mini printhead 3—60
Ultima A printhead 3—59
Ultima plus printhead 3—61
Ultima printhead 3—58
"Ink Unmixed For 4 Weeks" 6—19
Ink Viscosity 3—8, 3—18, 3—19
Ink/Solvent page 4—22
Disable Mix option 4—23
Ink/Solvent Type option 4—23
Last Mix option 4—23
Mix Time option 4—23
Next Mix option 4—23
Ink/Solvent page, Food Grade Printer A—13
Calibrate 6xxx Ink option A—13
Ink/Solvent Type option 4—23
Inks and Solvents (Safety) 1—3
Installation page 4—16
Date & Time page 4—17
Current Date option 4—17
Current Time option 4—17
Hijri Date Offset (Days) option 4—18
Hijri Date option 4—18
ID page 4—20
Printer Configuration Code option 4—21
Printer Serial Number option 4—22
UNIC Code option 4—21
Ink/Solvent page 4—22
Disable Mix option 4—23
Ink/Solvent Type option 4—23
Last Mix option 4—23
Mix Time option 4—23
Next Mix option 4—23
Ink/Solvent page, Food Grade Printer A—13
Calibrate 6xxx Ink option A—13
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual Index — 7 Sep 2009
Locale page 4—24
Calendar option 4—25
Keyboard option 4—25
Language option 4—24
Secondary Keyboard option 4—25
Units option 4—24
Use Language Defaults option 4—24
Photocells page 4—26
Printhead page 4—18
Conduit Length option 4—18
Cover Override option 4—19
Mod Slope option 4—20
Printhead Code option 4—19
Printhead Height option 4—18
Printhead Type option 4—18
Printhead page, Food Grade Printer A—12
Conduit Length option A—13
Printhead Code option A—13
Printhead Type option A—13
"Internal Failure" 6—5
"Internal Spillage" 5—6, 6—10, 7—25
IP Rating 3—1
Ink System 2—3
Printer Cabinet 2—1
IPM PCB 3—67, 3—76
Charge Amplifier Calibration Procedure 5—71
Links 3—70
Links, Food Grade Printer A—11
Links locations 3—75
Pressure Transducer Calibration Procedure 5—237
Replacement and Calibration 3—76
Test Points 3—68
Test Points locations 3—75
Isolated Secondary Trigger Input 3—73, 3—80
J
Jet (Troubleshooting FC002) 7—7
Jet Alignment 3—20, 5—95
Jet Functions page 5—5
Jet Test – Start option 5—6
Jet Test – Stop option 5—7
Jet Test – Stop option, Food Grade Printer A—14
Start Print option 5—7
Stop Print option 5—7
Test Print option 5—8
Jet Run Time (Present) 5—16
Jet Run Time (Total) 5—16
Jet Sequences page 5—19
Empty Tank option 5—22
Feed Dry Cycle option 5—22
Filter Purge option 5—21
Flush Cycle option 5—22
Gutter Dry Cycle option 5—22
Jet State box 5—19
Nozzle Clear option 5—21
Nozzle Flush option 5—20
Purge Dry Cycle option 5—22
Reset Sequence Count option 5—19
Solvent Drain option 5—22
Start Sequence option 5—19
Stop Sequence option 5—19
Jet State box 5—19
Jet Test – Start option 5—6
Jet Test – Start Sequence 3—44
Jet Test – Stop option 5—7
Jet Test – Stop option, Food Grade Printer A—14
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 Index — 8 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Jet Test – Stop Sequence 3—50
Jog-Start Routine 3—39
K
Keyboard 3—4
Keyboard option 4—25
Keys
Control Panel xxii
Keyboard xxii
L
Language option 4—24
Last Mix option 4—23
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) 3—4
LEDs 3—4
Lethal Voltages 1—3
Line Setup page 4—7
Power Down page 4—7
After Jet Shutdown option 4—8
Delay option 4—9
Delayed on Idle option 4—8
Delayed on Jet Running option 4—9
Delayed on Printing option 4—9
Power Down page, Food Grade Printer A—12
Links
IPM PCB 3—70
IPM PCB, Food Grade Printer A—11
IPM PCB locations 3—75
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures 5—209
Locale page 4—24
Calendar option 4—25
Keyboard option 4—25
Language option 4—24
Secondary Keyboard option 4—25
Units option 4—24
Use Language Defaults option 4—24
Log At Intervals option 4—14
"Low Pressure" 3—19, 3—36, 5—10, 6—18
Low Pressure (Troubleshooting FC006) 7—11
Low Viscosity Ink (Troubleshooting FC008) 7—13
Low Voltage Power Supply Unit 2—2, 3—63
M
Main Ink Filter 3—22, 3—23
Purging 5—36, 5—37, 5—69
Replacement 3—23, 5—36, 5—65
Mains (VFC) External Alarm
Conversion to 5—151
Output 3—83
Mains Cable Connector 3—62
Mains Filter 3—63
Mains Input Fuses 3—63
Mains Power Cable 3—62
Mains Power Requirements 2—2
Mains Power Supply Switch 3—62
Maintenance Due By option 5—16
Maintenance Due Within option 5—16
Maintenance Finished option 5—16
Maintenance Finished option, Egg Coding A—19
Maintenance Instructions 5—29
24 Volts Alarm Beacon Installation (Printer Mount) 5—147
3-Way Fluid Connector Filter Replacement 5—61
Auto Mains Power-Off Bypass Kit Installation 5—179
Blocked Gutter Clearance 5—109
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual Index — 9 Sep 2009
Calibrated Nozzle Replacement (Offset Calibration) 5—139
Changing the Orientation of Mk7 Right-Angled P/Hs 5—175
Charge Amplifier Calibration 5—71
Combined Ethernet & Parallel I/O Interfaces Inst. 5—205
Correct Installation of Mk7 Printheads 5—169
Draining the Ink System 5—47
Dual Alarm Installation 5—197
Dynamic Flow Control Module Replacement 5—229
Ethernet Interface Installation 5—201
Ink Conversion Calibration (Offset Calibration) 5—127
Ink System Feed Valve Test 5—79
Ink Tank Dip (Pick-up) Tube Replacement 5—57
Jet Alignment and Nozzle Cleaning 5—95
Linx Sync (Service Tool) v4.0 Procedures 5—209
Main Ink Filter Purging 5—69
Main Ink Filter Replacement 5—65
Mains (VFC) External Alarm Conversion 5—151
MidiEC Printhead Cleaning 5—223
Modulation Range Checks 5—105
Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V) Conversion 5—193
Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC) Conversion 5—189
Parallel I/O Interface Installation 5—185
Positive Air Pump Installation 5—157
Pressure Transducer Calibration 5—237
Printer Installation 5—145
Printhead Cleaning for Pigmented Inks 5—43
Printhead Feed Valve Filter Replacement 5—165
Printhead Feed Valve Replacement 5—161
Printhead Replacement (Printer with DFC) 5—233
Printhead Valves Tests 5—75
Purge and Gutter Valves Tests 5—81
Scheduled Maintenance 5—33
Solvent Add Valve Tests 5—91
Solvent Flush Valve Tests 5—87
Spectrum Ink Tank Removal 5—53
System Flush 5—115
Maintenance Options 5—1
Option Availability 5—3
Password Access 4—3
Maintenance page 5—5
Charge Calibration page 5—17
CALCHG1 option 5—18
Calibration Mode option 5—18
Calibration Value option 5—18
EHTPSU1 option 5—18
XCAL125/XCAL255 option 5—18
Jet Functions page 5—5
Jet Test – Start option 5—6
Jet Test – Stop option 5—7
Jet Test – Stop option, Food Grade Printer A—14
Start Print option 5—7
Stop Print option 5—7
Test Print option 5—8
Jet Sequences page 5—19
Empty Tank option 5—22
Feed Dry Cycle option 5—22
Filter Purge option 5—21
Flush Cycle option 5—22
Gutter Dry Cycle option 5—22
Jet State box 5—19
Nozzle Clear option 5—21
Nozzle Flush option 5—20
Purge Dry Cycle option 5—22
Reset Sequence Count option 5—19
Solvent Drain option 5—22
Start Sequence option 5—19
Stop Sequence option 5—19
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 Index — 10 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Maintenance Times page 5—15
Jet Run Time (Present) 5—16
Jet Run Time (Total) 5—16
Maintenance Due By option 5—16
Maintenance Due Within option 5—16
Maintenance Finished option 5—16
Maintenance Finished option, Egg Coding A—19
Power On Time (Present) 5—15
Power On Time (Total) 5—15
Monitor Jet page 5—8
Actual Modulation 5—11
Actual Pressure 5—10
Actual TOF 5—12
Edit Modulation option 5—11
Edit Pressure option 5—9
Phase 5—14
Pressure in p.s.i./bar/bits option 5—11
Reference Modulation 5—11
Reference Modulation, Food Grade Printer A—13, A—15
Reference Pressure 5—10
Reference TOF 5—12
Set Pressure 5—9
Solvent Add Count 5—14
Solvent Add Pressure 5—9
Temp (printhead temperature) 5—14
TOF Mode option 5—13
Print and Consumables History page 5—26
Drops item 5—27
Ink Bottles item 5—27
Messages item 5—27
Recent Drops item 5—27
Recent Ink Bottles item 5—27
Recent Messages item 5—27
Recent Solvent Bottles item 5—28
Reset Recent option 5—28
Solvent Bottles item 5—27
System Flush page 5—25
Test Message page 5—24
Create option 5—24
Save option 5—25
Valves page 5—23
Feed valve option 5—23
Gutter valve option 5—23
Mix valve option 5—23
Open/Close option 5—23
Printhead Feed valve option 5—23
Purge valve option 5—23
Solvent Add valve option 5—23
Solvent Flush valve option 5—23
Valve Reset option 5—23
Maintenance Terminology 5—29
Maintenance Times page 5—15
Jet Run Time (Present) 5—16
Jet Run Time (Total) 5—16
Maintenance Due By option 5—16
Maintenance Due Within option 5—16
Maintenance Finished option 5—16
Maintenance Finished option, Egg Coding A—19
Power On Time (Present) 5—15
Power On Time (Total) 5—15
Manual Phase option 5—13
Maximum Pressure 3—42
Memory Capacity 2—7
"Memory Corrupt" 6—13
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual Index — 11 Sep 2009
Menu page 4—9
Change User Level page 4—27
Event Log 4—10
Maintenance page 4—15
Setup page 4—16
Installation page 4—16
Message Types 2—5, 3—13, 3—64, 4—21, 5—24
Messages item 5—27
Metric units 4—24
Micrometre (µm) 3—22
MidiEC Printhead Cleaning 5—223
Minimum Run Time A—4, A—11
IPM PCB Link A—11
Overriding the Shutdown Delay A—14
"Misaligned Ink Jet" 6—10, 7—27
"Mix Disabled" 4—23, 6—19
Mix Time option 4—23
Mix valve option 5—23
Mixing Sequence—7300 Spectrum Printer Only 3—57
Mixing Valve 3—22, 3—23, 3—28, 3—39, 3—41
Mod Slope option 4—20
Modulation 3—13
Modulation (Troubleshooting FC003) 7—8
Modulation Frequency 3—14, 3—69
Modulation Frequency, Food Grade Printer A—3
Modulation Range Checks 5—105
Modulation Tracking Slope 4—20
Modulation Voltage 3—14, 3—69
Monitor Jet page 5—8
Actual Modulation 5—11
Actual Pressure 5—10
Actual TOF 5—12
Edit Modulation option 5—11
Edit Modulation page
Automatic Tracking (modulation) option 5—12
Automatic Tracking (modulation) option, Food Grade A—15
Edit Pressure option 5—9
Edit Pressure page
Automatic Tracking (pressure) option 5—10
Phase 5—14
Pressure in p.s.i./bar/bits option 5—11
Reference Modulation 5—11
Reference Modulation, Food Grade Printer A—13, A—15
Reference Pressure 5—10
Reference TOF 5—12
Set Pressure 5—9
Solvent Add Count 5—14
Solvent Add Pressure 5—9
Temp (printhead temperature) 5—14
TOF Mode option 5—13
TOF Mode page
Manual Phase option 5—13
TOF Only option 5—13
TOF/Phase option 5—13
Multi-Stage Alarm 3—84
Multi-Stage Alarm (24 V)
Conversion to 5—193
Output 5—196
Multi-Stage Alarm (VFC)
Conversion to 5—189
Output 5—192
N
Never Log option 4—14
Next Mix option 4—23
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 Index — 12 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Next Object Input 3—69
"No Time Of Flight" 6—18
Normal Shutdown Sequence 3—46
Normal Shutdown Sequence, Food Grade Printer A—9
Normal Start Sequence 3—44
Normal Start Sequence, Food Grade Printer A—8
Nozzle Alignment 3—20
Nozzle Assembly 3—7
Nozzle Cleaning 5—95
Hot Water Wash 5—101
Nozzle Clear 5—97
Nozzle Soaking 5—99
Nozzle Washing 5—100
Solvent Wash 5—100
Nozzle Clear option 5—21
Nozzle Clear Sequence 3—52, 5—97
Nozzle Flush option 5—20
Nozzle Flush Sequence 3—56
Nozzle Realignment 5—103
Nozzle Replacement 3—21, 5—139
NPN/PNP (triggering devices) 3—77, 3—79
O
Open/Close (valves) option 5—23
Option Availability
Maintenance Options 5—3
System Options 4—5
Options
How to Select and Change Options 4—2, 5—1
"Over Speed (Asynchronous Data)" 6—15
"Over Speed (Compensation)" 6—15
"Over Speed (Line Speed)" 6—15
"Over Speed (No Remote Data)" 6—20
"Over Speed (Print Trigger)" 6—14
"Over Speed (Synchronous Data)" 6—14
P
Parallel I/O Interface 3—76, 3—86, 5—185
Installation 5—185
Link Positions 3—86
Pin Connections 3—88
Parts List, Food Grade Printer A—18
Password Access 4—3, 5—2
Phase 5—14
Phase (Troubleshooting FC005) 7—10
Phase Control 3—17
"Phase Failure" 6—8, 7—20
Phase Packet 3—17
Phase Positions 3—17
Phase Sensor 3—7, 3—17
Phase/TOF during a Stalled Print 3—18
Phasing 3—7, 3—17
Photocells page 4—26
Piezoelectric Crystal 3—13
Pigmented Inks, Printhead Cleaning 5—43
PIO PCB 3—76, 3—86, 5—185
Positive Air Pump 3—66
Installation 5—157
Positive Air Pump, Food Grade Printer A—11
Power Cable 3—62
Power Down page 4—7
After Jet Shutdown option 4—8
Delay option 4—9
Delayed on Idle option 4—8
Delayed on Jet Running option 4—9
Delayed on Printing option 4—9
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual Index — 13 Sep 2009
Power Down page, Food Grade Printer A—12
Power LED 3—4
"Power Off Occurred During Mixing" 6—19
Power Off Override 3—71, 6—17
"Power Off Override Active" 3—71, 6—17
Power On Switch 3—63
Power On Time (Present) 5—15
Power On Time (Total) 5—15
Pressure Conversion Figures 3—41
Pressure in p.s.i./bar/bits option 5—11
"Pressure Limit Reached" 6—11, 7—28
"Pressure O/ride Circuit Tripped" 6—12
Pressure Relief Valve, Pump 3—22, 3—23
Pressure Transducer 3—27
Calibration Procedure 5—237
Primary Ink Circuit
7300 Spectrum Printer 3—31
Standard 7300 and Food Grade Printers 3—31
Primary Trigger 3—77
Primary Trigger Signal 3—69
Print (Troubleshooting FC011) 7—16
Print and Consumables History page 5—26
Drops item 5—27
Ink Bottles item 5—27
Messages item 5—27
Recent Drops item 5—27
Recent Ink Bottles item 5—27
Recent Messages item 5—27
Recent Solvent Bottles item 5—28
Reset Recent option 5—28
Solvent Bottles item 5—27
Print Failures 6—6
2.00 Printhead Over Temperature 3—8, 5—6, 6—7, 7—18
2.01 EHT Trip 5—6, 6—7, 7—19
2.01 EHT Trip, Food Grade Printer A—16
2.02 Phase Failure 6—8, 7—20
2.03 Time Of Flight Failure 3—18, 6—9, 7—21
2.03 Time Of Flight Failure, Food Grade Printer A—16
2.04 300V Power Supply 3—70, 3—71, 5—6, 6—9, 7—22
2.05 Ink Tank Empty 3—22, 6—9, 7—23
2.06 Solvent Tank Empty 3—22, 6—9, 7—24
2.07 Internal Spillage 5—6, 6—10, 7—25
2.08 Printer Over Temperature 3—66, 6—10, 7—26
2.09 Misaligned Ink Jet 6—10, 7—27
2.11 Pressure Limit Reached 6—11, 7—28
2.12 Viscosity 3—19, 6—11, 7—29
2.13 Hardware Safety Trip 6—12, 7—30
2.14 Pressure O/ride Circuit Tripped 6—12
Print Monitor 4—1
Print Quality 3—20
Print Quality (Troubleshooting FC012) 7—17
Printer Cabinet
Construction 2—2
Dimensions 2—2
Weight 2—2
Printer Configuration Code 3—76
Printer Configuration Code option 4—21
Printer Configurations 2—1
Printer Installation 5—145
Printer Models xxii
"Printer Over Temperature" 3—66, 6—10, 7—26
"Printer Requires Scheduled Maintenance" 5—16, 6—16
Printer Serial Number option 4—22
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 Index — 14 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
Printhead 2—5
Cleaning
for Food Grade Inks 5—223
for Pigmented Inks 5—43
Components 3—6
Connections 3—10
Construction 2—5
Correct Installation 5—169
Cover Sensor 3—8
Cover Tube Magnet 3—8
Dimensions 2—5
Feed Valve Filter Replacement 5—165
Feed Valve Replacement 5—161
Feed Valve Test 5—75
Positive Air Pump 3—66
Positive Air Pump, Food Grade Printer A—11
Purge Valve Test 5—75
Replacement 3—21
Replacement (Printer with DFC) 5—233
Right-Angled, Changing the Orientation 5—175
Temperature 5—14
Temperature Sensor 3—8
Types 2—5, 3—12
Valves 3—9, 3—20, 3—31
Printhead Cleaning for Pigmented Inks 5—43
Printhead Code 3—20
Printhead Code option 4—19
Printhead Code option, Food Grade Printer A—13
"Printhead Cover Off" 3—71, 6—16
Printhead Feed Valve Filter Replacement 5—165
Printhead Feed valve option 5—23
Printhead Feed Valve Replacement 5—161
Printhead Height option 4—18
"Printhead Over Temperature" 3—8, 5—6, 6—7, 7—18
Printhead page 4—18
Conduit Length option 4—18
Cover Override option 4—19
Mod Slope option 4—20
Printhead Code option 4—19
Printhead Height option 4—18
Printhead Type option 4—18
Printhead page, Food Grade Printer A—12
Conduit Length option A—13
Printhead Code option A—13
Printhead Type option A—13
"Printhead requires cleaning at shutdown" 6—19
Food Grade Printer A—16
Printhead to Substrate Distance 2—7
Printhead Type option 4—18
Printhead Type option, Food Grade Printer A—13
Printing Performance 2—5
Publications, Additional xxiii
Pump Jog-Start Routine 3—39
Pump/Motor Assembly 3—22, 3—65
Pump/Motor Assembly, Food Grade Printer A—10
Purge Dry Cycle option 5—22
Purge Dry Cycle Sequence 3—51
Purge Valve (Ink System) 3—28, 3—41
Testing for Leaks 5—82
Purge Valve (Printhead) 3—9
Testing for Leaks 5—77
Purge valve option 5—23
Q
Quality, Print 3—20
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual Index — 15 Sep 2009
R
Read Pressure 3—68
Ready LED 3—4
Recent Drops item 5—27
Recent Ink Bottles item 5—27
Recent Messages item 5—27
Recent Solvent Bottles item 5—28
Recommended Procedures 5—30
Reference Modulation 3—14, 3—20, 4—19, 5—11
Reference Modulation, Food Grade Printer A—13, A—15
Reference Pressure 3—19, 3—20, 3—43, 4—19, 5—10
Reference TOF 3—8, 3—18, 5—12
Regulatory Approvals 2—8
"Remote Error" 6—20
Reset Count option 4—15
Reset Recent option 5—28
Reset Sequence Count option 5—19
"Restart In Progress" 6—19
Restart Sequence 3—45
"Restarted Print Delay" 6—20
RS232 and RS422 3—71, 3—73, 3—85
Cable Connections 3—85
S
Safety 1—1
First Aid 1—5
Eye Contact with Inks or Solvents 1—5
Ingestion of Inks or Solvents 1—5
Inhalation of Solvent Fumes 1—5
Skin Contact with Inks or Solvents 1—5
Inks and Solvents 1—3
Lethal Voltages 1—3
Test Printing 1—6
Warnings and Cautions 1—1
Safety Compliance 2—8
European Safety Standards 2—8
Low Voltage Directive 2—8
Safety Functions 3—76
Safety Override 3—70, 6—17
"Safety Override Active" 3—71, 6—17
Safety Recommendation v
Save (test message) option 5—25
Scheduled Maintenance 5—33
Scheduled Maintenance Checklist 5—32
Secondary Ink Circuit
All 7300 Printers 3—31
Food Grade Printer A—8
Secondary Keyboard option 4—25
Secondary Trigger 3—79
Secondary Trigger Input 3—68
Security Level 4—27
Serial Interface 3—85
Set Pressure 3—8, 3—19, 3—68, 5—9
Setup page 4—16
Installation page 4—16
Date & Time page 4—17
ID page 4—20
Ink/Solvent page 4—22
Ink/Solvent page, Food Grade Printer A—13
Locale page 4—24
Photocells page 4—26
Printhead page 4—18
Printhead page, Food Grade Printer A—12
Shaft Encoders 3—80
"Shutdown Incomplete" 6—13
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 Index — 16 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
"Shutdown Incomplete (Failure)" 6—13
Shutting Down 3—19
Soft keys 3—4
Software 3—77
Backing Up and Restoring Data 5—217
Downloading Software 3—77
Programming—Corrupt/Faulty Software 5—215
Programming—Normal 5—211
Transferring Data 5—219
Solvent Add (Solvent Top-up) Valve 3—23, 3—28, 3—41
Testing for Leaks 5—91
Testing for Operation 5—92
Solvent Add Count 5—14
Solvent Add Offset 3—43
Solvent Add Pressure 3—8, 3—19, 3—43, 5—9
Solvent Add Time 3—36
Solvent Add valve option 5—23
Solvent Addition, Automatic—All 7300 Printers 3—36, 6—11
Solvent Bottles item 5—27
Solvent Dip (Pick-up) Tube 3—22, 3—23, 5—88, 5—93
Filter 3—23
Solvent Drain option 5—22
Solvent Drain Sequence 3—55
Solvent Flow 3—31
Solvent Flow, Food Grade Printer A—8
Solvent Flush Valve 3—23, 3—28, 3—41
Testing for Leaks 5—89
Testing for Operation 5—87
Solvent Flush valve option 5—23
"Solvent Low" 3—19, 3—22, 3—36, 6—14
Solvent Low (level) 2—4
Solvent Tank 3—22
Capacity 2—4
Construction 2—3
"Solvent Tank Empty" 3—22, 6—9, 7—24
Spectrum Ink Tank Removal 5—53
Spillage Detection, Ink 3—65, 6—10
"Stack Overflow" 6—5
Standards 2—8
Standby Mode—7300 Spectrum Only 4—23
Start Print option 5—7
Start Sequence option 5—19
Starting Up 3—19
Stop Print option 5—7
Stop Sequence option 5—19
Strobe LED 3—7, 3—15
SureFill page 6—13, 6—14
System Event page 6—1
System Events 6—1
System Failures 6—4
1.00 Internal Failure 6—5
1.01 Stack Overflow 6—5
1.02 Corrupt Program Data 6—5
System Flush 5—115
Empty Ink Tank 5—120
Flush Cycle 5—124
Precautions 5—120
Solvent Drain 5—125
System Flush Cycle Sequence 3—53
System Flush page 5—25
System Flush Procedure 5—120
System Options
Line Setup page 4—7
Power Down page 4—7
Power Down page, Food Grade Printer A—12
Maintenance page 5—5
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual Index — 17 Sep 2009
Menu page 4—9
Option Availability 4—5
Password Access 5—2
System Warnings 6—13
3.00 Shutdown Incomplete 6—13
3.01 Shutdown Incomplete (Failure) 6—13
3.02 Memory Corrupt 6—13
3.03 Ink Low 3—22, 6—13
3.04 Solvent Low 3—19, 3—22, 3—36, 6—14
3.05 Over Speed (Print Trigger) 6—14
3.06 Over Speed (Synchronous Data) 6—14
3.07 Over Speed (Asynchronous Data) 6—15
3.08 Over Speed (Line Speed) 6—15
3.09 Over Speed (Compensation) 6—15
3.10 Under Speed (Line Speed) 6—15
3.11 Printer Requires Scheduled Maintenance 5—16, 6—16
3.12 Printhead Cover Off 3—71, 6—16
3.13 Cover Override Link Fitted 3—71, 6—16
3.14 Power Off Override Active 3—71, 6—17
3.15 Safety Override Active 3—71, 6—17
3.16 Gutter Override Active 3—72, 6—17
3.17 Gate Array Test Mode Active 6—18
3.18 Low Pressure 3—19, 3—36, 5—10, 6—18
3.19 Valid UNIC Chip Not Found 6—18
3.20 No Time Of Flight 6—18
3.21 Ink Low Prevented Mix 6—19
3.22 Fault Prevented Mix 6—19
3.23 Power Off Occurred During Mixing 6—19
3.24 Restart In Progress 6—19
3.25 Ink Unmixed For 4 Weeks 6—19
3.26 User Data Corrupt–Please contact your local.. 6—19
3.27 Mix Disabled 4—23, 6—19
3.28 Printhead requires cleaning at shutdown 6—19
Food Grade Printer A—16
3.29 Over Speed (No Remote Data) 6—20
3.30 Remote Error 6—20
3.31 Restarted Print Delay 6—20
T
Technical Data 2—1
Temp (printhead temperature) 5—14
Temperature Sensor, Printhead 3—8
Test Message, creating 5—24
Test Message page 5—24
Create option 5—24
Save option 5—25
Test Points
IPM PCB 3—68
IPM PCB locations 3—75
Test Print option 5—8
Test Printing (Safety) 1—6
Time Of Flight (TOF) 3—8, 3—18
"Time Of Flight Failure" 3—18, 6—9, 7—21
"Time Of Flight Failure", Food Grade Printer A—16
Time Of Flight Measurement 3—7
TOF
Actual TOF 3—18
Reference TOF 3—18
TOF Mode option 5—13
TOF Mode page
Manual Phase option 5—13
TOF Only option 5—13
TOF/Phase option 5—13
TOF Only option 5—13
TOF Sensor 3—7
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 Index — 18 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
TOF Signal 3—18
TOF/Phase option 5—13
Track New Events option 4—11
Training Course Guides 8—1
Food Grade Printer Special Features A—18
Level A: Module 01 – Introduction 8—13
Level A: Module 02 – Continuous Ink Jet Printing 8—14
Level A: Module 03 – Getting Started and Printing 8—15
Level A: Module 06 – Stopping Print and Shutting.. 8—16
Level A: Module 07 – Looking After Your Printer 8—17
Level A: Module 09 – Line Installation 8—18
Level A: Module 10 – Review 8—19
Level C: Module 01 – Introduction 8—3
Level C: Module 02 – Continuous Ink Jet Printing 8—4
Level C: Module 03 – Getting Started and Printing 8—5
Level C: Module 04 – Navigating the 7300 8—6
Level C: Module 05 – Creating and Editing Messages 8—7
Level C: Module 06 – Stopping Print and Shutting.. 8—8
Level C: Module 07 – Looking After Your Printer 8—9
Level C: Module 08 – Routine Maintenance 8—10
Level C: Module 09 – Line Installation 8—11
Level C: Module 10 – Review 8—12
Trigger Device Types 3—77, 3—79
Troubleshooting 7—1
Miscellaneous Faults
Spectrum printer—no print 7—3
Spectrum printer—printing, but low ink opacity 7—3
Troubleshooting Start (T'shoot. FC001) 7—6
Troubleshooting Start (T'shoot. FC001), Food Grade A—17
U
"Under Speed (Line Speed)" 6—15
UNIC 3—67, 3—76, 4—21, 6—18
UNIC Code option 4—21
Units option 4—24
USB Facility 3—76, 3—88
Use Language Defaults option 4—24
"User Data Corrupt–Please contact your local..." 6—19
User Interface 3—4
V
"Valid UNIC Chip Not Found" 6—18
Valve Cableform Assembly 3—65
Valve Reset option 5—23
Valve Sequences 3—41, A—8
Empty Tank Sequence 3—55
Fault Shutdown Sequence 3—50
Feed Dry Cycle Sequence 3—51
Filter Purge Sequence 3—54
Flush Cycle Sequence 3—53
Gutter Dry Cycle Sequence 3—55
Ink Mixing Sequence—7300 Spectrum Printer Only 3—57
Jet Test – Start Sequence 3—44
Jet Test – Stop Sequence 3—50
Normal Shutdown Sequence 3—46
Normal Shutdown Sequence, Food Grade Printer A—9
Normal Start Sequence 3—44
Normal Start Sequence, Food Grade Printer A—8
Nozzle Clear Sequence 3—52
Nozzle Flush Sequence 3—56
Purge Dry Cycle Sequence 3—51
Restart Sequence 3—45
Solvent Drain Sequence 3—55
Valve Sequences Summary Tables 3—41
Valve Sequences Summary Tables, Food Grade A—8
FA69084–1
Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual Index — 19 Sep 2009
Valves (Ink System) 3—28, 3—65
Valves page 5—23
Feed valve option 5—23
Gutter valve option 5—23
Mix valve option 5—23
Open/Close option 5—23
Printhead Feed valve option 5—23
Purge valve option 5—23
Solvent Add valve option 5—23
Solvent Flush valve option 5—23
Valve Reset option 5—23
Venturi 3—23, 3—27
Venturi Manifold Assembly 3—22, 3—23, 3—26
"Viscosity" 3—19, 6—11, 7—29
Viscosity Control 3—19
Viscosity Control, Food Grade Printer A—3
Viscosity, Ink 3—8, 3—18, 3—19
Viscosity Settle Time 3—19, 3—36
W
Warm-up Delay A—4, A—19
Warning LED 3—4
Warnings (Safety) 1—1
Width Adjuster Unit 3—82
X
XCAL125/XCAL255 option 5—18
FA69084–1
Sep 2009 Index — 20 Linx 7300 Maintenance Manual
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NOTES MK7 PRINT
1. OPTION BUSS INTERFACE SIGNALS THERMISTOR HEAD INK SYSTEM
NOTE 5 FEED
5V,12V,24V,-16V OPTION BOARD NEXT OBJECT P/CELL VALVE
D[0..7] OPTION BOARD AUXILIARY INPUT
A[28..31] I2CSCL, I2CSDA MODULATION
/A-OE-/GPL-B1, A-WE0-/BS-AB0, /A-RESET /DREQ1, /SDACK1
SMTXD2, AUX-SMRXD2 RASTER-TRIG
IRQ4-AUX0-1
OPTION BOARD SHAFT ENCODER
CHARGE
D D
TO UP
5. NTC 10K SIEMENS B57621C103J62 LEVEL SENSOR VALVE
DPP PLATE
(PHASE/TOF)
7. POSITIVE AIR PUMP TYPE ASF THOMAS BLG 12/02-4
8. FAN TYPE
SOLVENT TANK
LEVEL SENSOR
+ SIGNAL - SIGNAL
INK SPILL
DETECTOR
PRESSURE
2 WAY MOLEX 2 WAY MOLEX TRANSDUCER PL17 PL18 SK1
MINIFIT JNR MINIFIT JNR KEYPAD LED'S LCD
CONDUIT - SUPPLY
2/4 NOTE 12
METRES PL20 7 WAY
INVERTER CONNECTOR
HITACHI INVERTER
C 40 WAY IDC
CONNECTOR
PL38
K/BOARD IPM
SCAN0-9
INVC657
C
RETURN0-7
/LCD-ENB
12V, 3.3V, 0V, 0VI
EHT3000 PSU SAFETY
EARTH
MP15007 HIGHVOL EHT PL37
CONNECTOR 18 WAY MOLEX 24 WAY MOLEX 24 WAY MOLEX LCD IPM
0 - 10KV MINIFIT JNR MINIFIT JNR MINIFIT JNR 34 WAY IDC
3 x RADIALL MCX CONNECTOR LD0-8, SHIFT-CLK, LCD-A-C+
SERIES MINI BNC LD0-8, SHIFT-CLK, LCD-A-C-
/CTRL/ALT/SHIFT
/FAIL, WARNING, READY-LED
B SK6
ETHERNET
SK7
4 WAY USB B
CONNECTOR
4 WAY USB A
PL14
OPTION
B
ETHERNET CONNECTOR
BUSS 50 WAY IDC 50 WAY IDC
PL8 CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
POWER SK8 8 WAY RJ45
5.1V 16 WAY MOLEX 16 WAY MOLEX ETHERNET CONNECTOR NOTE 1
L 12V MINIFIT JNR MINIFIT JNR 5.1V
N -16V 12V PL30
E 24V -16V PL15 10 WAY IDC
PF 24V SMC1 CONNECTOR PL27
PF PL10 2 WAY MOLEX ALARM VFC
PL16 10 WAY IDC 24V ALARM MINIFIT JNR
SMC2 CONNECTOR COM
24V NC1
L N 14 WAY MOLEX PL19 10 WAY IDC RETURN NO2
0V TO CHASSIS MINIFIT JNR PL18 SCC3 CONNECTOR NO3
CONNECTON AUTO POWER OFF NC4
PIO PCB NO4
LIVE-SWRELIN
NEUTRAL_SWRELIN AS16127
LIVE-SWRELOUT
NEUTRAL_SWRELOUT NOTE 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1